Home

Panasonic FP-X Programmable Controller User`s Manual

1. Statue Satay a nae xi If the error is an operation error the error Program Information Close lt i i i Program Size 1752K Ret 11775 address can be confirmed in this dialog Machine Lanquage Of OK ConfiqAreaSize Of OK Ea box File Reaister Size 20477 20K 1 0 Comment Size 100000P Rest 100000 P Block Comment 5000L Rest 5000 L 170 Error Remark Si S5000P Rest 5000P i i ame After correcting the error click on the onnection l i i HE tc 3 Be ee No i ea E E Clear Error button to clear the error Version F20 Scar Time 1 0 msec Operation Err Condition Normal Miri 0 5 msec PLE Mode REMOTE PROG Ma 1 5 msec r PLE Eror Flag PLE Mode Flag PE link Self 0 WOVeni O0 Mode gt 0 OUT Refresh gt 0 wai Volt Dip O BatteyEr 0 TEST Mode QO STEPRUN OQ Wik 140 Error 0 Hold 0 Break Mode 0 Message 0 Advance Unit 0 Ope Er 0 Break Enable 0 Remote i Force flac O Ewemal l 0 Hee Self Diagnosis Error Message EnorCode 0 g Key Point To display the status display dialog box select Status Display under Online on the menu bar Procedure 2 lt For error code is 1 to 9 gt Condition There is a syntax error in the program Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error lt For error code is 20 or higher gt
2. F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 R9IIC R20 R2F R2I 52 DF i R911D R21 R21 61 k pF FI DMV Ko ors Fi DMV K10000 Drio F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 R91 IC R2i RF R22 82 DF J jk R911D R22 R22 91 LY pF Fi Dmv K10000 pre Fi bmv K10000 DTIO F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 R9IIC R2 RF R23 112 DF R911D R23 R23 121 L pF FI ow ko og FI DMV KO Dio F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 R9IIC R23 R2F 142 DF R911D X2 X2 150 H FOMV Hio DT90052 FOMV H100 DT90052 FOMV Hiios DT90052 FOMV H1100 DT90052 171 i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Home return operation Minus direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CHO and CCW output Y201 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins In CHO when X100 turns on deceleration begins and when X102 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0 In CH1 when X200 turns on deceleration begins and when X202 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0 When the operations in both CHs is completed the return to home completes 0 V 24 V DC S E FP X Ry FAFPX PLS Hom
3. Termina avout COM1 line i l Transmission ICON line RS485 l T station set SW ine 4200 to ON side SW Cassette backside switch COM2 Baud rate 1 __ 9 COM1 general unit A GN Default 3 4 115200bps 1C_Is 2c COM1 terminal unit 115200bps 4 1 O COM2 general unit 2 N 4 1 Cs l 20S 9600bps COM2 terminal unit 3 Default 4 Note The baud rate for the COM1 port is specified only by the system register However for the COM2 port it should be specified by the switches and the system register po 4 1 communication 1 N communication Computer link Available i o cece O e communication Available Note Only the COM1 port MODBUSRTU Availale can be used Note1 For the COM1 port the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit 2 regardless the setting of stop bit The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit Note2 The RS485 of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 4 Examples of Connection AFPX COM1 1 channel 5 wire COM1 Pinname Signal name __ _Abbre _ RD Receivedata RD _ RS232C Destination device RD Receive Data ee r Request to Send Signal Ground Note When the device to connect is a three wire type the RS
4. 415 2 kbps oo For baud rate 70 27 6 kbps Number of units stations 40 0 TOQ 1000 1200 Transmission distance m When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps you can set up to a maximum of 99 units stations and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m Note3 Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 The converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side Adjust the response time for the FP X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary Note6 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Note7 The termination resistance of the RS485 RS422 in the COM3 COM4 and COM6G is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Note8 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only Ver 2 0 or later Communication specifications 2 Interface Ethernet O ttem Specifications _ _ Connector shape RJ45 Transmission specifications Max segment length MDI MDI X Auto crossover function Note1 The length between a HUB and the module Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 We
5. C60R Number of 45 points per common which are simulta neously on 38 55 Ambient temperature C C14RD Number of points per common which are simulta 4 neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30RD Number of points per common 16 which are 13 simulta neously on 9 43 5055 Ambient temperature C C60RD Number of 32 points per common which are 20 simulta neously on 4550 55 Ambient temperature C Number of ponts per common which are simulta neously on 4850 55 Ambient temperature C C30R Number of 14 points per i common 8p which are i simulta neously on ba Ambient temperature C C60R Number of 28 points per common which ar 13 simulta neously on Ambient temperature C C14RD Number of points per 6 common which are 4 simulta neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30RD Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 43 50 55 Ambient temperature C C60RD Number of 28 points per common 21 which are 16 simulta neously on 42 5055 Ambient temperature C Configuration Stand alone COM5 2 5 2 Relay Ry Type With AFPX DA2 and AFPX A21 Current Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number _ Limitations on number of _ Limitations o
6. Counting area for the pulse I O Note DT El L A A 90356 apsed Lower words CH2 Y4 Y5 a Aa DT90357 Higher words PLS CH2 The target value is set when Note DT L A A meee OWS words instructions F171 SPDH pa ane F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A A executed Counting area for the pulse I O pa fate DT90360 Elapsed Lower words A A p S CH3 Y6 Y7 DT90361 Higher words PLS CH3 The target value is set when Note DT 2 L A A 2039 Bea overs instructions F171 SPDH pa ane F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A oa executed Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH instructions only DT90351 Higher words DT90355 Higher words DT90359 Higher words DT90363 Higher words Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Tr type FP X A Available N A Not available am tet a a When HSC control is executed by FO MV S DT90052 instruction the setting value for the target CH is stored in each CH Control flag monitor area C ae A A A ae PLS CH3 Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH instructions only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax
7. D P140 R9009 set PSTC 5D1lolalolal ia dalton lese O a eee R9009 reset PCLC allal al El GJE Watching S The time allowable scan time for the Pie dog timer PWDT system of watching dog timer is update changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number update PIORF specified by D1 to the number specified by D2 The COM port received flag R9038 is set to off to enable reception Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port 1 S 2 Sends the data to another station in the network MEWNET via link unit S1 S 2 Receives the data to another station N D in the network MEWNET via link unit S1 S 2 Sends the data to the slave station as the MOD bus master via COM port S1 S 2 Receives the data from the slave station N D as the MOD bus master via COM port S1 S 2 Sends the data to the slave station of the MOD bus master type II F144 Serial data TRNS communica tion control P145 P146 PRECV P145 P146 pa p F146 Data receive RECV S1 S 2 Receives the data from the slave station O U zZ zZ U zZ O F145 Data send S1 S 2 Sends the data to the slave station as P145 D N the MEWTOCOL master via COM x O F146 Data receive RECV P146 x C 7 E F148 Self ERR P148 diagnostic PERR error set port S1 S 2 Receives the data from the slave station N D as the MEWT
8. Fo MV HO WRO 7 Note It is H2001 for COM2 port Note2 It is R904A for COM2 port Note Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1 21 or later version only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Flow chart Data initialization R9044 Note DT50 and DT50 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 Sends a data read command Sends a data be F145 write command Execute F146 SEND instruction REC instruction Completion Turns RO off Note It is R904A for COM2 port The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM1 port 3 Reads the data DTO and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM1 port Note The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 4 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 7 4 1 General purpose Serial Communication Overview e In general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the COM ports to and from an external device such a
9. LDO 400 LD 0 100 4 Fo MV K100 LDO 1 No 1 Link register S _ LD 0 100 Only the COM1 port can be used for the PC PLC link Excluding AFPX COM5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net MODBUS RTU Function overview e The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP X and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit e Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions e Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped e The communication cassette and the USB port can be used About MODBUS RTU e The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them e There are ASCI mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP X is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible Slave Slave slave slave Slave KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit Slave function If
10. Note It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sampling by the F155 SMPL instruction simultaneously How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger request Following two methods are available 1 Deactivate request by the tool software 2 Deactivate request by the F156 STRG instruction If the stop trigger activates the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified No of delay and then stop the sampling operation Once the sampling operation stops the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the No of delay Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Operation image of sampling trace Trace memory in PLC pi 1 sampling data Fi kn jl 1 i Back to the biginning x y ii Y ii exceeding the area j f i l Fd a D of 12 5 3 How to Use Sampling Trace W FPWIN GR Untitle1 2 Monitoring Time Chart iy File View Online Settings Option Help l x Sjaj j afe fm 24 2 vo Comment Remark FP216K Onine PLC REMOTE RUN Monitor stopping Home FREE Sampling Times 1000 Times s Resetting Rate 100ms Monitor configuration Sampling data display i Data entr
11. Outupt terminal External Outupt terminal External an i f power i lt o ox power 5 am amO j Load l supply 5 Load supply 9 O I O O i 5 F JS Power 5 pa R Power i aN Slr a supply of ae 7 al Clr supply o w 70H sre Tg l r load i w I Yaha J 3 k joad B 5 24V DC I EJ Sj 24V DC 1 terminal U J terminal O oe O a o 3 gt i I i EE J Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points gt a Reference lt 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points 2 5 1 Relay Ry Type Stand alone and With AFPX COM5 Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Limitations on number of Limitations on number of Product number i 5 simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14R AFPX C60RD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Number of a points per common which are simulta neously on 485055 Ambient temperature C C30R Number of 1 points per common which are 9 simulta neously on n vv 45 55 Ambient temperature C
12. Reference For the information on FP2 MCU lt Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC PLC link link relays with a total of 1024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation No Name Nn Receive area Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can be used as internal relays No Name Nw ee Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size ERTS ENTE With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to Receive area LD127 can be used as internal registers Used Not used Internal relay Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net cS Note Precautions When Allocating Link Areas If a mistake is made when allocating a link area be aware that an error will result and communication will be disabled Avoid overlapping send areas
13. lt Using AFPX COM5 gt Combination of Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C type GT series side a Send Data RD FP X side 5 pin terminal Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 3 3 1 N Communication Computer Link Overview For a 1 N computer link the computer and the FP X are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 converter and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer FP X FP X FP X FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 es ao Computer Commercially available converter RS485 The unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit number of the PLC sending a response is Included in the response message Note Lineeye SI 35 is recommended to be used as a converter Setting system registers Setting of COM1 port No 410 Unit number for COM1 port 1 to 99 Set the desired unit number With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified No 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port Computer link Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop
14. 4 AW G20 thylene 0 5mm 7 8mm 2 pair S0 5 mm x 1P a Polychlo ter 0 5 mm Max Approx VCTF 0 5 Con gt Insu rinated 2 ductor AW G20 0 6mm 6 2mm mm x 2C JIS i biphenyl Shield _ Covel Shielded j ag 0 3 mm Max Onamba Co Vinyl Max Approx multicore nai AW G22 Ltd ONB D6 x ductor p chloride 0 3mm 6 6 mm 5 cable or greater 0 3 mm Note e Use shielded twisted pair cables e Use only one type of transmission cable Do not mix more than 1 type e Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments e When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line grounded one end e If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 mm Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 9 Handling of Backup Battery 5 9 1 What Backup Battery Does Install an optional backup battery when the hold area is insufficient in the initial state or for using the clock calender function Areas backed up with the battery Classification Hold area when Hold area when battery is not installed battery is installed Timer and counter Hold areas or non Elapsed value area Eyre aren nom hold hie a a Internal relay R2480 to R255F Pe en ne by setting the DT12230 to DT12284 system registers Data register C30 C60
15. A Available N A Not available Restrictions on control unit Cassette Cassette Expansion Type of add on cassette mounting mounting connector part 1 part 2 part FP X Communication cassette AFPX COM2 A na Commu EPX Communication cassette AFPX COMS A na rigaion FPX Communication cassete aFPx com4 A na VA gt gt gt e Z gt FPX Input cassete AFPXINS A FPX Analog output cassette AFPXDA2 A FP X Analog VO cassette AFPX A2T a a ant Appli FP X Thermocouple cassette AFPx To2 A a cation FP X RTD cassette arPxR ID2 a a cassette FP X Output cassete AFPXTRB a a FP X Output cassette AFPXTREP a a FP X VO cassete AFPXINATS a a asa Aree Ac Note 1 Only one FP X master memory cassette AFPX MRTC can be installed If 2 units are installed E26 user ROM error will occur 2 One application cassette can be installed in either cassette mounting part 1 or 2 of C30 C60 3 As only one communication cassette can be installed in the cassette mounting part 1 it should be installed on the application cassette if the application cassette is installed It cannot be installed in the cassette mounting part 2 4 The add on cassette cannot be installed in the expansion connector part of C60 it does not work 5 The pulse I O cassette cannot be installed on the FP X Tr type The add on cassette PISIS TEE iG gt O Phone 800 894 0412
16. Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred Operation Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net lt For error code is 42 1 gt Condition The expansion unit or add on cassette that had been connected when the power supply of the control unit was turned on has come off or the expansion unit has powered off Operation 1 Turn off the power supply of the control unit and connect the expansion unit and add on cassette Operation 2 Turn on the power supply of the expansion unit lt For error code is 42 2 gt Condition A temporary blackout such as a momentary power off occurred and the power supply of the expansion unit was turned off Operation Once the power supply of the expansion unit is restored the control unit will be automatically reset and restarted Using FPWIN GR Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared e In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR 3 Key Point When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored i
17. Control code H1110 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz incremental counting CW X3 H F172 PLSH DT 300 KO f Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT300 is used The data table headed by DT300 is used 1 I and pulses are output from CHO J X5 eee een en ep oe ee ee HDF AH Fo MV H108 DT 90052 pr Overrun process Fo mv 100 DT90052 1 __ Pulse ouput stop pulse output stop clear Pulse output diagram _ X3 JOG N L L side side command OFF Motor a gt 300Hz Y100 Pulse Ole Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net JOG operation Minus direction While X4 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CHO Program Data table x4 Control code Hiji2i Duty 1 4 25 _48 Hz to 100 kHz Decremental counting CCW x4 F172 PLSH DT 310 KO F Pulse output instruction i JOG operation The data table headed by DT310 is used The data table headed by DT310 Is used Pulses are output fromCHo0 _ 2nd pulses are output from CHO _ 7 HDF Fo mv H108 DT 90052_ r r Overrun process Pulse output stop pulse output stop clear J FO MV H100 DT 900827 Se ee Pulse output diagram X4 JOG ON fF TL Fe side side command OFF Motor 300Hz Y101 Pulse OHz lt lt
18. Control unit Communication cassette Baud rate of COMI a600 bps Server Setting Source Port No 9094 4025 32767 Time Out fo 0 1800s 0 No TimeOut Client Setting Destination IP Destination Port No 4025 32767 Source Port No 0 1025 32767 Time Out 1800s 0 No TimeOut Retry Time 0 1800s IES r If the TCP is selected for the communication protocol up to three connections are established using the computer link Ethernet however when using the programming tool FPWIN GR for connection using registration monitor command multi frame more than two connections cannot be established Also If the UDP is selected for the communication protocol the UDP communication cannot be used as the programming tool FPWIN GR does not support it although no restriction on connections Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 6 Communication Computer Link Ethernet Overview A 1 1 computer link connects the FP X and a computer using a UTP cable CAT5 Communication is conducted via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC rs lt dp Command message i oe ty d Computer FP X gt E E ort z S5 S Tk tt ge is RS a ae et a we Response message 4 s f EEE I UTP cable CATS PN 1 1 Communication setting Computer link Ethernet This setting enabl
19. E Computer link General purpose serial communication IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Client Server Client Server AFPX COM5 No of connections Max 1 connection Client Max 1 connection Max 3 connections Server Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Communication specifications 1 Interface RS232C RS422 RS485 Specifications RS232C RS422 isolated Interface a Note1 RS485 isolated Communication mode 1 1 communication 1 N communication ee Two wire half duplex Communication method Half duplex communication cele communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Shielded twisted pair cable or VCTF vax 100m Max 1200 mT Baud rate to be set by system register 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 7600 115200 bps Note8 Computer link ASCIl JIS7 JIS8 mission l ae ASCII JIS7 JIS8 Binary ae serial communication Communication format to be set by 1 bit 2 bits system register STX No STX iii CR CR LF None ETX Max 99 units No of connected units N 2 units max 32 units when C NET adapter is connected Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the
20. Pulse 10 cassette settings HSC PLS Modem Enabled Stop Bit Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Mota Baudrate 3800 bps Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM2 Part Cancel Head Initialize Help COM1 port setting AFPX COM5 No Setting item Setting value No 410 1 to 99 No 412__ Communicationmode Computer link Character bit Paritycheck Odd S No 413 3 Communication format Note1 Set the baud rate to match the baud rate COM1 port of the AFPX COM5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting Ethernet communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the AFPX COM5 Start the Configurator WD Search the AFPX COM5 Select the AFPX COM5 from the search result and set an IP address to connect with a computer After that search again Select the AFPX COM5 and select Edit gt Communication Setting in the menu or right click to select Communication Setting Communication Setting af FP M COME Computer 15325450291 Dialog box of communication setting Communication Setting Communication Mode Computer Link Cancel Action Mode Server Mode v
21. Reference For the information on the installation of the FPWIN GR lt FPWIN GR Ver 2 Operation Guide Book ARCT1F332 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 6 Installation of USB Driver Following 2 USB drivers must be installed to recognize the USB e USB driver e USB COM conversion driver The installation procedures differ depending on the OS in the PC to be used ACS Note For the PC with more than one connectors it may be requested to reinstall these 2 drivers if the positions of the USB connecters are changed In that case reinstall the drivers With Windows XP 1 Turn on the power supply of the FP X and connect the FP X with a PC using the USB cable LER USB cable Commercial PC 2 After the connection the PC recognize the USB driver automatically As the following message is shown select No not this time and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue Note This display is not be shown w
22. S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S27 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 Df ese ag b a a 4 4 1 PEPER 4 4 1 lt S2 1 S27 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the d comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparati
23. register is automatically added to the data that has been sent ge f ian e The maximum volume of data that can be MA sent is 2048 bytes Le Wa RS232C port Receiving data Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register and the reception done flag goes on Data can be received whenever the reception done flag is off sag ow eee e When data is being received the reception done flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN Data receiving instruction a e No terminator is included in the stored data Device with e The maximum volume of data that can be RS232C port received is 4096 bytes me Reception done flag on Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting communication parameters in the general purpose serial communication mode By default the COM port is set to Computer link System register settings should be entered for the following items The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Gonfieuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 i 1 v No 413 Communication Format ERA Gn Errai No 410 Unit No
24. DT10000 DT10009 Target IP address for unit number Destination unit number and IP address is specified 192 168 1100 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 100 192168 1 100 1 Network information notification Network information is notified to the FP X from the AFPX COMB5 Network information is written to the data register of FP X by the AFPX COM5 2 Network information confirmation Network information on the AFP COM5 can be confirmed from the FP X The virtual data register within the AFP COM5 is read from the FP X 3 Connection information confirmation Connection information on the AFPX COM5 can be confirmed from a destination device from a device on a LAN The virtual data register within the AFPX COM5 is read from a destination device on a LAN Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Network information notification area Set the area to be used for the network information notification network information confirmation and connection information confirmation When DT1000 default is set for the network information notification area the following areas will be used Network information notification and network information confirmation areas Register Description Description No Higher bytes Lower bytes DT10000 Own IP address 1 When own IP address is 192 168 1 5 DT10001 0x00 reserve Own iP address 29 HOOCO K192 is notified confirmed i n DT10000
25. DT110 DT111 Fi DMV Ko DT110 O Conrolcode H1110 Duty 14 25 AB Hz t100 KHE Absolute CY and Geay F171 SPDH DT 100 KO f Pulse output instruction 1 z table shaped control i 7 he data table headed by DT 100 is used The data table headed by DT100 is used _and pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output from CHO R9110 R30 To R32 a a ee ee ne or zh Positioning done pulse 1 second R32 Tn K 10 Pulse output diagram 4000 Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home Return Common to Transistor type e This function performs home return according to the specified data table The elapsed value area CHO DT90348 DT90349 and CH1 DT90352 DT90353 is cleared to zero after the completion of home return Pulses are output from Y101 and a return to the home position is carried out at an initial F1 DMV K200 DT202 speed of 200 Hz a maximum speed of 2000 LDF F1 DMV H1125 DT200 F1 DMV K2000 DT204 Hz and an acceleration deceleration time of 150 ms F1 DMV K150 DT206 F1 DMV K10 DT208 F171 SPDH DT200 KO When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table Control code Initial speed p Max speed 2000 Hz Acceleration 3 o deceleration time 150
26. DT32710 to DT32764 No 6 to No 13 using a A z o gt tool All points can Link relay be also held register Type of backup battery Sold separately Operation memory Name Battery Product No AFPX BATT Installable number of batteries As for FP X the installable number of batteries varies depending on the types of the control unit c60 z oS 5 a Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 9 2 Settings of Battery Error Alarm and Hold Area Setting of the battery error alarm Setting the battery error alarm enables you to monitor the remaining backup battery level By default the battery error alarm is set to off in the system register settings For using the battery check the box of the system register No 4 Alarm Battery Error of the control unit ELE Gontiguration Untitlel HoldNon hold 1 Hold Mon hold 2 W MHo 20 Disable settings for duplicated output Ww Ho 23 Stop when an lO verification error occurs Pulse 10 cassette settings HSC PLS Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings W Mo zE Stop when an operation error occurs Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool Port COMI Port COM Port Cancel Initialize Help Settings of Hold area Non hold area The
27. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming 1 Programming tool software The tool software can also be used with the FP tool software series a LAN M Programming FPWIN Pro Ver 6 or FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows software is used with FP X FPWIN GR Ver 1x NPST GR and FP Programmer cannot be used 2 PC connection cable The dedicated cable is available A commercial USB cable can be used for the connection for C30 C60 control unit Computer 2 PC connection cable 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software OS Operating system beads Windows 98 pan ee AFPS10520 FPWIN GR Ver 2 A OE j Windows 2000 English 40MB or more language menu Upgrade Windows XP version Windows Vista AFPS10520R Windows 7 Note1 Ver 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version Note2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver 2 1 free of charge at our web site http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp Use the latest version Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS Operating system penny Windows 2000 dba tus inane 100MB or more FPWINPROFENG English language menu Windows Vista Windows 7 Note1 The small type and upgrade version is
28. Number of points per j DA2 common which are A21 simulta A21 A21 neously on DA2 DA2 5 DA2 A21 Ambient temperature C C30R Number of 4 points per common 12 which are 40 simulta neously on 35 41 45 55 Ambient temperature C C60R Number of 2 points per common which are 13 simulta neously on C14RD Number of points per common which are simulta 4 neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30RD Number of points per 16 common which are 11 simulta neously on 43 50 55 Ambient temperature C C60RD Number of 28 points per common which are simulta neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C 2 5 4 Transistor Tr Type NPN Stand alone and With AFPX COM5 Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number AFPX C14T AFPX C30T AFPX C60T AFPX C14TD AFPX C30TD AFPX C60TD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points C14T Number of points per g common which are simulta 4 neously on 51 55 Ambient temperature C C30T Number of qg points per common which are 10 simulta neously on 4955 Ambient temperature C C60T Number of 32 points per common which are 1 simulta neously on 4042 55 Am
29. PLC Configuration option from the menu bar 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 26 4 Remove the check of system register 26 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC 14 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors lt Procedure gt 1 Check the location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error e Select Online gt Status Display in the menu bar Execute Clear Error e An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 e f the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared So if the cause of the error is not removed the error may seem not to be cleared Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 4 4 Points to Check in Program 1 Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register lt Example gt When a data register is modified using an index register RO H Fo MV DTO lODTO In this ca
30. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 9 FP X Pulse I O Cassette Product No AFPX PLS IEF er hare The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the FP X Control Unit Tr type High speed counter part Po ttem Specifications EN61 131 2 Applicable type Note This is the specification when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 C As the input of the pulse I O cassette is for the counter input the response time is quick Therefore if it is used as a normal input it is recommended to add a timer by a ladder program to prevent chattering or noises to be received as input signals po tem Cescription O O Output type Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Max surge current Output points per common Off state leakage current On state voltage drop YO 2 us or less when the load current is 15 mA or more l Y1 5 us or less when the load current is 15 mA or more Response time 1 ms or less External power supply terminals Operating mode indicator Pulse output part Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net LED indication Terminal layout LED indication HSC PLS rr Ce OE e e UOU O OU O LJ O OU U XO Al X2 YO YI Y2 Terminal layout EO Z AFF AF AF Z A fF EO AF aF ZAF AA COM XO X1 X2 YO Y1 Y2 Circuit diagram H
31. Pulse output controls F1 Change and read FP of the elapsed S DT90044 value of high FP X speed counter S DT90300 and Pulse output FP S DT90052 DT90044 D FP X DT90300 D Target value much on with channel specification F167 Target value much off with channel specification F171 Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return F172 Pulse output with channel specification JOG operation F173 PWM output with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table control F175 Pulse output Linear interpolation F176 Pulse output Circular interpolation Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table th
32. Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the pulse output stop lt 10 4 4 Pulse output control instruction FO F1 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Control e Positioning is performed according to the specified data table R9010 H F1 DMV H 1200 DT400 Control code H1200 7 When the execution condition R10 goes F1 DMV K 1000 DT402 Frequency 1 1000 Hz on pulses are output from Y100 of the F1 DMV K 1000 DT404 Targe value 1 1000 pulses pulse I O cassette at a frequency of 1000 Hz and positioning begins F1 DMV K 2500 DT406 Frequency 2 2500 Hz At the point when 1000 pulses have F1 DMV K 2000 DT408 Target value 2 2000 pulses been counted the frequency switches to 2500 Hz Positioning is then carried F1 DMV K 5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5000 Hz out sequentially in accordance with the F1 DMV K 5000 DT412 Target value 3 5000 pulses values of the data table until it stops at the data table containing the pulse F1 DMV K 1000 DT414 Frequency 4 1000 Hz output stop value KO F1 DMV K 2000 DT416 Target value 4 2000 pulses When the program runs the data table and pulse output diagram are as shown Rio LF DMV K 0 DT418 Pulse output stop bal HDF HF174 SPOH DT400 KO Pulse output start Positioning data table
33. Send type UNICAST BROADCAST Note2 Destination IP address IP address of destination Destination port No 1025 to 32767 a n Source port No 0 1025 to 32767 imeout P 0 No Timeout 0 1800 Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the TENT communication environment setting of the Destination IP Address 192 168 1 100 COM port of the FP X Destination Port No sos doesn Note2 When selecting BROADCAST the setting of ource Port No i mace ee aiit ck the destination IP address is not required Timeout AAA ae 0 No Timeout 0 1800 IEF er After the AFPX COM5 is powered on it will take about 5 seconds for initializing the Ethernet Until the Ethernet is initialized data cannot be transmitted or received For the Ethernet communication programming is necessary to start the communication after 5 seconds since the power turned on send type UNICAST xl UDPsetting Server Setting Generally as a router does not transmit a broadcast packet communication over the router cannot be achieved Using the broadcast processing load is applied on all equipment on the network Confirm that the broadcast does not affect other equipment before using it Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 9 MEWTOCOL Master Ethernet Sample Program Ver 1 10 or Later Overview MEW TOCOL communication can be performed with the FP X using the
34. T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x 4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pom 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 15 4 13 ms Tik 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 8 relays and register have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 4 119 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 m
35. TMX 0 K10 0 1 s type timer F Setting K10 and using itas a 1 s timer L n nMInuMiInMIMsIS Pulse output diagram 6000 Hz 8000 pulses 1000 Hz Hz x 300 ms 300 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Absolute position control operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from CW output Y100 or CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22000 the pulses are output from Y101 and if the value is smaller than 22000 the pulses are output from Y100 Note In that case the memory Y100 or Y101 does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible 0 V 24 V DC FP X h kaikis SaaS X1 Start input Pulse output CW POOG OO JUUL Baa Pulse output CCW Motor driver 10 000 22 000 30 000 Regardless of the current value its movement is towards position 22 000 Program x Ag11C R32 R30 e ee eee eee ee ee HDF Positioning operation running R30 ee R30 R31 ODPO E DF F L Ht Positioning operation start R31 Positioning data table Fi DMV H1110 DT100 D Control code H1110 F1 DMV K200 DT 102 Initial speed 2000 Hz F1 DMV K4000 DT104 a M nics 4000 Hz Acceleration time 200 ms F1 DMV K300 DT106 Targetvalic vo nsa Movement amount 2000 pulses F1 DMV K22000 DT108
36. Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 1 Features Functions and Restrictions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit Features e Compact size general purpose PLC that is suitable for the small scale facility control e Can be directly connected to a personal computer using USB communication port e High dimensional security functions to deal with copying programs e Supports analog control e Following items are provided as options Application cassettes such as the positioning control function by the high speed counter and pulse output Fulfilling communication cassettes Realtime clock function Basic functions as compact size general purpose PLC suitable for the small scale facility control Basic functions including the followings are equipped even though it is a general purpose style such as AC power supply screw terminal block and relay output 1 32k step program capacity 2 0 32 us command processing speed 3 Max 382 points I O control Single phase 8 channel and 2 phase 4 channel high speed counter functions are equipped for the control unit Fulfilling function enhancement Various add on cassettes are available as options such as 10 types of application cassettes and 6 types of comm
37. a fe ai ts ay a a f pa nies eg pe aa eH a E ai a i J E E Link with FP2 and FP is possible Data sharing between small size and medium size PLCs is easily achievable in one network The FP X supports MEWNET W0O and the programless PLC link with the FP2 or FP is possible FPZIFP2SH FP X FPE Unit No 16 units Baud rate 115 2 kbps Transmission distance 1200 m Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Supports Modbus RTU It can be used as a master unit slave units F145 and F146 instructions It can be easily communicated with a temperature control device inverter FP e or overseas PLCs It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units FP X Can be used Unit No 99 units Baud rate 115 2 kbps Transmission distance 1200 m a5 a master unit p EAL EH RE ural arian be Temperature Inverter FP e FP X control Can be used equipment as a slave unit MEWTOCOL communication It can be used as a master unit slave units F145 and F146 instructions It can be easily communicated with a PLC image processor temperature control device message runner or eco power meter It is possible to communicate with up to 99 units Can be used as a master unit Unit No 99 units Baud rate 115 2 kbps Transmission distance 1200 m Maui COTO oe Po E Riana Erann y CUON Swe CR w41 Temperature PLC FP e control Can be used eq
38. communication environment setting of the COM1 eS port of the FP X Note2 When selecting BROADCAST the setting of the destination IP address is not required rate COM1 115200 bps 9600 bps Communication Mode General Communication send type UNICAST v Destination IP Address 192 168 1 100 Destination Port No 9094 0 1025 82767 Source Port No 9095 0 1025 32767 Timeout sec 0 No Timeout 0 1800 ec D WS Note Initializing Ethernet takes approx 5 seconds on the AFPX COM5 after turning on the power supply Until it finishes data cannot be sent or received For Ethernet communication programming is necessary to start communication after a lapse of 5 seconds after the power activation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 11 PC PLC Link Communication Ethernet Ver 1 10 or Later Overview Data sharing is available using the PC PLC link function of the FP X via Ethernet How to use and set is the same as the PC PLC link via RS485 IP address A IP address B IP address C IP address D Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Receive area Send area Send area Receive area gt HUB Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net PC PLC link communication setting When the PC PLC link function has been selected on the FP X
39. non isolated 2 channel analog output isolated isolated between channels 2 channel analog input isolated non isolated between channels 1 Channel analog output isolated 2 channel thermocouple input isolated isolated between channels 2 channel RTD input insulated insulated between channels From X100 8 point DC input Erom X200 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X output cassette FP X output cassette 8 point transistor output NPN 6 point transistor output PNP Name Specifications I O No Product No AFPX TR8 From Y100 From Y200 From Y100 From Y200 Note1 The I O numbers are the cassette mounting part 1 from X100 and Y100 and cassette mounting part 2 from X200 and Y200 From X100 From Y100 From X200 From Y200 4 point DC input 3 point transistor output NPN FP X I O cassette From X100 From Y100 From X200 From Y200 2 channel high speed Notez Counter 1 channel pulse output FP X pulse I O cassette FP X master memory cassette Master memory Clock Calendar i ii Reference lt 4 5 I O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette gt Note2 The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 Specifications 8 3 1 FP X Analog Input Cassette Produ
40. turns on and off the desired output e To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 HC1S To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1R e Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set the system registers No 400 and 401 9 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode Unit input X0 X1 to X7 f f f f f FF LELP Lee aa n 2 n 2 n s a o gt count PETT Two phase input mode Increment input CW Unit input ON x sf LILI L J ul L off X2 X4 X6 ON x S U ts tJ U Lor X3 X5 X7 Count o 1 2 nt n Decrement input CCW Unit input 0 UUL JU 3 X2 X4 X6 os OFF ON x1 f Lf LA LO A LE Lore X3 X5 X7 ae Direction discrimination Unit input ON xO OFF X2 X4 X6 4 ON FF X3 X5 X7 j Count o 1 Increasing Decreasing gt Decremental input mode Unit input xo x1 tX f LEL LELI FLALELELEF See Count n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 3 2 l 1 0 o gt Individual input mode Incremental decremental input mode Unit mput ON XO OFF x2 X4 X6 i ON X1 OFF X3 X5 X7 Count Increasing Decreasing y Increasing Decreasing Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email i
41. 01000 3000 3000 10000 Amount of travel Execution condition i Ro JLO S gt R911C R911D Note When the execution condition R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R911C R911D goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10000 and pulse output stops R911C R911D goes off Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 Control code lt H constant gt E Upper word H OOOOOOUOD E Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 M Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz E Operation mode 0 Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute Specifies the target value absolute value E Output method 0 CW Incremental counting 1 CCW Decremental counting 2 Pulse and direction forward off Incremental counting 3 Pulse and direction reverse on Decremental counting 4 Pulse and direction forward on Incremental counting 5 Pulse and direction reverse off Decremental counting 2 Freqency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 KHz se
42. 15 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeneeseeneeeeeneeees 15 16 16 DIMENSIONS cr aa 16 1 TGA DIMENSIONS wxcdececcerectuesdveracctecevedencesyeneuculadauiituiacuutausidatlddatdideldatiad ESEE 16 2 16 2 Cable Adapter Specifications ssansnnnusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm 16 4 TAADPENOIX iri a snes seeasts 17 1 17 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 17 2 17 2 Table of BASIC INSUUCTIOINS sisirin a eet elect aeaa A duties cetecsedetreceiczacecsraearsesasesle 17 48 17 3 Table of High level Instructions cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeaneseeneeones 17 56 17A Wale OF Eror CodeS sse A REAREN aceasta 17 76 17 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication COMMAMNAS cescecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeees 17 89 1726 Hexadecimal BIN Aly BCD rinii ia Ola iliac iranian aise Deis Duis oss uss ae ess Denso 17 90 TAS OLC OG OS a A iela dle Panacea pdt atta iittala Dacia E 17 91 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the
43. 25 M Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz B Output method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting CCW 10 Incremental counting CW 12 Incremental counting Direction output OFF 13 Incremental counting Direction output ON 21 Decremental counting CCW 22 Decremental counting Direction output OFF 23 Decremental counting Direction output ON Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5Hzto9 8kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz In case of count mode set the frequency to 30 kHz or less for executing instructions at the first time 3 Target value Absolute value This is used when setting the target value match stop mode Absolute only Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will be different than the designated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode Output method Range of target values which can be designated Incremental counting Designate a value larger than the current value Dec
44. 5000 Hz 500 Hz 0 Hz _ _ tod S00 ms 300 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Incremental Position Control Operation Minus Direction When X1 turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory Y101 does not turn on off according to the pulse output O V 24 V DC FP X Ry AFPX PLS v kaihin Start input Pulse output CW Dopooe Pulse output CCW side a 8000 pulses AAA Program X1 R911C R22 R20 Sk ln usaf Sn pin dln St Sec sa E DF F Positioning operation running _ i R20 ee R20 R21 en ee a E S N DF w J i Positioning operation start _ J R21 Positioning data table H F1 DMV H1100 DT100 DT100 Control code H 1100 F1 DMV K1000 DT 102 DTIOS Initial speed 1000 Hz DT104 F1 DMV K 6000 DT104 pricg Max spoed __ 6000Hz F1 DMV K DT 1 Mk Acceleration time 300 ms L 300 06 Target value 8000 pul DT109 Movement amount ee F1 DMV K 8000 DT108 DT110 DT111 F1 DMV KO DT110 Controloode HJ 100 uty 1 4 25 48 Hz to100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW F171 SPDH DT 100 KO Pulse output instruction 1 table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CHO J The data table headed by DT100 is used Pulses are output from CHO R911C R20 TO R22 HFA R22
45. A constant of 100 is written to link register LDO of unit no 1 The contents of LDO in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 2 Setting Communication Parameters Setting of communication mode In the default settings the COM1 port is set to computer link mode Set the communication mode using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Options and then click COM1 port tab The PC PLC link is available for COM1 port only Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLE Configuration Untitlel Hold Nor hold 1 Hold Nor hald 2 I No 413 Communication Format Aton Gh Ena Mo410 Unit No 3 Time Hoa Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits Computer Link X Farity Odd ha Pulse 1 0 cassette settings HSCPLS Modern Enabled E Stop Bit z j Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings rrniriati A Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Moti Baudrate 9600 bps Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input pia atang aod se for data r a CE i i Tool Fort senal data communication mod COM Fort Cancel Head PLI Initialize Help No 412 Communication Mode Select the COM1 port operation mode Click on v and select PC Link g
46. AEN Application cassette Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 5 Power Supply 5 5 1 AC Power Supply Wiring of power supply Separate the wiring systems to the control unit and the I O devices Breaker al Use the isolation transformer in situations of excess noise The wire should be 2mm AWG 14 or larger and twisted Earth terminal All le f Rated input voltage AWDIS voltage Rated frequency owable frequency amplitude range range 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC 90 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz IEF Note Using the power supply of the outlying voltage and frequency or using inappropriate wires may cause the fault of the power supply of the PLC Reference lt 5 7 Wiring of Terminal Block gt Isolation of power supply systems Isolate the wiring systems to the FP X output devices and mechanical power apparatus Breaker Input output devices PLC Isolation transformer Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net ACS Note Power supply of the FP X expansion units Be sure to supply power to the FP X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both The same wiring system Turn on off simultaneously Control unit To avoid the influence of noises Use the power supply causing les
47. Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pcm 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 T Tit link table sending time Tit Ttx Sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2 x n n number of stations being added Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool 4 Tik link addition processing time If no stations are being added Tik 0 Tlk Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis Sending time for command to stop transmission if link error occurs Tso master station scan time Tic 10 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction Tis 7 x Ttx Sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x 4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be
48. As it supports two protocols which are TCP IP 1 and UDP IP 2 communication with various devices on a network such as computers can be established Broadcast transmission is available with UDP IP communication Also the PC PLC link function of the FP X is available using broadcast transmission Data can be transmitted to multiple destinations for separate unit numbers station numbers max 99 units when selecting the computer link IP can be automatically get DHCP function The information such as own IP address can be confirmed on the FP X using the network information notification and confirmation functions Note When the firmware version of AFPX COM5 is older than Ver1 10 it can be upgraded by downloading the later version from our website http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list tool plc jsp Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Differences between Ver1 00 and Ver1 10 TCP communication setting Communication mode select Operation mode select Ver1 00 Ver1 10 See eae Client connection Not available Available Available Available General purpose Client connection Available Available communication Server connection Available Available UDP communication setting Communication Operation mode Transmission Ver1 00 Ver1 10 mode select select method ea Not available Available Not available Available er Not available Available Not avai
49. Battery lifetime when the master memory cassette AFPX MRTC is not installed Number of Suggested Type or conmo unii installed batteries poy ueume replacement interval C14 po C14 tpe B yearsormore Ss years Note1 The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied Note2 Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note3 The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied Detection of battery error and time for replacement Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops Create a program to announce errors to the outside as necessary Two seconds after starting supplying power the battery voltage is checked When the system register No 4 Battery Error Alarm is enabled the ERR LED of the control unit will flash Although data will be retained for about a week after the detection of battery error without power the battery should be replaced as soon as possible Note lf a week has passed without power after the special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turned on or the ERR LED flashed retained memory data may be lost Regardless of how much time has passed after the detection of battery error supply power to the control unit for more than two minutes before replacing the battery Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will be on when a battery error is detected regardless of the s
50. Following three data can be transferred at the same time Internal memory Memory in the control unit _ Internal memory to Master memory Master memory to Internal memory Sets a master memory cassette to the upload protection setting Upload The control unit that data is transferred protection with this master memory cassette mounted will be also set to the upload protection setting Comments 22 Transfers comments to the master Transfers comments to the control memory cassette unit Transfers the data in the F ROM data Transfers data registers to the F ROM F ROM data area area of the control unit internal ROM data area in the control unit internal Note2 Note3 to the master memory cassette ROM Specify the starting block No and No Specify the starting block No and No of blocks to be transferred of blocks to be transferred Once the data is transferred The data in the master memory is all afterwards the information in the Precautions deleted So the devices not to be internal memory and the master transferred will be deleted memory are compared and the matched information is not transferred Note1 When a password has been specified data is transferred automatically Note2 If there is no data transferring cannot be performed Note3 Reads using the F12 ICRD instruction and writes using the P13 ICWT instruction It is possible to write data in the F ROM data area using the RAM gt ROM transfer function of th
51. H36 H44 H52 H24 H31 H30 H25 0 0 4 6 D R a 0 Se YS o Value of DTO in the PLC on the other end DT7 DT6 DT5 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upper byte Lowerbyte Upper byte Lower byte F 6 0 0 8 C _ rq aM Io BCC Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other end Extracting the data register values from the PLC on the other end In the program the data segment of the response from the PLC on the other end is converted to hexadecimal data using the F72 AHEX hexadecimal ASCII gt hexadecimal data conversion instruction and stored in DT50 and DT51 only if the character string 1 stored in DT1 is detected as a comparison instruction DT6 DT5 DT4 DT3 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte 0 6 i _ lt o ac cum Value of DT1 in the PLC on the other end Value of DTO in the PLC on the other end Hexadecimal ASCI HEX conversion instruction F 2 D151 D150 Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte K200 K100 Value of DT1 in the Value of DTO in the PLC onthe otherend PLC onthe other end If an error occurs 01 OOLILI is returned as the response OO is the error code and OLI is the BCC acy Note The MEWTOCOL master function of computer link is recommended as it is easy to communicate Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation ne
52. Minute data Second data DT90054 100 to H59 HOO to H59 Day data Hour data DT90059 H01 to H31 HOO to H23 Yeardata Month data DT90056 00 to H99 H01 to H12 Real Time Clock DT90057 o Pee DT90057 setting day of the HOO to H06 week As a day of the week is not automatically set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available accel EL a cc rel The Real Time Clock is adjusted as follows When setting the Real Time Clock by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction lt Example gt Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on X0 DF FOMV H 0 DT90054 MPuIs 9 minutes Inputs 12th FO MV H 512 DT90055 inputa Re a FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 Real Time Clock time are changed with the programming tool setting and 30 software the time will be set when the new DT90058 seconds correction values are written Therefore it is A A register unnecessary to write to DT90058 When the correcting times less than 30 seconds By setting the lowest bit of DT90058 to 1
53. Note The deviation counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3 gt fe Reference lt 9 2 1 Table of Specifications gt lt 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO X3 HDF FO Mv H110 DT90052 T FO MV H 100 DT90052 In these programs the near home input is enabled in step 1 and O0 is entered just after In case of CH1 that in step 2 to perform the preset operations DF H FO MV H1110 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 2 Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output In case of CHO AT HDF H Fo MV H108 DT90052 The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting FO MV H100 DT90052 value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs In case of CH1 DF H FO MV H1108 DT
54. P Extends the 16 bits of data in D to 32 bits in D 1 D 3 O O F90 Decode DECO Decodes part of the data of S and P90 PDECO stores 7010 D 5 it in D The part is specified by n 7 segment SEGT S Converts the data of S for use in a 7 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in D 1 5 0 0j 0j 8 D D ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by 7 10l ol oloja n 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the combine PUNIT n words of data beginning at S are 7 O 0 O D stored united in order in D Q Available X Not available A Not available partially v 7 O O N K 02 o w Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I A W A Boe Ope Description A ad TE N ra ma F94 16 bit data distribute DIST S n Each of the digits of the data of S P94 PDIST D are stored in distributed to the least significant digits of the areas beginning at D Character ASCII Twelve characters of the character code PASC constants of S are converted to ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 16 bit table data S1 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 search PSRC S2 the areas in the range S2 to S3 S3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 DSRC S1 The
55. PC PLC link The FP X supports the link system that connects the PC PLC link corresponding to the MEWNET WO max 16 units with the twisted pair cables e In a PC PLC link data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays called link relays L and data registers called link registers LD e f the link relay contact for one PLC goes on the same link relay also goes on in each of the other PLCs connected to the network Likewise if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network e The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time Link relay In the figure below when link relay LO of the master station no 1 turns on this signal is converted by the programs of the other stations and YO of the other stations is activated Link register In the figure below if a constant of 100 is written to LDO of the master station no 1 the contents of LDO in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100 No 4 Link register LDO No 3 Link register 77 No 2 Link register
56. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Available retry counts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession Every time incorrect password is input the number will decrease up to 3 times If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession you cannot access the program Turn the power supply of the FP X off and then on again to try to input the password again IEF er If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again Setting the Password protect function Set PLC Password Untitlel PLC Home Close Force Cancel Help Current status Password is not set Available retry counts 3 counts digit number C 4 digits Hex e 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access f Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password betaokokoktct Setting for FP memory loader option I Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 rc r Enter in alphanumeric Set PLG Password Untitlel ea x Enter the password in alphanumeric iok Do not forget thie password FPWIN GR X IN PLE became disabled to writerread As the dialog box is shown select as below Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 4 digits or 8 digits pass
57. Request to Send is controllable by the SYS1 instruction Note2 Data cannot be sent without the pin CS Clear to Send When using with a three wire port short circuit the pin RS and CS Note3 With the C30 or C60 type when the USB port is used the RS and CS signals are invalid cannot be controlled po 1 communication 1 N communication Available LED indication Terminal layout LED indication COMI SO AD RS CS Not used Note Number of units is 2 2 channel RS232C Type Product No AFPX COM2 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a non isolated three wire RS232C port LED indication Terminal layout O O LLED indication i i COMI COM Signal direction COM2 i at yo St Send Data 1 FP X External device COM1 Aseaec l Not used f Aa SeA OR Receive Data 1 FP X lt External device port EEEE ee S2 Send Data 2 FP X External device COM2 in your S1 R1 52 R2 SG R2 Receive Data 2 FP X lt External device port OOOO SG SignalGround po 4 communication 1 N communication COPLET ANK Available General purpose serial communication Available PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU Available Le Note1 Number of units is 2 Only the COM1 port can be used Note2 The RS232C of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomati
58. S2 0 D 1 D rane Zone control 1 S2 When S3 lt 0 3 S1 D When S3 gt 0 S3 S2 D Lael Zone control hess S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D 3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions aooo P300 operation PBSIN BCD type BCOS S D COS S1 1 S1 D 1 D cosine PBCOS operation BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 D 1 D tangent PBTAN operation BCD type BASIN SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arcsine PBASIN operation F304 BCD type BACOS COS S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS operation BCD type BATAN TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arctangent PBATAN operation Floating point type real number operation mete ctens F309 Floating point FMV S 1 S gt D 1 D P309 type data PFMV move F310 Floating point F S2 S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D P310 type data PF D x addition Pont Floating point pe DT S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D cE type data Ile z subtraction roe Floating point pe S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D type data PF multiplication F313 Floating point F S2 S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D P313 type data PF D z division O Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or late
59. Setting items Year month day hour 24 hour display minute second and day of week Clock calendar At 0 C less than 104 seconds per month Accuracy At 25 C less than 51 seconds per month At 55 C less than 155 seconds per month Area of clock calendar With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs Special data register No Higher bytes Lower bytes Hour data Minute data ies HOO to H23 HOO to H59 Minute data Second data Ervee HOO to H59 HOO to H59 A Available N A Available Day data Hour data alee H01 to H31 HOO to H23 Year data Month data Eee HOO to H99 H01 to H12 Day of the week data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of clock calendar There are two ways to set the clock calendar as described below Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Date and Time under Tool on the menu bar Set PLC Date and Time dialog box Set PLC Date and Time Untitiensyes PLG Home T Date y mm dd fm foo fo Time thh mmss Help oo foo foo The above steps display the Se
60. V1 10 Ry type STF gt S1 S2 ANF gt S1 S2 ORF gt S1 S2 STF gt S1 S2 ANF gt S1 S2 ORF gt S1 S2 STF lt S1 S2 ANF lt S1 S2 ORF lt S1 S2 STF lt S1 S2 ANF lt S1 S2 ORF lt S1 S2 system register 36 for setting expansion unit recognition time MEW TOCOL master function F145 SEND Data send wey Pre F146 RECV Data receive E356 EZPID Easy PID instruction Time constant processing of input Refer to Chapter 12 6 CPU input System register setting Other input F182 FILTR Time constant processing Sampling trace function Refer to Chapter 12 5 Sampling by instructions F155 SMPL Sampling F156 STRG Sampling trigger Sampling by specifying time Leading contact trailing contact instructions STT ANT ORT STL ANY ORV An arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of YAN PY UPS TENPE Timer counter instruction e g TML 0 DTO Other additional convenient instructions F252 ACHK ASCII data check F284 RAMP Inclination output Baud rate setting 300 600 1200 bps by SYS instruction High speed operation FO MV and F1 DMV instructions Execution time Approx 1us Only when every operands are without index modifier Function addition to existing instructions F70 BCC Block check code calculation F356 EZPID Easy PID instruction Note The Ry and Tr types with the same specifications have the same version name Reference lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautoma
61. Xo x2 x4 x6 Power supply for YO to Y5 AFPX C14TD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal if f f Lht T a com x1 x3 xs x7 xo x2 x4 x6 nc yi y3 ys NC nc yo y2 yaj Nc Power supply for YO to Y5 Not used Output terminal Not used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX C14PD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal FI ne T amp com x1 x3 xs x7 xo x2 x4 x6 nc y1 3 5 NC Power supply for YO to Y5 ENC yo y2 v4 nc 999999 Lm L Not used Output terminal Not used AFPX C30T AC power supply terminal input Input terminal eae Ds Ds Dr De pepo De _ com xo x2 x4 xe xe xa xc xe _ tov v1 v3 ys y7 vo vB yo _ 24v yo Y2 v4 ye ys vA yc nc Left Power supply for O to YT Right Power supply for Y8 to YD L Service power Output terminal Not used supply for input output AFPX C30P AC power supply terminal input Input terminal if PIAIAVAIIAAIA A S tN cona pe Ds De De pe pe De com xo x2 x4 xe xa xa xc XE pt ov 1 3 ys yz yo vB yD Lefty Power supply for Yo to Y7 2a
62. cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X communication cassette FP X analog input cassette FP X analog output cassette FP X analog I O cassette FP X thermocouple cassette FP X RTD cassette FP X input cassette FP X output cassette FP X output cassette FP X I O cassette FP X pulse I O cassette Note3 FP X master memory cassette AFPX A21 AFPX TC2 AFPX RTD2 AFPX IN8 AFPX TR8 AFPX TR6P AFPX IN4T3 AFPX PLS AFPX MRTC Cassette mounting part 1 Slot 0 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 CHO WY10 CH1 WY11 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 WY10 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 CHO WX10 CH1 WX11 From X100 From Y100 From Y100 From X100 From Y100 From X100 From Y100 Cassette mounting part 2 Slot 1 CH1 WX21 CH1 WY21 CHO WX20 CH1 WX21 WY20 CH1 WX21 CH1 WX21 From Y200 From Y200 From Y200 From Y200 Note2 Digital conversion values are KO to 4000 As the resolution is 12 bits upper 4 bits are always 0 Note3 The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the FP X Tr type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 15 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants Number of points and range of memory area available for use Function C14 cat C60 Exte he Input 1760 points XO to X109F Turns on or off based on external input External output Note1 Y 1760
63. l 3 wire 1 channel RS232C PERAI AA RS and CS control is not available 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM2 3 wire 2 channel RS232C The Sad channel cannot be used AFPX COM3 No restrictions 1 channel RS485 RS422 1 channel RS485 1 channel RS485 AFPX COM4 1 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used Ethernet Ethernet AFPX COM5S 4 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 1 channel RS485 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 2 Communication Specifications Computer link erated adie ae a MODBUS RTU N PC PLC 1 1 1 1 Ue link 1 1 un commu A commu i commu communication z communication communication nication nication nication ee RS232C SI RS232C RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 tace RS485 TOOL port AFPX COM3 Two wire Two wire Two wire Token Commu nalt Half duplex nar bus Half duplex PA nication duplex duplex ee ee duplex et communication communication f Floating communication method communi communi communi master cation cation cation Note1 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make a program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily Communication port
64. lt A lt B from external device Reception done flag R9038 or R9048 F159 MTRN instruction execution T a nr f Fi y C CR D isl EJ em Top as Cannot be stored when gt reception done flag is on i ON OFF f ON Duplex transmission disabled while F159 MTRN is being j TFA executed OFF m a ON Transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 OFF Transmitted data Receive buffer 4 Number of bytes lt i gt lt 2 gt received Write pointer cleared when F159 MTRN Number of bytes received is 5 instruction is executed e For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used e Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on e When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 or R9047 the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 and the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off e Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed e Reception stops if the error flag R9037 or R9047 goes on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag Note e Be aware that
65. rand S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of S to gray codes and the converted result is stored in the D DGRY S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of PDGRY S 1 S to gray code and the converted result is stored in the D 1 D S D Converts the gray codes of S to binary data and the converted result is stored in the D D gt I FP x FP2SH FP10SH code conversion F237 16 bit gray code GBIN P237 binary data PGBIN conversion F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted P Character strings instructions Comparing character efele e sm eT T eT rare conversion result is stored in the D 1 D o F240 Bit line to bit COLM S n The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit n of D to DC 15 olojo conversion F241 Bit column to bit LINE S n The values of bit n of S to S 15 x ee o P241 line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits O to 15 of D E ei aes a a Binary data gt BTOA S1 Converts multiple binary data to f ASCII S2 n multiple ASCII data 12 x 7 O x x conversion D ASCII gt binary ATOB S1 Converts multiple ASCII data to data conversion S2 n multiple binary data C O 4 x x D ASCII data ACHK S1 Checks the ASCII data strings to be check S2 n used in F251 AT
66. reverse off 10 Absolute CWICCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward offireverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Composite speed Initial speed Max speed Hz lt K constant gt 1 5 Hz to 100 kHz K1 to K100000 However 1 5 Hz is for an angle of O deg or 90 deg only Also specify K1 when specifying 1 5 Hz f the component speed drops lower than the minimum speed for each frequency range then the speed will become the corrected component speed so be careful See 346 When simultaneously using a high speed counter penodical interrupt or PLC link do no set to 60 kHz or higher f initial speed is set equal to maximum speed pulses will be output with no acceleration deceleration Composite speed Initial speed 30 kHz or less Specify composite speed to make the component speed of each axis become1 5 Hz or higher However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to a maximum of K20000 Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 Acceleration Deceleration time ms lt K constant gt KO to K32767 If this is 0 pulses will be output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration 4 Target value Movement amount K 8388608 to K8388607 Infinite feeding is not available When operating only one axis a In incremental mode set the tar
67. the value will be moved up or down and become exactly 0 seconds After the correction is completed DT90058 is cleared to 0 Example Correct to 0 seconds with X0 on XO lt pF gt Fo mv H 1 DT90058 Correct to At the time of correction if between 0 and 29 seconds it will be moved down and if between 30 and 59 seconds it will be moved up In the example above if the time was 5 minutes 29 seconds it will become 5 minutes 0 seconds and if the time was 5 minutes 35 seconds it will become 6 minutes 0 seconds DT90059 Communication error Error code Is stored here when a NIA N A code communication error occurs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ware Read Writ Step ladder process DT90060 0 to 15 Step ladder process DT90061 16 to 31 Step ladder process DT90062 32 to 47 Step ladder process DT90063 48 to 63 Step ladder process DT90064 64 to 79 Step ladder process DT90065 80 to 95 Step ladder process iii 96 to 111 DT90067 Step ladder process 112 to 127 Indicates the startup condition of the step pT90068 SteP ladder process ladder process When the process starts up 128 to 143 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on ASRR 144 to 159 pT90070 SteP ladder process Monitor using binary display 160 to 175 A A l lt Example gt DT900
68. with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched T R1 F61 DCMP DT50 DT60 R1 R900B es S_ E 1 gt F36D 1 DT50 3 _ Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and SSF DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 port R1 I F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 DTO ko Fo Mv H1 wRo 3 70 Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 _ port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit 2 F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO DT60 Fo Mv _ HO WRO Note1 It is H2001 for COM2 port Notez2 It is R904A for COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Flow chart Data initialization R9044 Note ON DTS50 and DT50 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 Execute F145 sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 SEND instruction write command read command RECV instruction Tums RO off Note It is R904A for COM2 port The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 4 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 5 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM 1 port 6 Reads the data DTO and dT1 in the unit number 1 int
69. y3 v5 yz J yo vB yD 2av yo Y2 y4 ye ys va yc NC Left Power supply for YO to Y7 Right Power supply for Y8 to YD Li LI Service power Output terminal Not used supply for input output AFPX E30TD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal _ jcom x1 x3 x5 x7 xo xB XO XE nc v1 ys ys v7 yo vB yo UNC yo y2 v4 ye v8 Ya yc NC Left Power supply for YO to V7 Right Power supply for Y8 to YD Lo L Not used Output terminal Not used AFPX E30PD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal _ jcom x1 x3 x5 x7 xo xB XD XE nc v1 v3 ys v7 yo vB yo UNC yo y2 v4 ye I vs Ya yc NC E L Not used Output terminal Not used Left Power supply for YO to V7 Right Power supply for Y8 to YD Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit Output terminal Each COM terminal CO C1 of Ry type is separate Each power supply terminal of Tr type is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 3 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter 3 3 1 Overview For the FP X a ma
70. 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 3 Upload Protection This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading on the FP X If the FP X is set to prohibit program uploading note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be uploaded after that However editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched When using this function store ladder programs as files without fail Unperformable operations on the FP X set to prohibit uploading 1 Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs 2 Transferring programs to the master memory cassette and FP memory loader The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool however all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled IES Note When cancelling this setting forcibly All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading Keeping your programs is your responsibility Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified
71. 1 bo od 7 DANA AAA AAA AAA A 10 000 22 000 30 000 Regardless of the current value its movement is towards position 22 000 Program X1 R911C R32 R30 HDF R30 R30 R31 DF J R31 H Fi DMV H1110 DT 100 F1 DMV K200 DT 102 F1 DMV K 4000 _DT 104 F1 DMV K300 DT 106 F1 DMV K 22000 DT 108 F1 DMV KO DT 110 F171 SPDH DT 100 KO aan aaa The data table headed by DT100 is used J Pulses are output from CHO R911C R30 TO R32 Pulse output diagram 4000 HZ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I cima el sr it ee ta a ez 2 ee 2 eee See See Se Positioning operation start Positioning data table DT101 Control code H 1110 OT102 ininal e ann ii DT103 Initial speed 2000 Hz DT104 A niles Acceleration time 300 ms DT108 Target value _ DT109 Movement amount 22000 pulses DT110 DTi1 Pulse stop Control code H1110 Duty 1 4 25 J 48 Hz t0100 kHz Absolute CW and CCW a F Pulse output instruction i table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used L and pulses are output from CHO t Setting K10 and using it as a 1 s timer gt a o eee o eee o ame o ume o ees o amf 9 4 7 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home Return Common to Transistor type e This function performs ho
72. 2 1 Acton on Eno No 410 Unit No z Time No 412 Comm Mode PC Link v Controller input settings 1 HSC p Controller input settings 2 HSC PLS Controller output settings PLS P WM Interrupt pulse catch settings Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input z Time constant setting 2 of CPU input Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM2 Port Cancel Initialize Help No Setting item Default No 410 No 412 PC link Do not use the same unit number for multiple FP X units Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 12 Applied Usage Ethernet Ver 1 10 or Later How to confirm the network information on the FP X The network information own IP address destination IP address destination port No version that has been set for the AFPX COM5 can be confirmed from the FP X by the option setting The connection information destination IP address own IP address version of the AFPX COM5 can be confirmed from the LAN side Dialog box of option setting Response timeout 5000 10 60000 ms Cancel Endcode CR Judgment time without termination 20 10 60000 ms Network information Information area first number DT fo000 3000 12000 Network information notification Notification area range DTIOOO0 DT10009 Network information confirmation Confirmation area range
73. 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 Period ms 0 02 096 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 specification of duty Specify using K constant If the control code is KO to K19 the duty is KO to K999 0 0 to 99 9 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 0 to 99 Values are specified in units of 1 K10 digits behind the decimal point are rounded off Note e If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 11 Security Functions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 1 Type of Security Functions There are mainly three functions as the security function of the FP X It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used 1 Password protect function It is used to restrict the access to the programs in the FP X from the programming tool by setting a password Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by setting a password and setting to the p
74. 20 000 h at 55 C Weight Unit ModelNo Weight Unt ModelNo Weight Approx FP X 20 g Communi cation arPxcoms APP cassette PRO et Og Approx 20 g Control unit Analog output Thermocouple fArPxTC2 cassette AFPxX TC2 Approx 25 g Sapiens Master memory AFPXMRTC Approx cassette EN A T Expansion FPO AFPX EFPO Approx 65 g adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Unit s current consumption table Current consumption of power supply for Unit type Control unit PAFPX C14R_ 185 mAorless 130 mA orless _ _ AFPX C14RD fC 235 MA rlessss PAFPX C30R_ 410 mAorless 260mAorless _ PAFPX C30RD_ fC 360 mA or lesss AFPX C60R_ 540 mA orless 320mAorless _ AFPX C60RD fC 550 mA or lessss PAFPX C14T 160 mAorless 110mAorless PAFPX C14P 160 mArless 110mAorless Contau AFPX C30T_ 360 mA orless 225 mA orless PAFPX C30P 370 mAorless 230 mA orless AFPX C60T_ 370 mAorless 230 mA orless AFPX C60P____ 380 mA orless 240 mA orless _ _ AFPX C14TD fs 160 mA or less PAFPX C14PD fC 160 mA or lesss PAFPX C30TD fC 200 mA or less PAFPX C30PD_ fC 210 mA or less PAFPX C6OTD fC 250 mA or lesss AFPX C60PD FCT 290 mA or less PAFPX E30R 310 mAorless 210mAorless _ _ PAFPX E30RD_ fC 320 mA or lesss Expansion I O unit AFPX E30T 345 mA or
75. 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 3 2 Transistor Tr Type Common to NPN and PNP Transistor type common to NPN and PNP pte Berton o Approx 8 mA for control units XO to X3 Rated input current Approx 4 7 mA for control units X4 to X7 Approx 4 3 mA from control unit X8 8 points common 16 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal iii onmvotadeMin on curen 19 2 V DC 6 mA for control units XO to X3 g l 19 2 V DC 3 mA from control unit X4 2 4V DC 1 3 mA for control units XO to X3 2 4V DC 1 mA from control unit X4 Approx 3 kQ for control units XO to X3 Input impedance Approx 5 1 KQ for control units X4 to X7 Approx 5 6 kQ from control unit X8 For control units XO to X3 135 us or less normal input 5 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For control units X4 to X7 off gt on Response time 135 us or less normal input 50 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings From control unit X8 C30 C60 only 0 6 ms or less Operating mode indicator LED display EN61131 2 Applicable type TYPE3 however according to the above specifications Note this specification is applied when the rated input voltage i
76. 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 7 1 N Communication Computer Link Ethernet Overview A computer is connected respective PLCs through Ethernet The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the destination IP address and the PLC with that IP address sends a response back to the computer It is no problem if the unit number of the PLC overlaps with other PLCs Jika IP address A Se E IP address B ts i Computer IP address C 1 N Communication setting Computer link Ethernet The settings for the FP X system register and communication cassette AFPX COM5 are the same as the settings for the connection computer link Ethernet by a 1 1 communication However set the IP address for a FP X not to overlap with other FP X units Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 8 MEWTOCOL Master Communication Setting Ver 1 10 For using as the MEWTOCOL master set the AFPX COM5 to the computer link and client Also specifying the simultaneous transmission by broadcast or the target IP address for unit number in the option setting enables the communication with various PLCs MEWTOCOL master setting in TCP Communication Setting Protocol Mode OK TCP X Cancel ction Mode Option Setting Client Mode v Control unit Comm
77. 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Ry type FP X A Available N A Not available Address Description SCC Ale ing ing Counting area for output Note El DT90348 apsed Lower words Y100 Y101 of the pulse O A A DT90349 Higher words Parser PLS CHO The target value is set when Note F172 PLSH F174 SPOH DT90351 Higher words and F175 SPSH are A ae executed Counting area for output pa fate DT 2 Elapsed L A A eure ae Y200 Y201 of the pulse I O DT90353 area Higher words a The target value is set when Note F172 PLSH F174 SPOH DT90355 Higher words and F175 SPSH are A A executed DT90356 Notused CNA CNA DT90357 Notused CNA NAA DT90358 Notused CNA NAA DT90359 Notused CNA NAA When HSC control is executed by FO MV S DT90052 instruction the setting value for the target CH is stored in each CH Control flag monitor area Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F171 SPDH F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH instructions only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 2 Table of Basic Instructions mm set basic instructions R Begins a logic operation with a Form A ee normally open contact a Begins a logic operation with a Form B normally closed contact orf EE r ET outpu
78. 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH H _ _ me 39 bit H gt taa s Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 cata pr a S2 1 2 compare hall BES 81 89 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 Start 1_ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 2 STD OD SiS Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 j E _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 STD gt b gt 1 59 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 l bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S27 R STD lt si s2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S27 D STD lt M Si 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact fo 1 825 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare AND lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 r S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND
79. Alterna YR LE Inverts the output condition on off each time ee the leading edge of the ae is detected bel 1 Connects the multiple instruction blocks Ain a serially Connects the multiple instruction blocks in pr e EA erm eleele Available Not available Not available partially A The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net i Oo FPO FP e n Stores the operated result up to this instruction 2 Read stack Pop stack Reads the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction 2 Leading edge differential I t Reads and clears the operated result E stored by the PSHS instruction Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing edge Turns on the contact for only one differential scan when the trailing edge
80. As there is not interpolation function for the home return the home return should be executed for each channel After the home return for both channels is completed the positioning operation running program R40 turns off Pulse output diagram CHO Near home sensor Home sensor XO ON X6 ON X4 ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz i 150 ms 150 ms CH1 Near home sensor Home sensor x0 ON X7 ON X5 ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz _ gt 150 ms 150 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O Cassette 9 5 1 Overview of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the F173 PWMRH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting When using the PWM output function set the channel corresponding to the system register 402 to PWM output Acs Note The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type 9 5 2 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function PWM Output Instruction F173 X6 H FO MV K1 DT100 While X6 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 502 5 ms and duty ratio of 50 Is FO MV K500 DT101 output from YO of specified channel CHO When the program runs the data table will be F173 PWMH DT100 KO as shown below Data table Control code 1 K1 1 Specify the control code by setting the K const
81. D2 to the right F105 Right shift of one BSR Shifts the one digit of data of D to P105 hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR the right bit F106 Left shift of one BSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left 4 bit F108 BITR D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by m P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR D2 n D1 and D2 to the right E F109 BITL D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by P109 bits n bits PBITL O C C D i i D C a gt C O O O o Left shift of one D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by word 16 bit PWSHL D2 D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSR D2 D1 and D2 to the right bit F113 Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by P113 hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSL D2 D1 and D2 to the left bit O Available Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Boolean Description aE bade EIEIO P115 PFIFT defined in the buffer We ee es Data read from The oldest data beginning from S bolic al oS ao SSE and stored in D P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW starting from D ee eS Basic function instructions UP DOWN counter UDC S D Counts up or down from the
82. Data transmission using 2 F159 MTRN gt Ct Data is sent to and received ee l l z a on K from external devices thruogh i i A E a the data registers Data received in receive buffer IES er Note e The data received before changing to the PROG mode remain in the data registers Execute the F159 MTRN instruction right after the mode was changed to the RUN mode and clear them Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 2 2 Tool Port Setting Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Double click Tool Port Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLO Gonfieuration Untitlel Hald Non hold 1 No410 Unit No l1 r No 413 Communication Format No42 Comm Mode Char Bit Bits Computer Link Parity Odd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Modem Enabled a Stap Bit i Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Terminator Special input Special input Software filter settings 1 of CPU input No415 Baudrate 3600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input eA ae fee ae i ee Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Behe EEEE rT mog fE Soft
83. Direction output ON and deviation counter clear 2 Speed Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range O 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz J Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 3 kHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range 2 191 Hzto 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 0 8 KHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to a maximum of K20000 Hz 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant gt With 30 steps K30 to K32 60 Specify by 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify by 60 steps 5 4 Deviation counter clear signal ms lt K constant gt Output time of deviaton counter clear signal is specified 0 5 ms to 100 ms KO to K100 Set value and error 0 5 ms or less Specify KO when not using or when specifying 0 5 ms Deviaton counter clear signal is allocated in 102 for CHO and in Y202 for CH1 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Home return operation modes Th
84. F145 and F146 instructions The following sample program executes 4 MEWTOCOL commands in sequence for 2 slave units using the F145 and F146 instructions ACS ner Note It is available for the transistor type and relay type of Ver 1 21 or later FP X FP X Unit No 2 Master unit 1 Slave unit 1 g Dg h pay a J IP address 192 168 1 5 T lated IP address 192 168 1 11 FP X Unit No 1 aa sy WT Slave unit 2 i be j IP address 192 168 1 12 Description R100 Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 1 into the area from DT100 of the master unit R101 Writes the data for 10 words from DT100 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave unit 1 R102 Stores the data for 10 words from DT1000 of the slave unit 2 into the area from DT120 of the master unit R103 Writes the data for 10 words from DT130 of the master unit to the area form DT1010 of the slave unit 2 Set the system registers for each units by a tool software such as FPWIN GR System register setting Master unit Computer link mode 115200 bps 8 bits Odd 1 bit Slave unit 1 s Unit No 1 Computer link mode 115200 bps 8 bits Odd 1 bit Slave unit 2 Unit No 2 a Computer link mode 3 115200 bps 8 bits Odd 1 bit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 When using the MEWTOCOL master function in
85. F166 to F167 e Clear target value match interrupt Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO In case of CH1 X7 H DF F0 MV H 1001 DT90052 a X7 HDF FO MV H 1 DT90052 FO MV HO DT90052 F0 MV H 1000 DT90052 In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Ry type 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 e The area DT90052 for writing channels DT90052 pane hee NDA and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure Ket e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90360 to Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Note In the reset input setting the reset Reset input setting ete input X102 or X202 allocated in the 9 Avaliable 1 Not available high speed counter setting of the Count system registers are defined to 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes enable disable High speed counter control code monitor area High speed counter Channel No ph OBB ph T9OBGG PhAST OBO S po chB T90BTA Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction chan
86. F175 R911C Control flag CHO Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 R911D Control flag CH1 hidi Note e The above flags vary during scanning Example If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions there may be the different states in the same scan Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a measure Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 3 I O Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW lt When using CH0O gt lt When using CH1 gt FP X Ry type AFPX PLS first FP X Ry type AFPX PLS Second Home in put x402 i slehla u x202 Near home 7 input x input gt x100 p 200 7 Driver Driver Y100 CW output i Yo00 CW output Y101 TaN F CCW output CCW output Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I O Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I O cassette can be specified for the near home cassette can be specified for the near home input input Note If there is no input remained on the puls
87. FPO A04I is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 5 V O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette The FP X add on cassette is mounted on the FP X control unit I O numbers Cassette Cassette mounting part 1 mounting part 2 Slot 0 Slot 1 Type of control unit FP X communication AFPX COM1 cassette FP X communication AFPX COM2 cassette E FP X communication AFPX COM3 Communication cassette cassette FP X communication AFPX COM4 cassette FP X communication AFPX COM5 cassette FP X communication AFPX COM6 cassette FP X analog input CHO WX10 CHO WX20 cassette ARAARA CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21 FP X analog output CHO WY10 CHO WY20 cassette ORE CH1 WY11 CH1 WY21 CHO WX10 CHO WX20 pares uw AFPX A21 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21 WY10 WY20 FP X thermocouple CHO WX10 CHO WX20 Application CHO WX10 CHO WX20 seie FP X RTD cassette AFPX RTD2 CH1 WX11 CH1 WX21 FP X input cassette AFPX IN8 From X100 From X200 FP X output cassette AFPX TR8 From Y100 From Y200 FP X output cassette AFPX TR6P From Y100 From Y200 From X100 From X200 FP X I O cassette AFPX IN4T3 From Y100 From Y200 FP X pulse I O cassette From X100 From X200 Note3 AFPX PLS From Y100 From Y200 FP X master memory AEPX MRTC cassette Note1 There is no I O for
88. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 4 Operation Errors 14 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors e An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed e When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on e The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT90000 e The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error 1 Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used 2 BCD data error Operation is attempted on non BCD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range 3 Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range 4 Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 14 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs e Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs e When you set system register 26 to continuation the control unit operates even if an operation error occurs Using programming tool software 1 Set the mode of the CPU to PROG 2 Select the Option in
89. HH CT 100 x1 RUN Power on XO CT100 counting fy operation Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count Is incremented Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction e f a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction it will be executed only under the following condition The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the previous control instruction was reset and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on e When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point lt Example 1 gt Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions XO X1 YO X1 was on when 4 XO became off The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 xO x1 YO X1 was off when J j XO became off The input condition X1 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution t
90. However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires power wires or load Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 mA to 20 mA output Conversion characteristics graph mA 20 lt a Output signal range 0 T T T 1 1000 2000 3000 4000 K lt lt Digital input value gt Table of D A converted values Digital input value Output current mA When exceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Unchanged gt Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged AAEN Value preceding the input of 4001 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 V to 10 V output Conversion characteristics graph v l0 25 4 Output signal range t an l 1000 2000 3000 4000 K Digital input value t Table of D A converted values Digital input value Output voltage V Ooo When exceeding the rated range Unchanged Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged Value preceding the input of 4001 Negative value 4001 or more Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No GAPE dette eat alg Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette
91. Install the FPO thermocouple unit on the right side of other expansion units If it is installed on the left side the total precision will deteriorate e Install the FPO CC Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units There is no expansion connector on the right side Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 3 3 Restrictions on FP X Add on Cassette The add on cassette is installed in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 only the cassette mounting part 1 is available for C14 of the control unit Communication cassette Application cassette Mi Cassette mounting part 1 DLRQLAAA BSSHA The state when 1 application cassette is installed Cassette Cassette mounting mounting part 1 part 2 AQLQQQLQQALLLA GE The state when the communication cassettei is installed on the application cassette PLOOOOOOOE The state when 1 application cassette and 1 communication cassette is installed PREQC OOWOGE il CCIC RIII CIRICY w lo pnr Cassette Cassette mounting mounting part 1 part 2 Expansion 1QQQQQQAQAHLAA QQQQHQQALADE HL Q O O O OOGEOOO QQQE A PE XS onnector part am eee AN The state when 2 application cassette and 1 communication cassette is installed DOOOOCOOO QQ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
92. Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped 7 Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite S Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of rewrite during RUN completed flag The rewrite during RUN completed flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations FPWIN GR X Timeout error while changing program in PLE Program may differ from PLC Please click below Help button to find the way how to solve it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the offline edit mode Complete the program conversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mode to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and
93. It is not possible to change to the MODBUS RTU mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 4 3 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose serial communication System register settings Settings for COM1 port AFPX COM1 AFPX COM2 AFPX COM3 AFPX COM5 Name Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode for General purpose serial communication COM1 port Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 No 416 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to DT32764 Initial value DTO seen COM1 port No 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words Settings for COM2 port AFPX COM2 AFPX COM4 AFPX COM5 AFPX COM6 Name Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode for General purpose serial communication COM2 port Communication format for COM2 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 No 418 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to DT32764 Initial value DT2048 COM2 port No 419 Receive buffer capacity for COM2 port 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words Note1
94. K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 KHz Set the frequency 1 which is initial speed to 30 kHz or less 3 Target value K 2147483648 to K2147483647 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range indicated in the table below Specification of control code Range of allowable Operation mode Output method target values Incremental counting Specifies a positive value Incremental Decremental counting Specifies a negative value Specifies a value larger Incremental counting than the current value Absolute Decremental counting Specifies a value smaller than the current value Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation e The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table R11 HDF F1 DMV H1000 DT500 Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis l i CH1 so that the composite speed is an initial speed of F1 OMV K500 DT502 500 Hz the maximum speed is 5000 Hz and the F1 DMV K5000 DT504 acceleration deceleration time is 300 ms The two axes F1 DMV
95. K300 DT506 are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the i l target position F1 DMV K5000 DT508 When the program runs the data table and positioning F1 DMV K2000 DT510 path are as shown below F175 SPSH DT500 KO R Note The linear interpolation function can be used only when 2 units of the AFPX PLS are being used Positioning data table Positioning path si Control code H 1000 js evs Ea Composite speed DT503 initial speed 500 Hz ee as eee D 5000 Hz Designated with user program DT507 Deceleration speed 300 ms DT508 Target value DT509 X axis CH 5000 pulses DT510 Target value Y axis CH1 2000 pulses DT512 X axis OHO component speed 3 Initial spee l l 7 r S417 m Si X axis CHO component speed Operation 1 Control code lt H constan gt QOO00000 DT515 MM result 0 Fixed on L DT516 Y axis CH1 component speed Storage area J DT517 Initial spee Parameters for MDuty on width 41 5000 X axis CHO DT518 Y axis CH1 component speed each axis O Duty 1 2 50 DT520 X axis CHO frequency range calculated due to instruction 0 Fixed DT521 Y axis CH1 frequency range execution are steiner ce He Hanall pial ij stored here p hobs iam rr tain DTS22 Jcceleration deceleration steps OO Ineremerttal CACAL gt 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward offireverse on D
96. Key Point e When using a PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed No Name Set Value Communication format for COM Data length 8 bits 1 port Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps Note1 The terminal units of AFPX COM3 and AFPX COM4 are specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PC PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The unit number is specified either by using the SYS1 instruction or the system register Note1 The priority order for unit number settings is as follows 1 SYS1 instruction 2 System registers Note2 Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer Note3 If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 R5485 Unit numbers are the numbers to identify the different PLCs on the same network
97. M ABCDEFGH wouwu DT101 The characters ABCDEFGH are converted to an ASCll code and written to DT101 to DT104 F159 MTRN DT 100 K8 Ki f Data transmission o 7 The data in the send buffer is sent from 1 Starting from DT100 the COM1 port the contents of 8 bytes are sent from COM 1 port K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from COM1 port using the F159 MTRN instruction Explanatory diagram 1 The characters are converted to ASCII code Pata register DT and the data is stored in the send buffer 2 Data transmission using F159 MTRN Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission the number of bytes to be transmitted is set Ver 2 0 or later Transmitted data storage area 1 The circled numbers indicate the Sl E Gori order of transmission 2n e Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in S Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 is on operation is as follo
98. No 412 Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC link Setting for the FP with unit no 2 Unit no for COM1 port eo Setting for the FP2 MCU with unit no 3 Po Name State Unit no for COM1 port 3 Set using the unit no setting switch Selection of communication mode for COM1 port PC PLC link Set using the mode speed setting switch g Key Point Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PC PLC link function and specify consecutive numbers Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Link area allocation Link relay allocation FP X FPE FP2 FP2SH Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Receive area Send area System registers Set value of various control units Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission ee ee ee Link relay transmission size Link register allocation FP X FPE FP2 FP2SH Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Receive area Send area System registers Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission 0 4 eee Link register transmission size Setting the largest unit number Largest unit number setting for PC PLC link Setting terminal unit The terminal unit is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette Transmission ine N Transmission line Transmission
99. ON 1000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz m m 150 ms 150 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG operation e This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on X6 H_ F1 DMV H1110 DT300 F1 DMV K300 DT302 The pulse of 300 Hz is output from YO during X6 is turned on When this program runs the data table and F172 PLSH DT300 KO the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Data table DT300 4 07301 Control code H 1110 DT302 o DT303 Frequency 300 Hz Pulse output diagram X6 JOG ON i Td command OFF 300Hz YO Pulse OHz 1 Control code lt H constant gt HOOOUOOOUOU 0 Fixed L arget value setting 0 Mode with no target value 1 Target value match stop mode Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 MFrequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 KHz 2 191 Hz to 100 KHz Output method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting CCW 10 Incremental counting CW 12 Incremental counting Direction output OFF 13 Incremental counting Direction output ON 21 Decremental counting CCW 22 Decremental counting Direction output OFF 23 Decremental counting Direction output ON Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Em
100. R103 Positioning done pulse 101 rr R900C Comparison instruction lt flag gt R9118 High speed counter CH8 control flag Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program When X102 is turned on Y100 and Y101 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90332 and DT90333 reaches K4500 Y101 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops x102 R9118 R103 R100 N E E ae E ges ak Positioning operations running ee a Positioning operations start eee ee el R101 ree eee ee e e e e e DF DMV KO lt DT90332 ee ms Aaea p value of high speed kae e e E m E E e E E E E E e o e F167HCIRK8 K5000 Y100 f Target value match off instruction Y100 goes off when elapsed value of high oa eee ee _ R100 F61 DCMP K 4500 DT90332 i 32 bit data comparison instruction R900C turns on when the CH8 high speed counter Bae ae cee tan R100 R9g00C R102 ee ieee pee So eee ee ee ee Positioning done pulse 0 5 s k P 0 1 s type timer t_ Setting KS and using it as a 0 5 s timer _ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse I O Cassette 10 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and co
101. RO Positioning operation start R102 Positioning done pulse 100 I _ R9118 High speed counter CH8 control flag Program When X102 is turned on Y100 turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90332 and DT90333 reaches K5000 Y100 turns off and the conveyor stops R9118 R102 R100 R101 Hor zJ R101 Fi DMV KO DT90332 4 eae a counter CH8 F167 HC1R K8 K5000 Y100 Tarat uala mateh Aif inetr intinn Target value match off instruction Sets high speed counter CH8 operations start Tes a ee a l cm i e 1 Y100 goes off when elapsed value of incl L Set the inverter operation signal Y100 R9118 R100 TO R102 a a e a ce a ee DF R102 a a a 1s type timer Setting KS and using it as a 0 5 s timer Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry AFPX PLS Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input r TA Operation start O s te P cS p l j O DN yy J Motor Encoder one Output terminal Inverter Inverter operation Y100 J Operation Stop Inverter high speed Y101 Fast Slow Operation chart I O allocation A X100 X102 Y100 v101 Speed RO Positioning operation start eo 7 R102 Arrival at deceleration point
102. Ry type axe ee J Javo nee Common polarities Relay ock amp common Transistor type NPN Tr type arexe ee ooo favo i emie AFPX E30T 100 to 240 V AC Common polarities 16 14 NPN block AFPX E30TD 24V DC amp common Transistor type PNP Tr type AFPX E16P_ 8 8 24 VDC AFPX E30P_ 100 to 240 V AC Common polarities eal a AFPX E30PD 24V DC amp common Input only type 16 0 vee Terminal AFPX E16X Common polarities X300 to X30F T a block The input specifications are the same as AFPX E16R Output only type Relay type 0 14 Terminal The output specifications are the same as AFPX E16R An 8 cm expansion cable is provided with expansion unit 1 2 3 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter FP X Expansion FPO adapter with 8 cm expansion For connecting FPO expansion unit AFPX EFPO cable power supply cable Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 2 4 Add on Cassettes Communication cassettes Application cassettes Name Specifications Product No Communication FP X Communication cassette 5 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM1 cassette FP X Communication cassette 3 wire 2 channel RS232C AFPX COM2 FP X Communication cassette 1 cane Reno rere AFPX COM3 insulated TENS 1 channel RS485 insulated FP X Communication cassette 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM4 2 channel RS485 insulated FP X Commun
103. Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type BROADCAST Source port No 9094 Slave unit2 IP address 192 168 1 2 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type BROADCAST Source port No 9094 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Master unit sample program Wait for 5 seconds until communication is enabled after the power turned on R3010 ra 0 K 5 ma y ac E grp l i aa i Lipf 1 F108 DSH gt WROD s KI 29 ag REW for Unit No 1 TRIOO i DF j Fi HY gt Ha OT 10 FO WY H100 eo BET F146 RECY ODT 10 gt DT K 1000 DT 100 SEND for Unit No 1 pd i i DIF F WY HA ee OCP hk F0 MY H 1001 ee EE a F145 SEND ODT 10 PT SOT h gt DDT ketut 35 RECY for Unit No 2 02 i DF FO HY Ha oT 10 F0 Wy H 1002 OT TH F146 RECY ODT 10 EDT a K 1000 OT 120 SEND for Unit No 1 J6 IE i DF 1 I FO Wy H lt DT f FO MY H 1002 SOT KH F145 SEND DBT 10 OT 180 ora e eT P as Reference For information on the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions lt 7 7 3 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD gt Phone 800 8
104. TCP Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD IP address setting Communication setting Option setting Master unit IP address 192 168 1 5 Communication protocol TCP Destination unit No Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Client connection and IP address is Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps specified On Communication mode Computer link Target IP address Destination IP address for unit No 192 168 1 11 No 1 192 168 1 11 Destination port No 9094 No 2 192 168 1 12 Source port No 0 Timeout 0 Retry time 15 Slave unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 11 Communication protocol TCP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout 0 Slave unit 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 Communication protocol TCP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout 0 2 When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP UNICAST communication Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD IPaddress setting Communication setting Option setting Master unit IP address 192 168 1 5 Communication protocol UDP Destination unit No Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Client connection and IP address is Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps specified On Com
105. Target Lower words A A g instructions F166 HC1S and Eaa DT90307 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X2 or ERN DT90308 Elapsed Lower words A A P TA X2 X3 of the main unit HSC CH2 The target value is set when Note DT90310 Target Lower words A A g instructions F166 HC1S and Da jane DT90311 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed DT90312 Elapsed Lower words counung aaa On IN PULA S2 0 the main unit value DT90313 area Higher words HSC CH3 The target value is set when Note DT90314 Target Lower words A A g instructions F166 HC1S and EJ DT90315 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed Counting area for input X4 or pa jane DT9031 Elapsed L r wor A A Hdi P ibaa aca X4 X5 of the main unit DT90317 Higher words HSC CH4 The target value is set when Note DT90318 Target L A JA 90318 g Ower wOnes instructions F166 HC1S and A fame F167 HC1R are executed Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only DT90319 Higher words Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing A i for i X5 of DT90320 Elapsed Lower words Mounting its eninpubyxe A Note the main unit A DT90321 Higher words HSC CH5 The target value is s
106. The provided expansion cable AFPX EC08 is used for the connection It is not necessary to specify the TERM terminal setting for the expansion FPO adapter Power supply connector 24V DC Supply the power of 24 V DC The provided power supply cable AFP0581 is used for the connection Supply the power from the service power supply for the input of the FP X control unit FPO expansion connector Connects the FPO expansion unit Expansion hook This hook is used to secure the FPO expansion unit DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch The lever is also used for installation on the mounting plate slim type AFP0803 tem O Specifications Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation 21 6 to 26 4 V DC General specifications 20A or less 24 V DC at 25 C Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 I O Allocation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 1 V O Allocation FP X Control Unit xO to XOF 1st Expansion unit 2nd Expansion unit 3rd Expansion unit 8th Expansion unit YO to YOF A300 to X39F A400 to A49F 500 to XSOF 1000 to A109F Y32300 to Y39F 400 to Y49F Y500 to Y59F 1000 to Y 109F DRGOOOOOOOdEl 1E EEEeoO ae F c b a Eai ee a E i D 2 AE F E QE IIE Te a Gl ORRROELEREPIO HOS
107. The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network acs Note When using the PC PLC link with the RS232C RS422 the number of units is 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting with the system register Set the unit numbers using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Options and then select COM1 port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Contfieuration Untitlel Hald Non hald 1 Hald Non hald 2 Mo410 Unit Ho j1 7 No 413 Communication Format Hedi Come tiogh as Char Bit E Bits Computer Link Parity Odd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Modem Enabled Stop Bit 1 z Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Terminal i Special input Special inputz 1 NOL EHE z Software filter settings 1 of CPU input No4ts Baudrate 3600 bps Software filter sethngs 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM Port Cancel Head Pl Initialize Help No 410 for COM1 port Unit number setting Select the COM port operation mode Click on Vv and select unit number between 1 and 16 Note1 Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer N
108. Unit and Main Unit I O Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FP X Tr type Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input XO me N me Operation start X5 J Lo ri bon LB O Encoder Output terminal Inverter Inverter operation Operation Stop Operation chart I O allocation VO No Speed Main XO Encoder input unit X5 Operation start signal i I O Inverter operation signal Rioo Positioning operation running R02 Positioning done pulse SL C Rono High speed counter CHO contrlfiag Program When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R9110 R102 R100 ee R101 r n HDF S r Positioning operations start R101 se he see fs me Se ee ee a _ F1 DMV KO DT90300 t r_ Resets elaps sed value of high speed counter CHO Z 5 annsna F167 HCIR KO K 5000 YO Target value match off instruction 1 YO goes off when elapsed value of high a speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses Set the inverter operation signal YO Pee ee ek ck ee h Positioning done pulse 0 5 s a ia eee as Sem et os Sg 0 1s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Positioning operations with a doub
109. Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 Functions and Types 7 1 1 Overview of Communication Cassette JRR rere PRO EEECe Ede Toan USB port C30 C60 Communication cassette Option AFPX COM1 5 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM2 3 wire 2 channel RS232C 6 AFPX COMB 1 channel RS485 RS422 EA aaan AFPX COM4 1 channel RS485 TOU puri EREE RN 3 wire 1 channel R5232C AFPX COMB Ethernet 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 4 IES er There are restrictions on the combination of the USB port and communication cassette for C30 C60 only 2 wl Reference lt 7 1 6 About USB Port For C30 C60 Only gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 2 Functions of Communication Cassette With the communication cassette the FP X offers four different communication modes as below Computer link e The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and external devices connected A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for communicating with the computer link MEWTOCOL COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN GR and the PLC e There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the si
110. Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 12 Other Functions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 1 Transfer Function between Memories Flow of program information Selectable whether to transfer F ROM data area and comments or not Data not to be transferred will be erased Control unit Internal memory Master cassette Internal F ROM System registers Ladder programs Comment data eF nn data F ROM data area Master memory Internal memory to Master memory Master memory to Internal memory Transfers storage data Transfers verification unmatched data PROG to RUN auto transfer Specified transfer by tool software in PROG mode RAM to ROM ROM to RAM transfer aa Internal RAM _ rE ae Operation memory oF FROM data area to operation memory DT Operation memory DT to F ROM data area All data are transferred RAM to ROM transfer function All points of the contents of the DT in the internal RAM are transferred to the internal F ROM data area This function is used to transfer large volumes of the default data to be used on the DT The necessary data is read from the internal F ROM area to be used for ladder programs This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PR
111. When sending data from a send area to the receive area of another PLC there must be a link relay and link register with the same number in the receive area on the receiving side In the example shown below there is an area between No 2 and No 3 which is overlapped and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out Example of link relay allocations FP X FP 2 FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 WLO O No 1 Send area e 19 16 Receive area 0 Receive area 63 System registers Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission 0 2 3 Link relay transmission size Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible neither for link relays nor for link registers 40 Overlap n Send area 63 Send area is split Send area Receive area Send area Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments Send area Receive area send area Receive area Receive area send area Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting the largest unit number for a PC PLC link The largest unit number can be set using system register no 47 using system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 Sample setting No of units linked Setting contents 1st unit Unit no 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set A largest unit no of 2 is set for each 1st unit Unit no 1 is se
112. When using the C14 the values are DTO to DT12285 Note2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction Ver 2 0 or more However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Note3 The setting values for the COM2 port of AFPX COM6 are 9600 bps 19200 bps and 115200 bps only The same baud rate should be specified by the cassette backside switch and the system register Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 1 communication with FP Series PLC Overview Connect the FP X and another FP series PLC using the RS232C interface and the MEWTOCOL COM communication protocol Note The MEWTOCOL master function of computer link is recommended as it is easy to communicate Communication mode General purpose serial communication Communication mode Computer FP series pe Value of specified data register e When the data area read command 01 RDD00000 00001 is sent from the FP X side the values of the data register of the PLC connected to the system are sent as a response For example if the value K100 is stored in DTO and the value K200 is stored in DT1 of the PLC 01 RD6400C8006F is sent as a response to the command If there is an error 01 OO is returned OO is the error code e In addition to data area read and write commands MEWTOCOL COM also provides contact a
113. absorber Optical coupler Open collector NPN 24 V DC 21 6 to 26 4 V DC 0 3 A 1 5A 8 points common 1u A or less 1 5 V DC or less 0 1 ms or less 0 8 ms or less Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display LED indication Terminal layout J O LED indication C IoOoOOOO OO ie 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TR8 Terminal layout DIDODOVVOL ry O r COM YO Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 YS Y6 Y7 Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Load current 702TA 8 EN ie Load current YO O 3A No of points per common which are simultaneou on 50 55 Ambient temperature C 21 6 to 26 4V DC Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Product No AFPX TR6P insulation method Output type Rated load vollage Operating load voltage range Max load current Max surge curren Output points per common Off slate leakage curent On state voltage drop RR Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED indication Terminal layout TR6P OVWWWWVWUOO O ODOOWDOWVWOD YO Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 NC Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature With 0 5A load With 0 3A load 6 6
114. becomes on When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction Examples in which the above programs are rewritten lt Program in which the example 1 is rewritten gt X0 X1 YO Hor XO X2 lt Program in which the example 2 is rewritten gt XO X1 TMX 5 K 30 YO tH X0 X2 m lt Program in which the example 3 is rewritten gt x0 x1 YO 1 T x0 X2 Y1 H H DF x0 x3 a Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 14 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How operation of rewrite during RUN Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms Operation during rewrite 1 External output Y is held 2 External input X is ignored 3 The timer T stops the clock 4 Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left right shift registers are ignored Interrupt functions are stopped 6
115. bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _f 7 825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact _f 8182 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact pf lt 81825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in data p Ss parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 compere Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR pt si 2 5 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in pf S82 parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 O Available Not available A Not available partially 16 bit data compare Phone 800
116. by the contents of an index register RO T F0 MV DT 100 oere Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of 10 with DTO acting as a base For example when I0 contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when l0 is K20 the destination will be DT20 e In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction and thus index registers are very convenient when handling large amounts of data 14 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers e Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT lt Example gt IOWXO IOWY1 IOWRO IOSVO IOEV2 ODT100 e Constants can also be modified lt Example gt I0K10 1 OH1001 e An index register cannot modify another index register lt Example gt 1010 1011 e When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with I0 In this case l0 and l1 are handled together as 32 bit data Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area C T _ Contents of 11 Contents of 10 In 1 In Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Repeatedly reading in external data lt Example gt Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DTO RO DH Fo mv KO
117. cable UTP Category 5 TCP IP UDPIIP ICMP ARP DHCP Function Auto negotiation function MDI MDI X Auto crossover function Note1 The length between a HUB and the module ie specifications vax segment length Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 15 2 Table of I O Number Allocation 15 2 1 VO Allocation of FP X Control Unit The I O allocation of the FP X control unit is fixed I O numbers Type of control unit Number of allocation I O number Input 8 points XO to X7 FP X C14 control unit Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 16 points XO to XF FP X C30 control unit Output 1 points YO to YD t XO to XF Input 32 points X10 to X1F FP X C60 control unit E YO to YD p p Y10 to Y1D 15 2 2 FPO Expansion Unit Allocation The FP X expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP X control unit I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation I O number Input 8 points X300 to X307 FP X E16 expansion I O unit Output 8 points 7300 to Y307 Input 16 points X300 to X30F FP X E30 expansion I O unit Output 14 points ooi a0 Note E16R cannot be connected on the right side of E16R 15 2 3 FPO Expansion Unit Allocation Only one expansion FPO adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP X expansion bus The I O allocation varies depending on the installation locati
118. connected via the COM port Note that the USB is equivalent to the serial port Necessary items for the connection About PC The PC with the following OS is necessary to connect the FP X with the USB Windows 98 Second Edition Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP ACS Note The FP X cannot be connected with the USB cable when using Windows 95 About programming tool The following programming tool is necessary Relay type Transistor type FPWIN GR Ver 2 50 or later version FPWIN GR Ver 2 70 or later version About USB cable A commercial cable is necessary Cable for SUB 2 0 or 1 1 AB type Max 5 m Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 4 USB Connection Procedure This procedure should be performed only once for the first connection It is not necessary to do it from the next time However the communication setting must be changed when switching between the USB connection and the tool port connection 6 3 5 Installation of FPWIN GR Install the FPWIN GR Relay type Ver 2 50 or later version Transistor type Ver 2 70 or later version before connecting the FP X with a PC Acs Note Do not connect the FP X to a PC with the USB cable before the FPWIN GR is installed or during the installation If they are connected the USB driver will not be installed correctly Reference lt 6 3 9 Reinstallation of USB Driver gt
119. ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Home return operation using CHO Minus direction When X2 turns on a pulse is output from CCW output Y101 of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X100 turns on deceleration begins and when X102 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0 OV 24 V DC gj eee Ipce ES Home sensor Program x2 R911C R42 R40 ae ee ee a oF t Positioning operation running o R40 BO R40 R41 R41 Fi DMY HII _DT 200 il DT200 control code H1121 Fi omv K200 DT22 OTOS Initial speed 200 Hz T 04 F1 DMY K 2000 _DT 204 pras Max speed 2000 Hz OT206 pe i Acceleration time 150 ms OT20 Fi DMV K 150 DT 206 Deviation counter clear output Not used Fi DMY KO _DT 208 ij 5 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hr toil kHz F171 SPDH DT 200 KO F Pulse output instruction Home return The data table headed by DT200 is used d E a output from CHD ia used Pulses are output from CHO R911C R40 TO R42 a i es se tts Hoir Positioning done pulse 1 second R49 5 eee TMX 0 K10 x00 Hor H Fo MV HII DT 90052 Fo MW H100 DT 90052 ee eee l M ee l G Near home deceleration start _ Pulse output diagram Mear home sensor Home sensor x100 ON X2 ON x10
120. current output terminal of the same channel simultaneously Voltage amplifier DA converter Current amplifier micro computer Terminal block Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 3 FP X Analog I O Cassette Product No AFPX A21 No of input points ineuprance Digital conversion value Resolution Conversion speed Total accuracy Voltage A eels Voltage Absolute max input 30 mA Current input Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Between each channel of analog output terminals Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Note1 When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits the digital values maintain the upper and lower limit values As the resolution is 12 bits the higher 4 bits of the input contact are Insulation always 0 Note2 Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit 10 V Analog input OV Conversion Waiting for Seen time refresh 1 ms to 2 ms Oto scan time K4000 Note3 Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette If averaging is necessary use a ladder program to execute averaging process No of output points Voltage ee Digital value Resolution Conversion speed Total accuracy Output impedance Output max current Output allowable load resistance
121. data in the receive buffer is not cleared Note e Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program Explanatory diagram Data register DT ici Neca E EKEN E AE AE 3Data reading abe o Data reception 2Reception done R9038 ON Reception ready R9038 OFF FP X KA gt g gt 4 External lg device te G i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the COM port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receive buffer The number of e Specify the data registers in system register 416 to bytes received is stored in this area 419 Word e The number of bytes of data received is stored in the n Reception data starting address of the receive buffer The initial value storage area is O The circled numbers IS U ea order Of e Received data is stored in the received data storage n an n 1 area in order from the lower order byte Reception process When the reception done flag R9038 R9048 is off operation takes
122. data of S1 1 S1 is searched PDSRC S2 for in the 32 bit data designated by S3 S3 beginning from S2 and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 F97 P97 32 bit table data search dp gt JJ dp O O n w C C Data shift instructions Data table shift out and compress CMPR D1 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of PCMPR D2 the data between D1 and D2 that D3 are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 P99 Data table shift in CMPW S D1 and compress PCMP Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the data between D1 and D2 that are O are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 v N F100 Right shift of P100 multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data F101 Left shift of multiple SHL P101 bits n bits in a 16 PSHL bit data F102 Right shift of n bits DSHR P102 in a 32 bit data PDSHR Left shift of n bits in DSHL a 32 bit data PDSHL Jn Shifts the n bits of D to the right D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left ol D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left J 7 G D2 n D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one WSHR D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and
123. diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of self diagnostic error codes MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 4 1 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Duplicated Change to PROG mode and correct the output program so that one relay error is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions which must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register
124. disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 8 The installation of the USB driver starts Although an alert for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation click Continue Anyway to continue the installation Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches Hardware Installation A The software you are installing for this hardware CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 The next message is shown and the installation of the USB COM conversion driver completes Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for F CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller Click Finish to close the wizard The installation of the USB driver has been comple
125. down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO In the unit on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition AJAJA FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 AJAJA The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion A unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic
126. error gt AJAJAJA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net E57 MEWNET F terminal station error MEWNET F I O update synchro nous error Multi CPU I O regis tration error CPU2 only IC memory card back up battery error IC memory card back up battery error Incompati ble IC memory card error No unit for the configu ration Self diagnostic error set by F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction Opera tion status Conti nues Conti nues Conti nues Conti nues Cont inues Cont inues Conti nues Conti nues Description and steps to take Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvbgycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn
127. for either one signal Note e With the C14 if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CHO set the Y4 to the normal output by the system register e With the C14 if the home return is executed with the deviation counter clear for the pulse output CH1 set the Y5 to the normal output by the system register e f the home return is executed set the home input by the system register 401 If the home return is executed without the setting an operation error occurs C30 C60 Tr type Pulse High speed Medium speed Signal PULSE Ccw wT SIGN YT SH Y Deviation counter clear output Y8 Y9 J Homeinput 4 X X X Note The X4 X5 X6 and X7 of the home input are also used for the input of the high speed counter Use them only for either one signal Note e f the home return is executed set the home input by the system register 401 If the home return is executed without the setting an operation error occurs Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F175 e If an instruction related to the high speed counter F166 to F175 is executed the control flag Special internal relay R9110 to R911D corresponding to the channel used turns on e Please be aware that the control flag in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay it is recommended to generate
128. from the send area to the receive area of a different PLC Link relays and link registers with the same numbers as those on the transmission side must exist in the receive area on the receiving side For PC PLC link 0 Link relay allocation FP X FPE FP X FP2 FP2SH Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 WLO Send area 19 1 5 50 Receive area Receive area Receive area Send area System registers Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size Note No 40 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all T T Link register allocation FP X FPE FP X FP2 FP2SH Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Receive area Receive area System registers 41 Range of link registers used Send area Starting No for link register transmission o 36s f 40 is80 C OC Link register transmission size 40o 40 J48 o Note No 41 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Emai
129. height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Min 100mm or less Static electricity Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Wiring the Power Supply to the Control Unit Use a power supply wire that is thicker than 2 mm2 AWG14 and twist it The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device lf using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Be sure to supply power to a control and an expa
130. i O Communication _ The following setting is valid only when p Parity check ae P format setting with odd the communication mode specified by Pena system register 412 has been set to Stop bit 1 bit i cle aaa General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist Starting address for received buffer of 0 to 32764 general serial data communication mode oe 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Default J Unit No setting 1 to 99 Computer link Communication Computer link General purpose serial communication mode setting PC PLC link MODBUS RTU Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled connection Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 5 7600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buff
131. in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of PLC system register setting ELC Confieuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Haold Non hold 2 1 No 413 Communication Format Lica ae Evie Nod Unit No in ea 7 Time No412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits gt i Computer Link Parity Oda Usage settings 7 for CPU input Modem Enabled Stop Bit 1 gt Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Special input Special input PRN Software filter settings 1 of CPU input No 15 Baudrate J600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Fe ee FE vac FRYE MIRREN Suet NE NTI SE TOW OK Software filter settings 3 of CPU input ane ANE eee mete ree eae ioe Software filter settings 4 of CPU input COM2 Port Initialize Help No 410 for COM1 port No 411 for COM2 port unit number settings Click on Ral and select a unit number from 1 to 99 Note With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Connection with external devices AFPX COMS3 when setting RS485 Connection diagram FP X side 5 pin terminal To external device S Transmission line 1 with RS485 port S s s EA To external device with RS485 port Wiring should extend fro
132. in the register x 2 5ms A NIA PC PLC link 1 status The number of times the sending operation is DT90152 performed DT90153 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms pT90154 The MAU interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90155 The on interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms Area used for measurement of receiving PC PLC link 0 status Area used for measurement of sending RT interval Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available Address Name Description ig ing ing ing Area used for measurement of receiving DT90159 PC PLC link 1 status Area used for measurement of sending interval MEWNET WO l l DT90160 PC PLC link 0 unit No Stores the unit No of PC PLC link 0 A MEWNET WO DT90161 PC PLC link 0 error Stores the error contents of PC PLC link 0 A flag DT90162 to DT90169 DT90170 Duplicated destination for PC PLC inter link address DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 eae undefined commands have been MEWNET WO DT90175 PC PLC link 0 status DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No
133. info ctiautomation net Operation mode Incremental lt Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Positive Negative Example CW CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse output from CCW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Target value greater than current value Target value less than current value Example CW CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse output from CCW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value are
134. is compared with the value of H830 8 30 R900B RO ee a r Comparison match is output _J RO TO YO o ee e DF r Appointed time output pulse 1 second YO E a neem ge oman ei ay TMX 0 K10 Poe pee v K10is set and used as a 1 second type timer me ee l a oa aM The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DT90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time 30 second compensation The compensation for 30 seconds is performed in the DT90058 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 2 2 Master Memory Function Overview This function enables to transfer the data in the control unit internal memory such as programs to the master memory cassette and to copy them into another control unit internal memory by installing the master memory cassette on it e Following data can be transferred to the master memory cassette 1 Ladder programs 2 System registers 3 Comments 4 F ROM data area 5 Security information Password or uploading disabled information When there is no security information no security information exists Change the switch on the back of the master memory cassette The changeover switch is located at the back of the FP X master m
135. is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 lt When using CH0 gt FP X Tr type Home input Near home X4 Br ams Jopu u X100 YO Pulse output 13 Direction output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y4 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y8 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type lt When using CH2 gt FP X Tr type Home input Near home X6 7 input X100 ox Driver Y4 Fulse output Y5 Direction output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Driver lt When using CH1 gt FP X Tr type Home input Near home XS ol input x200 Driver Pulse output Y3 Direction output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y5 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y9 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type lt When using CH3 gt C30 C60 Tr type only FP X Tr type Home input Near home Af m input x200 Driver Pulse output Y6 Y7 Direction output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input
136. link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Fose Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in R906C PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in R906D PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in R906E PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Poe Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in R906F PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR907 FP X R9072 Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode R9073 Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode R9074 R9075 MEWNET Wo ha PC PLC link Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG m
137. na Aa Step ladder instructions S sere e The start of program n for process 3 aolololololec gt 1 control ee eae e NSTL Starts the specified process n and clears the process currently started Scan execution type NSTP Starts the specified process n and H i H clears the process currently started Pulse execution type Clear step CSTP Resets the specified process n effie Clear multi SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by 5 pole steps a a cial e H n1 and n2 4 Step end STPE End of step ladder area BONE Subroutine instructions Subroutine When the trigger is on Executes the call CALL al subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained Output off When the trigger is on Executes the type FECAL n subroutine subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the call subroutine But the output in the subroutine is cleared Subroutine ae eee sh Indicates the start of the subroutine entry program n an et tome Teolo return baal al Interrupt IRET _ Ends the interrupt program return Interrupt ICTL H Hoin m sH Select interrupt enable disable or clear in contro S1 and S2 and execute Available X Not available Not available partially Available for FP e only 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier
138. net Email info ctiautomation net 7 3 4 MEWTOCOL Master Sample Program Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function Sample program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing 0 words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first a Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 FO MV H2 DT100 7 Fo Mv H1001 DT10 J Note 1 Fo MV HO WRO J FiDMV HO _oT50 F1OMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 R2 is the transmission condition of read command R9044 RO R1 Note 2 RO R2 H H Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 F61 DCMP DT50 DT60 R1 R900B st A E A s 1 gt F36D 1 DT50 Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and SSF DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 port R1 F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 oTO Kko Fo MV H1 wRo J Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 _ 70 port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit R2 F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO Dr60
139. not available for Ver 6 Note2 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to the latest version after Ver 6 1 free of charge at our web site Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Type of computer and suitable cable For the connection between a personal computer RS232C and the control unit RS232C PC side connector PLC side connector Specifications Product No female Mini DIN round 5 pin L type 3 m AFC8503 D Sup Pn female Mini DIN round 5 pin Straight type 3 m AFC8503S Note Note A USB RS232C conversion cable is necessary to connect the unit to the USB port of a personal computer using a PC connection cable For the connection between a personal computer USB and the control unit USB USB cable For C30 and C60 only Use a commercial cable Cable type Length USB 2 0 or 1 1 AB type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 1 Parts and Functions 2 1 1 Parts and Functions MFP X C14 Control unit Right side view common to the control units DIN rail attachment Cassette mounting part 1 State that the expansion cover was remo
140. of points per 28 common which are simulta neously on 40 45 55 Ambient temperature C C14PD Number of points per common Which are simulta 4 neously on 49 55 Ambient temperature C C30PD Number of points per 14 common 44 which are 10 simulta neously on 51 Ambient temperature C C60PD Number of points per 28 common which are 17 simulta neously on 43 Ambient temperature 2 5 8 Transistor Tr Type PNP With AFPX DA2 and A21 Current Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14P AFPX C60PD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Number of points per common which are simulta neously on C30P Number of 46 points per 44 common which are 10 simulta neously on 48 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 32 points per common which are 18 ay simulta yp Jones neously on 11 pomoor nomen eens 4245 55 Ambient temperature C C14PD Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 37 40 49 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 16 points per common which are 10 simulta neously on 4951 55 Ambient temperature
141. of programs the user should consider the following measures e Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved e Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point e Upload protection When the upload protection setting is specified programs will be disabled to be read out If the setting is cancelled forcibly all programs and system registers will be deleted Therefore note that programs and system registers should be managed on your own responsibility Backup battery Do not install the battery when it is not used There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller Usable model Usable functions UP DOWN switching of high speed counter by SYS instruction Real number basic compare instructions 18 types STF S1 S2 ANF S1 S2 ORF S1 S2 STF lt gt S1 S2 ANF lt gt S1 S2 ORF lt gt S1 S2
142. of the trigger is detected Turns on the contact for only one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan YRL E Output is set to and held at on _ s RUE Output is set to and held at off lt R gt F Outputs at set trigger and holds until reset trigger turns on 2 Basic function instructions On delay timer TML After set value n x 0 001 seconds 3 timer contact a is set to on 4 3 TMR After set value n x 0 01 seconds Me n co timer contact a is set to on TMX After set value n x 0 1 seconds timer contact a is set to on TMY After set value n x 1 second timer 13 0 contact a is set to on Auxiliary timer F137 yRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds 16 bit STMR H H wrsms oH H the specified output and R900D are set to on Auxiliary timer F183 YRLE After set value S x 0 01 seconds 32 bit DSTM i H wsosm s OH the specified output and R900D are set to on Time constant processing a T Q Available Not available A Not available partially 1 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 3 For FP2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction 4 5 aa os 1 Leadin
143. of the COM 1 port should be connected to the CS AFPX COM2 2 channel 3 wire COM 2 Pin name _ Signal name __ _Abbre _ R1 Receive Data1 RD R2 Receive Data2 RD RS232C Destination device 1 TAD Receive Data Destination device 2 p ee i Signal Ground AFPX COMS 1 channel RS485 RS422 Using RS485 COM 3 Pinname _ Signal name Abbre Notused foo Notused Lf Notused Using RS422 COM 3 S Send data SD RD _ R Receive Data RD Lt Notused ooo Destination device Aore Signal name fransmssion tne Fensmision ine o To other device Destination device RD Receive Data gt es 28 oto Note There are several names for the signal names of RS422 Confirm with the instruction manuals for each device Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX COM4 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel 3 wire RS232C COM 4 Destination device 1 3 Transmission iine Transmission ine _ Transmission iine 3 RD Receive Data RD _ To other device Destination device 2 RD Receive Data AFPX COM5 1 channel Ethernet and 1 channel 3 wire RS232C LAN cable Destination device AD Receive Data AD Receive Daa RD AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 COM6 Desti
144. or if the system is initialized Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error Operation error flag Occurs hold The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 indicates the first operation error which occurred Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs gt The address where the operation error occurred is stored in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the calculation R9009 Carry flag results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed Turns on for an instant when the compared results become oer larger in the comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison R900B instructions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions smaller in the comparison instructions Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM Contact auxiliary timer instruction The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port nee R900E Po a Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred communication error Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in system register 34 during constant scan execution This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34 Backup battery error oe flag non hold Backup b
145. positions Installation screw down from the state that the terminal block is floating The terminal block will be secured by being pushed with the screws The terminal block is floating The tightening torque should be 0 25 to 0 35 Nem Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 8 Wiring of Add on Cassette Terminal Block A screw down connection type for terminal block is used for the add on cassette The suitable wires are given below Suitable wires twisted Size Nominal cross sectional area AWG 28 to 16 0 08 to 1 00 mm Pole terminal with a compatible insulation sleeve If a pole terminal is being used the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co should be used ross ional po PartNo Groes sections With Without area mm insulating sleeve insulating sleeve AWG 24 Al 0 25 6BU AWG 22 A 0 34 6 A 0 5 6 Phoenix AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 20 for 2 pHs Contact Co AWG 18 S Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Part No Product No Phoenix Contact Co CRIMPFOX UD6 1204436 For tightening the terminal block When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautom
146. produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device O CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device Inverter etc Other device Inverter etc Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 5 3 Power Supply for Expansion FPO Adapter Use the power supply cable provided as an accessory to supply power to the unit Power supply cable AFP0581 Green Function earth Blue 0 V Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable Part No AFP0581 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Brown 24V DC Blue OV Green Function earth FE Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable Power supply from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit e To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit electric cable that reinforced insulation or double insulation has been made e The regulator on the unit is a non insulated type e To turn the power supplies on simultaneously supply the power for the expansion FPO adapter from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Measures regarding power supply sequence star
147. pt J CUA PAA ATT AT 0 5 E ARR RR ACA AN A A A e EEE e E E a A E E E es AEE E E a DS a E E N AJ 100 J AAA p e e EE EA E E O E E a A A A A AN E Pe E EA e e G e G Af S J y y S da Soy d 5 i Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the HSC target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Max counting speed Frequency kHz fe e tejam Q e o Q lt ce e Q z O O Pulse output 2 CH Pulse output 4 CH 1 axis interpolation PUSE Output Cu 2 axis interpolation Pulse output 1 CH Note The maximum counting speed may be lower than the above mentioned values when the HSC target value match ON OFF instruction and other interrupt programs are executed simultaneously Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Pulse input output performance Independent control Available Tt Available Available 00 Available Available Available 10 2 Available Available Available Available Note Even if all channels are used they can be used within the ranges above Interpolation control Maximum output frequency kHz High speed Medium speed Comp
148. rail attachment State that the expansion cover was removed Input and Output indicator LEDs Indicates the on off status of the input and output Input terminal block This is the input terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Output terminal block This is the output terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Expansion connector Connects with the control unit expansion unit and the expansion FPO adapter using the exclusive expansion cable Expansion cover It is used after the expansion cable has been fitted DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch Terminator setting DIP switch All switches should be turned on for the expansion unit installed at the last position Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 2 2 Power Supply Specifications AC Power Supply Specifications Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC Inrush current 40 Aor less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals Mea aioe SUPP pelt 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 Service Power Supply for In
149. retry counts 3 counts Force Cancel Password Password is not set digit number Help C 4 digits Hex FP Memory Loader option status Download to versions older than Yersian 2 5 Operation Mode Allow the download in case of same password Invalid Access PLC cannot be uploaded Invalid Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option I Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 m Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 2 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FP X There are two ways to set a password as below 1 Sets using the programming tool 2 Sets using an instruction SYS1 instruction cS ner Note Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password If you forget your password you cannot read programs Even if you ask us for your password we cannot crack it 11 2 1 Password Setting Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Security information dialog box Set PLC Password Untitle1 Indicates the current st
150. setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers D1T9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and DT90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function AJAJAIAJAJAJAJA A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Opera tion status Remote I O commu nication error MEW NET F attribute error Expansion unit power supply sequence error battery error Description and steps to take FPS FP X S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEW NET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power
151. settings For Parameter example the number setting in a program does mismatch not agree with the timer counter range setting error Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written ina specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written toa different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Program area error A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Compile memory full error High level Instruction type error High level Instruction operand combina tion error No program error Rewrite during RUN syntax error Opera tion status Description and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and at the leading edge of the trigger are programmed
152. settings of the operation memory area such as data regiters and system registers No 6 to No 14 are necessary PLE Confieuration Untitlel Hald Non hold 2 No 5 Counter starting address i O08 0 1024 Action on Error Te ecu No 6 Hold type area starting address for timer counter fogg 0 1024 Lirik 0 1 Pulse I O cassette settings HSC PLS SEs RCSD ie Sal RAS SUAS No 48 0 256 Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings No 8 Hold type area starting address for data registers js2710 0 32 765 Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No 14 Step Ladder hold a Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input No 4 Leading edge differential during MC holds the previous value Tool Fort COM Fort NOTICE In case of not using back up battery option or battery exhaustion COM Part we can t guarantee the hold area value Cancel Read PLL Initialize Help Note When Battery Error Alarm is not set the ERR LED will not flash even if a battery error is detected Note that data may be lost as the result of the battery shutoff The setting of the system registers Nos 6 to 14 is effective only when the backup battery is mounted Without the battery use at the default settings If changing the settings the Hold Non hold operation becomes unstable Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation
153. software such as FPWIN GR and the PLC e There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave IEF er Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 1 Only the slave function is available for the FP X relay type Ver 1 20 or former version 2 Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP X transistor type and relay type Ver 1 21 or later version however the master function is not available for the TOOL port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net MEWTOCOL master function Transistor type relay type Ver 1 21 or later version e This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side Othat issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit eco power meter Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave _ ea Si z FPE KT temp
154. terminal terminal input Input terminals Ce eon x Ds De L N xo x2 x4 x6 X3 COM X1 Jok X0 X2 Relation between output terminals and COM terminals YO co TE v2 v3 1 v5 v1 c1 oI ae Y3 to Y5 C3 Service power Output terminals supply terminals for input output AFPX C30R AC power supply terminals Input Input terminals i F TEE orato tan a nat ht Yo CO Yi C1 Y2 to Y5 C2 Y6 to Y9 C3 YAto YD C4 aoa power Output terminals supply terminals for input output AFPX C30RD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal i se OM X1 X3 X5 x7 X9 XB XD XF l Relation between output terminals and COM terminals COM XO X2 X4 X6 X8 XA XC XE YO C0 Y C1 Y2 to Y5 C2 C4 YB YD YA to YD C4 gy Uggs ARS oF ORES 4 perry used Output terminal Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX C60R ACG power supply terminals Input Input terminals 1 Not used Input terminals 2 i ol ol Al dl A Al 5 l al o I J E I Ll E i Lal L ae i a COM X11 X13 x15 X17 EDEDETET Om X10 X12 X14 x16 X18 X1A X1C X1E Service power Output terminals 1 Output terminals 2 supply terminals for input output AFPX C60RD DC power supply termin
155. that can be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD I0 to ID K H Devices that can be specified for D Only the K constants only K1 and K2 Sending data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from COM1 port Receiving data Reception of data is controlled by turning the reception done flags R9038 R9048 on and off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register Data can be received when F159 MTRN turns the reception done flag off When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turn the reception done flag off to clear the number of received bytes to 0 To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to KO and then execute the F159 MTRN instruction gt ia Reference lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt Binary communication Selecting S
156. the baud rate is automatically 115200 bps Set the baud rate in the COM1 port communication setting for the AFPX COM5 to 115200 bps as well Setting Ethernet communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the AFPX COM5 Dialog box of Communication setting Communication Setting Setting item Setting value Communication protocol 115200bps Protocol Mode Cancel Action Mode Option Settine Control unit Communication cassette Setting Baud rate of COM 115200 bps X Communication mode General purpose communication Send type BROADCAST Destination port No 1025 to 32767 Source port No 0 1025 to 32767 Communication Mode General Communication v send type BROADCAST v UDPsetting Note1 Specify the same number for the destination port No and the source port No for the AFPX COM5 to be used in the PC PLC link Destination IP Address Destination Port No 9094 0 1025 32767 Source Port No 9094 0 1025 32767 Timeout j 0 No Timeout 40 1800 sec Setting communication environment of FP X The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1 port Select Option PLC Configuration in the menu bar and click COM1 Port tab Dialog box of PLC Configuration setting PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold
157. the number of steps is the number in parentheses Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Diis Oo i Special setting instructions Communica tion condi tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting H HoH arsim MEWTOCOL COM response control High speed counter operation mode changing System registers No 40 to H Lf svs2 s D1 oH No 47 changing Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the operation mode of the high speed counter based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function O Available Not available A Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With FP 32k type the
158. time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms No of steps x 1000 Initial speed fO Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 Control code lt H constant gt H O Fixed OOOUOUOUOOO Number of acceleration deceleration steps 30 steps 60 steps 1 E Duty on width Duty 1 2 50 Duty 1 4 25 0 1 Frequency range 0 1 2 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 48 Hz to 100 kHz 191 Hz to 100 kHz Optional mode and output type Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return CW COW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CW and deviation counter clear CCW and deviation counter clear Direction output OFF and deviation counter clear Direction output ON and deviation counter clear CW CCW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CW and deviation counter clear CCW and deviation counter clear Direction output OFF and deviation counter cear Type Il home return
159. to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type gt Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged gt Try to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 4 2 Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error i bor tion Description and steps to take code status ma Probably a hardware abnormality E20 cPUerror Stops Pica contact your dear BRERRORD error error2 RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM Stops plese contact Hie S h eal RAM error5 Master memory The models of master memories are different A model Stops Use the master memories created with the 4 unmatch same model error FP e FP0 FPOR FP x and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality gt Please contact your
160. type connect a 2 KQ 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 kQ 1 2 W to 470 Q 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of I O allocation Description x3 Overrunning signal R10 _ Positioning in progress X4 Home sensor R11 _ Positioning operation stat X5 Near home sensor R12 _ Positioning done pulse __ _ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal e This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table XO LDF F1 DMV H1100 DT100 F1 DMV K500 DT102 F1 DMV K5000 DT104 F1 DMV K300 DT106 F1 DMV K10000 DT108 F1 DMV KO DT110 F171 SPDH DT100 KO Pulses are generated from output YO at an initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms and a movement amount of 10000 pulses When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below Positioning data table ai Control code 1 H1100 DT103 Initial speed 500 Hz Max speed 2 5000 Hz DT106 Acceleration e DT107 deceleration time 300 ms Target value 4 10000 pulse Pulse stop KO Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses o 300 ms With 30 steps f 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz At 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60
161. unit Ry type Input terminal Home return start Positioning start Emergency stop Or Or J side FP X Stepping motor side side s f coc sj Pulse VO cassette expansion 1 cw BR g CHO Near home sensor Moving table Home sensor Pulse output CW Z Pulse output CCW Y101 Z side E Stepping motor CH1 driver ii FP X Pulse I O cassette expansion 2 Near home sensor Home sensor Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Stepping motor 24 V DC power supply Ro p driver Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 KQ 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 kQ 1 2 W to 470 Q 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of I O allocation XO Home return start signal X1 Positioningstat O e eons ooo ayooo stop X102 Y100 Y100 sae x200 Nearhomesensor x202 Home sensor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Restrictions on positioning data setting e Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range Allowable range 8 388 608 to 8 388 608 e When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions Sample program Continuous interpolation control e Using the l
162. used Output terminal Notused Output terminal Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX E30R AC power supply terminals Input Input terminals t Addeddddddcdcddddda Ct TN JCOmMp xt x3 x5 x7 99 XB XO XE e Relation bet Seige Yo CO Yi C1 Y2 to Y C2 _ ov vo y1 Y2 Y4 c3 Y7 Y9 ya Yyc yYetoy C3 24v co ci c2 Y3 Ys Ye ys c4 YB YD YAtoYD C4 D Ld Service power Output terminals supply terminals for input output AFPX E30RD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal Relation between output terminals and COM terminals Yo C0 Y1 C1 Y2to Y5 C2 Y6 to Y9 C3 YA to YD C4 Not used Output terminal AFPX E30T AC power supply terminal input Input terminal L N Jcom x1 x3 xs x7 x9 XB XD XF _ tov yY1 ys ys yz vo yB yD 24v yo v2 Y4 ye vali va yc nc Left Power supply for YO to Y7 Right Power supply for Y8 to YD SE OO SS SS Service power Output terminal Not used supply for input output Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX E30P AC power supply l terminal input Input terminal nea bs Dee De De po De OM xo x2 x4 x6 xa XA XC XE _ ov v1
163. value X7 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed LDF H F1 DMV K3000 DT90300 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 Read the elapsed value of the high speed DF F1 DMV DT90300 DT100 counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 DF F166 HC1S KO K10000 Y7 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 LDF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns On Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 DF F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns Off Example 2 XD If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 DF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Y5 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns Off FP X Tr type Elapsed value and target value areas of high speed counter chO to ch7 High speed counter a No __ No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area R9110 DT90300 to DT90301 DT90302 to DT90303 R9111 DT90304 to DT90305 DT90304 to DT90307 R9112 DT90308 to DT90309 DT90310 to DT90311 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 3 6 Sample program Control
164. 0 No Retry 0 1800 Communication Mode Computer Link Server Setting Source Port No 1025 32767 Timeout sec 0 No Timeout 0 1800 When Communication cassette AFPX COM5 is in the TCP server mode Dialog box of communication setting Setting of AFPX COM5 itm Settingvalue Communication Setting Protocol Mode TGP Action Mode Option Setting Client Mode x Destination port No 1025 to 32767 Timeout 0 to 1800 s Server Setting Note Specify the same baud rate as the communication ource Port No Sos S z i a i n a environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP X 0 No Timeout 0 1800 Control unit Communication cassette Setting Baud rate of COM Port 9600 bps Communication Mode General Communication Client Setting Destination IP Address 192 168 1 100 Destination Port No 9094 025 3276 Source Port No Do 5a Timeout 0 No Timeout 0 1800 Retry Time 0 No Retry 0 1800 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net When Communication cassette AFPX COM5 is in the UDP mode Dialog box of communication setting Setting of AFPX COM5 tem Setttingvalue Baud Communication Setting Protocol Mode UDP X Action Mode Option Setting Control unit Communication cassette Setting Baud rate of COMI 9600 bps ee Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the mr
165. 0 cm CLAQQAAAT CK LRQQQAT C1QQQQAAT FEESEEEEEREI AEN 12Q Q MITIN l BRBOC Q OGE Seeoec e ecec PEEEECRBOGeEE ol RRISSWS O IK STIO IEE E II Ey ELE Cae S N Control unit Expansion unit E16 Expansion unit E16 Expansion unit E30 Type of control unit Control unit Expansion unit E16 Expansion unit E30 Expansion unit E16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 3 2 Restrictions on FPO Expansion Unit Up to three dedicated FPO expansion units can be added using the FP X and the expansion FPO adapter The relay output type and the transistor output type can be used in combination UU Up to 7 oe expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion I O units can FPO unit 1 unit 3 be connected adapter Expansion unit 2 Controllable I O points Number of I O points when Number of I O points when Type of control unit using control unit using FPO expansion unit FP X C14 Control unit 14 points Max 110 points FP X C30 Control unit 30 points Max 126 points FP X C60 Control unit 60 points Max 156 points Note1 Up to seven FP X expansion I O units can be also installed between the control unit and the expansion FPO adapter Note2 Only one expansion FPO adapter can be installed at the last position of the FP X expansion bus It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX E16 and E30 ACS vr e
166. 00 10 Target value match off instruction l YO goes off when elapsed value of high 3 _ speed counter CHO reaches 9000 pulses _ R101 YO S 7 set the inverter operation signal YO Y1 E a ee a ee 5 Lf Set the inverter high speed signal Y1 R100 oe Hrs DCMP K4500 DT90300 t 32 bit data comparison instruction l R9000 turns on when the CHO high speed counter elapsed value becomes greater than 4500 pules R100 ROOOC R102 m ese _ ria Speed reduction point reached R102 Y1 fakin eA on Cal n S R Reset the inverter high speed signal Y1 R9110 R100 TO R103 e eco ip emcee Hor Positioning done pulse 0 5 s R103 0 1 s type timer Setting KS and using it asa 0 95 timer _ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 3 7 Sample program Pulse I O Cassette Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry AFPX PLS Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input X100 me Pa Operation start X102 COM fin e O Encoder Output terminal P Inverter Inverter operation Y100 Operation Stop Operation chart I O allocation in X100 Encoder input _ unit X102 Operation start signal vO speed on ROO Positioning operation running 0 5000 E Number of pulse
167. 000 DT 104 DT105 Max speed 6000 Hz F1 DMV K DT 4 aioe Acceleration time 300 ms L 300 06 J DT108 Target value 8000 pul DT109 Movement amount iain F1 DMV K 8000 DT108 DT110 pulse stop DT111 F1 DMV KO DT110 Conii code H 100 ut b 48 Hz to100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW F171 SPDH DT 100 KO f Pulse output instruction 1 table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CHO nies R911C R20 TO R22 a a a ee ee E HFA 2 Positioning done pulse 1 second R22 co ap Setting K10 and using it as a 1 s ___ timer Pulse output diagram 6000 Hz 8000 pulses 1000 Hz 0 Hz 300 ms 300 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Absolute position control operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from CW output YO or CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22000 the pulses are output from Y1 and if the value is smaller than 22000 the pulses are output from YO Note In that case the memory YO or Y1 does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible OV 24V DC FP X T Eren Start input Pulse output CW bpooooo t O JUULI ad Pulse output CCW R JUUL Motor driver side side ripota eera Pears I bie feathers ke brary
168. 0000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 7 ASCII Codes b bef o o o o at aia it b7 b6 b5 b4 b b2 m z O a gt A nlolni lt cl l lrino Zlz eggiaisssaikS lt lalalalalelz g a g HN HID Gligl Zzlwa 2 SI Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Record of changes ARCT1F409E May 2005 First Edition ARCT1F409E 1 Oct 2005 2 Edition PDF only New product addition AFPX E30R AFPX TR6P AFPX EC30 AFPX EC80 ARCT1F409E 2 SEPT 2006 3 Edition New product addition FP X Control Unit Transistor Type FP X Expansion Unit Transistor Type ARCT1F409E 3 Apr 2007 4 Edition New product addition FP X communication cassette AFPX COM5 FP X communication cassette AFPX COM6 FP X Analog output cassette AFPX DA2 FP X Analog I O cassette AFPX A21 FP X Thermocouple cassette AFPX TC2 FP X I O cassette AFPX IN4T3 ARCT1F409E 4_ Jan 2008 5 Edition ARCT1F409E 5_ Oct 2008 6 Edition ARCT1F409E 6 Dec 2008 7 Edition ARCT1F409E 7 Feb 2009 8 Edition ARCT1F409E 8 Feb 2010 9 Edition New product addition FP X RTD cassette AFPX RTD2 ARCT1F409E 9 Sept 2011 10 Edition Error correction Change of corporate name Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctia
169. 0031 The contents of the specified message Data DT90032 length are stored in these special data DT90033 registers when F149 MSG instruction is DT90034 executed DT90035 DT90036 Notused CNA NA Note Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available are Read Writ padres nme Desonpton ng ing The number of data that match the searched DT90037 To ror ios data is stored here when F96 SRC A N A Instructions l as instruction is executed The position of the first matching data is DT90038 oe 1o ony stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is A N A Instructions executed DT90039 Notused J SCN NAA The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is DT90040 Volume input 0 stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the l A N A program to read this value to a data register DT90041 Volume input 1 VO DT90040 V1 DT90041 For C60 only DT90042 Volume input 2 The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the A N A program to read this value to a data register DT9004
170. 040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not for the COM2 port COM2 port SEND RECV Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be R904A i instruction execution flag executed During executing the instruction COM2 port SEND RECV R904B instruction execution end flag Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR905 FP X Address Name Description When using MEWNET WO MEWNET WO Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PC PLC link PC PLC link transmission error flag Turns on when there is an error in the PC PLC link area settings R9051 to R905F Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR906 FP me T Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in R9060 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode mo Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in R9061 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in R9062 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in R
171. 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 7 Confirming COM Ports The USB connected to the FP X is recognized by the PC as a COM port It depends on your PC environment to which COM port the USB is allocated Therefore it is necessary to confirm the COM port number allocated Procedure for displaying Device Manager Displaying Device Manager Displays Device Manager when the FP X is connected to the PC with the USB cable The display method varies depending on the OS in the PC to be used In case of Windows XP My computer gt View System information Click Hardware tab Click Device Manager In case of Windows 2000 My computer gt Control panel gt System Click Hardware tab Click Device manager gt Click View menu gt Device by type With Windows 98 Second Edition Windows Me My computer gt Control panel gt System Click Device manager tab and select View devices by type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Procedure for confirming COM ports 1 Display Device Manager Device Manager File Action view Help m amp r A MATSUSHI 5OP91Q P Computer amp Disk drives 2 Display adapters 2 DYD CD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers J Floppy disk drives E I
172. 1 Control code lt H constant gt H OOOOOOOO 0 Fixed M Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps E Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Mi Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz E Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Speed Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range O 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 HZ 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 KHz Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant gt With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify by 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify by 60 steps 5 4 Target value lt K constant gt K 2147483648 to K2147483647 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fa
173. 1 S2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DCBA Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 BCDA PBCDA F73 P73 4 digit BCD data gt ASCII code 1 2 D F74 P74 ASCII code 4 digit BCD data ABCD PABCD 1 2 D Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 432 1 BINA PBINA F75 P75 16 bit binary data gt ASCII code 1 S2 D Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes N 001 O Available Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Boolean Description rand FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH F76 P76 ASCII code gt 16 bit binary data ABIN PABIN S1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D 001 Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes Converts the ASCII code specified by D S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data 11 a
174. 1 port Computer link Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header No STX No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps Settings for COM2 port AFPX COM2 AFPX COM4 AFPX COM5 i Unit number COM2 port Pe No 414 Communication format for COM2 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header No STX The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Note They are set in different bit positions of the same system register no so the different settings are possible for port 1 and port 2 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Programming e For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side No communication program is required on the PLC side Specify the communication format only by the system register e Create the program on the PC side using Basic language or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM Commands to monitor and control the operation of the PLC are provided in the MEW TOCOL COM Phone 800 8
175. 10 R1 aH HDFH FO MV WX3 I0DTO F35 1 10 When RO turns on 0 is written to index register l0 When the R1 turns on the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by IODTO Add 1 to l0 In this case the contents of I0 will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times of R1 Contents of I0 Destination data register 1st 0 DTO 2nd 1 DT1 3rd 2 DT2 Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input lt Example 1 gt Setting a timer number specified by a digital switch RO H DF H F81 BIN WxX1 10 Jas Set timer 0 9 Set timer time number F81 BIN WX0 l0SVO ss WX1 VWX0 L_ Digital __ switches Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register l0 Convert the BCD timer set value in WXO to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of 10 lt Example 2 gt Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch segment indicator Timer elapsed value display R1 H DF H F81 BIN WX1 10 Js F80 BCD IOEVO WYO ss 2 Timer number setting Digital switches Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register l0 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by I0 to BCD and output it to output relay WYO Phone 800 894 0412
176. 15 Baudrate Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM Port Cancel Initialize Help No 411 unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select Internal USB for the port selection The communication mode is Computer Link No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits PONY seteschasssesounaes Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR fixed Header 05 No STX fixed To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the USB COMZ2 port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate setting The baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Restrictions The USB COM2 port supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL COM There is no restriction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 3 USB Connection The FP X C30 control unit and C60 control unit is equipped with the USB connector Connecting the units with a personal computer using the USB cable enables the communication with our software such as FPWIN GR The FP X C14 control unit is not equipped with the USB connector It is a communication method that uses the USB as a virtual serial port so that the FP X connected with the USB is treated from the PC as that it is
177. 16 2 Cable Adapter Specifications 16 2 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S PC 3000 3 D os S 16 0 j gt OO CN2 Aa gt PC side 2 on Pin No Signal name Oj y r 5 5 co LO ol o aj 2 o 9j d g stat 7 O A 8 N a Socket 1 Inch screw thread 4 40 4 AFC8503S S Unit mm 16 2 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port D D A g eft i AN 1 tot oy or no a ae A Y E imm paaa j 500 Y To 1000 5 L 2000 9 ME i ia 8 z Z i c it CON j Olan Q ME eee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 17 Appendix Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of timers and counters System registers 5 The number of timers and counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 2 Hold non hold type setting System
178. 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 0 8 kHz Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to a maximum of K20000 Hz 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant gt With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify by 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify by 60 steps 5 4 Target value lt K constant gt K 2147483648 to K2147483647 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CW output YO of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory YO does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible 0 V 24V DC a SU Start input Pulse output CW Beesee O i ULN pE Pulse output CCW a Motor driver side side Motor 10000 pulses A Program KO R911C R12 R10 PONO SOE N HDF Positioning operation running J R10 rr ia ars R10 R11 oe DF Positioning operation start J R11 Positioning data table F1 omv H1100 DT 100 OT 109 Control
179. 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that The current will be greater than l The resistance R of the bleeder resistor ts s Ba 6x 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is Power supply voltage R 3 to 5 times Servicing power supply for input Use it for input and the expansion FPO adapter Use an external power supply for the FPO expansion unit When it is used for another device confirm the consumption current of the device side before it is connected If excess current is being supplied for a long time the power supply may be damaged 5 6 2 Output Wiring Do not connect a load that exceeds the maximum switching ability to the output terminal Protective circuit for inductive loads e With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load e When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Surge absorber R C Varistor Output O _ Load H Output 4 _ FP X termina S FP X terminal TT A COM COM Example of surge absorber Resistance R 50 Q Capacity C 0 47 uF Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net When using a DC inductive load Diode al Output FP X terminal 9 oie COM O _ _ Di
180. 2 ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz 150 ms 150 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Home return operation using CH1 Plus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from CW output Y200 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins When X200 turns on deceleration begins and when X202 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0 OV 24 V DC FP X Ry AFPX PLS paba ai Home return start JONA OO Pulse output CW rh Te NNN s x202 Home input Pulse output CCW a Motor driver side Motor WAAAY Near home sensor Home sensor Program x3 R911D R52 R50 EPOE HDF Positioning operation running R50 i R50 R51 e ee ee e a HDF 2 a Positioning operation start ee eee ees ees ees we ees oe eee R51 Positioning data table F1 omv H1120 DT200 07200 Control code H 1120 F1 omv K200 DT 202 B 1205 Initial speed 200 Hz DT204 F1 omv K 1000 DT 204 7 pis Max speed a Acceleration time 150 ms Fi DMV K150 0T 206 BIS 1 De 2 Deviation counter Not d DT208 clear output NOL USG Fi omv Ko DT208 Contd code T1120 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz 10100 kHz Home return CW F171 SPDH DT 200 K1 Pulse output instruction Home return The dat
181. 23 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions High speed counter built in the control unit No of channels 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz Max frequency 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 KHz 10 kHz 10 kHz 2 a e H Pulse I O set AFPX PLS high speed counter Single phase No of channels po 80kKHz 0 O pK Max frequency 80 kHz 80 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz Conditions When the duty is 50 and the match on off instruction is not used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Restrictions on I O allocations e Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I O at the same time e Except for the examples noted below inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs Exceptional cases AFPX PLS Example 1 If no reset input is used in the high speed counter function X102 and X202 can be used as normal inputs Example 2 If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function Y102 and Y202 can be used as normal outputs Restrictions o
182. 24V DC Expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFPO 10 mA or less Example of calculation when 100 V AC C30R IN8 TR8 E16R EFPO 410 mA 10 mA 10 mA 65 mA 10mA Current consumption of FPO expansion unit Total 495 mA or less 100 V AC 10mA Current consumption of FPO expansion unit 24V DC Example When one FPO expansion unit FPO E32T is connected FPO expansion adapter 10 mA or less FPO E32T 40 mA or less total 50 mA or less Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 15 1 2 Performance Specifications Relay type 14 points 30 points 60 points 14 points 30 points 60 points DC input DC input DC input DC input DC input DC input Control unit 8 16 32 8 16 32 Ry output Ry output Ry output Tr output Tr output Tr output 6 14 28 6 14 28 contro expansion l O units points points points points points points llable Max 254 Max 270 Max 300 Max 254 Max 270 Max 300 I O When using E30R points points points points points points points expansion I O units up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 up to 8 units units units units units units Max 110 Max 126 Max 156 Max 110 Max 126 Max 156 When using FPO points points points points points points expansion units up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 up to 3 units units units units units units Relay symbol Cyclic operation Built in Flash ROM without backu
183. 3 Volume input 3 V2 DT90042 V3 DT90043 ms wins NRL Ed owe wien Naw proa rams prora pas rs to Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available jes vane in a A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting FP X Ry type 43210 i5 12 lt Channel setting HSC 0 te B CHO to CHB HSC 0 HSC High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear High speed counter HSC Hardware reset Note 0 Disable 1 Enable DT90052 control flag HSC Count 0 Enable 1 Disable HSC Software reset 0 Nori Yes FP X Tr type 43210 15 12 LA EA Channel setting HSC 0 to 7 CHO to CH7 HSC 0 HSC High speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear HSC Hardware reset Note 0 Disable 1 Enable HSC Count 0 Enable 1 Disable HSC Software reset 0 Nast Yes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ees vane tan A value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code setting FP X Ry type 15 12 43210 Channel setting PLS 0 1 CHO CH1
184. 3 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Tr type ress Cont roller input settings High speed counter 1 settings HSC XO to X3 High speed input counter settings pulse 2 output HSC settings PLS X4 to X7 Cont roller Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net CHO Do not set input XO as high speed counter CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter CH3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter CH4 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter X4 Normal input CH5 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter CH6 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter X6 Normal input CH7 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter XT Normal input Description Do not set input X0 as high speed counter Incremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Two phase input X0 X1 Individual input X0 X1 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter Incremental input X2 Decremental input X2 Two phase input X2 X3 Individual input X2 X3 Incremental decremental control input X2 X3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Incremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Do not set
185. 3 DT90354 to DT90355 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program F171 to F174 f Wiring example FP X Ry type Input terminal Positioning start Positioning start Home return start JOG start JOG start Overrunning J LI LU EE b contact a contact a contact b contact FP X pulse I O cassette Stepping motor Moving table Output terminal m side TT side i BE rm Stepping motor driver Near home sensor Horne sensor Pulse output CVV ia Ea CW input E At Uc Pulse output COW i es CCW input RI Ri Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 KQ 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 kQ 1 2 W to 470 Q 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of I O allocation Description X0 _ Positioning start signal X102 _ Homesensorinput _ Positioning in progress X3 JOG start signal R10 _ Positioning in progress x4 JOG start signal R11 _ Positioning operation start X5 Overrunning signal R12 _ Positioning done pulse __ _ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal e This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table XO LDF F1
186. 40 to X34F FPO A21 FPO analog I O unit CH1 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F l WY30 WY32 WY34 conversion unit FPO TC4 CHO 2 4 6 X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F couple unit CH1 3 5 7 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 RTD unit CH1 3 5 ree to X3F to X5F na to X7F site E a ien ea X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F conversion unit FP0 A041 CHO 2 Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F CH1 3 Y310 to Y31F Y330 to Y33F Y350 to Y35F FPO FPO IOL Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F I O link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F e The data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 FPO RTD unit FPO RTD6 and FPO D A conversion unit FPO A04V FPO A04I is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 15 2 4 I O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette The FP X add on cassette is mounted on the FP X control unit I O numbers Communication cassette Application cassette Note1 There is no I O for the communication cassette and master memory cassette Type of control unit FP X communication
187. 412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 1 communication with programmable display GT series Overview A 1 1 computer link with a programmable display connects the FP X and the programmable display using an RS232C cable Communication is performed via commands from the programmable display and responses from the PLC No program is required for communication Simply set the mutual communications settings to operate the PLC via the programmable display Programmable display GT series T as RS232C lt Using AFPX COM1 gt 1 channel RS232C type GT series side FP X side 5 pin terminal Pinname Signalname Abbre _ ee RD Receive Data RD _ RS Raquest to Sand RS Clear to Send Signal Ground_ SG lt Using AFPX COM2 gt 2channel RS232C type GT series side FP X side 5 pin terminal lt si send Data 1 so Rt Receive Data T RD Ro R2 Receive Data 2 RO To other device lt Using AFPX COM3 RS422 setting gt 1 channel RS485 RS232C type GT series side To power supply FP X side 5 pin terminal SD _S _ SendData so R Receive Data RO Notused Terminal seting pr lt Using AFPX COM4 gt Combination of 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C type To other device GT series side FP X side 5 pin terminal Transmission line Receive Data RD
188. 412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net MEWTOCOL slave function e This function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC e The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Master Le Fa ai Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave f m V uf V V V V a pe s ae a as a ci i General purpose serial communication e With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader e Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP X while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers Image checker FP X Data register DT Data transmission using F159 MTRN CS TT Data received in receive buffer Pare sink Data is sent to and received from external devices thruogh the data registers Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
189. 71 pay Bana air 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No z Ja DT90060 s tep ladder process 15 11 7 3 0 Process No DT90072 192 to 207 1 Executing 0 Not executing Step ladder process DT90073 208 to 223 A programming tool software can be used to write data DT90074 Step ladder process 224 to 239 Step ladder process 240 to 255 Step ladder process eee 256 to 271 Step ladder process PARS 272 to 287 Step ladder process edie 288 to 303 DT90079 Step ladder process DT90075 304 to 319 Step ladder process cua 320 to 335 Step ladder process AA 336 to 351 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available sted Read Writ maaosan enim Pa Step ladder process cae 352 to 367 Step ladder process 213909 368 to 383 DT90084 Step ladder process 384 to 399 Step ladder process 400 to 415 Step ladder process DT90086 D79086 416 to 431 Indicates the startup condition of the step Step ladder process ladder process When the process starts up DT90087 432 to 447 the bit corresponding to the process number Step ladder process turns on DT90088 448 to 463 Step ladder process Monitor using binary display DT90089 464 to 479 lt E le gt DT90090 Step ladder process xample 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No 480 to 495 DT90090 Step ladder process 15 11 7 3 0 Process No 496 to 511 1 Executing 0 N
190. 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Communication setting Description Cs Defaut A Communication protocol of AFPX COM5 TCP p Select TCP or UDP select Communicati Communication mode of AFPX COM5 i i DRE Computer link on mode Select Computer link or General communication Connection mode of AFPX COM5 ion ode Select Client mode or Server mode E ete care When selecting Computer link for Communication mode Client mode cannot be selected Baud tate Baud rate for communicating with the COM1 port of FP X Note3 Change the baud rate according to the baud rate for the COM Senate COM1 port of FP X p Select 9600 bps or 115200 bps Transmi It is valid when selecting UDP in the communication protocol ssi Method for transmitting data to partner devices UNICAST m S e Select UNICAST or BROADCAST ource port Port number that AFPX COM5 opens N Setting range 1025 to 32767 If AFPX COM5 not communicate with a destination device during this setting time seconds in the state that connection is Time out established connection will be cut Setting range 0 to 1800 s When O is set the connection will S not be cut IP i Set an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 _ port No Setting range 1025 to 32767 O Soure pbr Source port number of a destination device No j Setting range 0 1025 to 32767 When 0 is set optional m on thod lf AFPX COM5 not communicate w
191. 8 3 2 FP X Analog Output Cassette Product No AFPX DA2 No of output points Voltage Current Output range Digital value KO to K4000 Resolution 1 4000 12 bits Conversion speed 1 ms 1 channel Total accuracy Output impedance Output max current Output allowable load resistance Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Between each channel of analog output terminals Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Note1 When the digital value exceeds the upper and lower limits D A conversion will not be performed Note2 Following time is required to reflect the output of the control unit in the analog output Insulation K4000 KO Waiting for Conversion WY 10 refresh time O to 1 ms to 2 ms wa scan time Analog output Ai Terminal layout CHO CH1 CHO Voltage output a p 1 Current output COMO I Current output COM1 Channe 0 NC V1 11 COM1 Channel 1 Voltage output Connection method With voltage output 0 to 10V Analog device With current output 0 to 20 mA V A l Analog device COM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 mA to 20 mA output Conversion characteristics graph mA 20 lt Output signal range 1000 2000 3000 4000 K lt Digital input value Table of D A converted values When e
192. 8 digit password can be selected 3 With FP 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH ceed eS it ie Data l Data compare instructions instructions 16 bit ST Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 data compare Start 3 S189 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 a 7 _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 ST gt ST lt gt bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 r Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 E EL bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 ney Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact f 8182 5 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact AND pf 81825 serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact fF 5452 5 serially by comparing two 16
193. 90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net be Key Point High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Tr type 15 12 11 B De e A e The area DT90052 for writing channels and DT90052 trol codes is allocated as shown in the left l control codes is allocated as shown in the le figure Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special it al ai data register DT90380 to DT90383 ee Note The output counting value of the elapsed Near home input 0 OFF 1 ON value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the pulse output is stopped by the Continue stop of pulse output After the Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit pulse output stops execute the home return Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Note Software reset O No 1 Yest Pulse output control code monitor area High speed counter Control code monitor area Channel No FP X Ry type FP X Tr type DT90372 DT90380 DT90373 DT90381 ch2 Ss E DT90382 e DT90383 Reference lt 9 2 1 Table of specifications gt for information on the special data register Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control e Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special dat
194. 9063 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Pos Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in R9064 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PLC R9065 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PLC link mode Poss Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in R9066 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in BLE nae PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode transmission Sr l Pos ASSANE Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in R9068 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in R9069 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in R906A PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in R906B PC PLC
195. 94 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 10 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication Ethernet The supplement is described below to conduct Ethernet communication by the general purpose serial communication a Reference lt 4 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication gt Overview e Data can be sent and received between the FP X and an external device using Ethernet e Data is read from and written to an external device connected to Ethernet by means of FP X data registers and the programs are required for the FP X FP X IE gt Send data olen OS Pip iF a L Si azez lt oie lg See ae External vei Receive data device Outline of operation e Connection with an external device is established using the general purpose serial communication Ethernet Number of connection is one e Select either the client mode or server mode e In case of the client mode connection is established by the AFPX COM5 for a predetermined IP address after turning on the power supply of the FP X e There are Send data and Receive data for the data transfer with an external device Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting for using the general purpose serial communication Ethernet The following two settings for the FP X and communication cassette AFPX CO
196. 94 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Connection to the computer lt 1 1 communication gt Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FP X and a computer an RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer FP X lt Using AFPX COM1 gt 1 channel RS232C type Computer side FP X side D SUB 9 pin 5 pin terminal RD Receive Data RS Request to Send f PES Clear to Send lt Using AFPX COM2 gt 2channel RS232C type Computer side FP X side D SUB 9 pin 5 pin terminal Send Data 1 Send Data 2 Cc L SG Signal Ground To other device lt Using AFPX COM3 RS422 setting gt 1 channel RS485 RS422 type Computer side FP X side Converter 5 pin terminal Note There are several names for the signal names of RS422 Confirm with the instruction manuals for each devices lt Using AFPX COM4 gt Combination of 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS422 type To other device FP X side pin terminal 5 Transmission ine LRO Receive Data RD Computer side SUB 9 lt Using AFPX COM5 gt Combination of Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C type Computer side D SUB 9 pin FP X side 5 pin terminal Paname Signal name Abore AD Receive Daia RD Phone 800 894 0
197. 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the tool port Click on v and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps No 420 Starting address for data received in general purpose communication mode No 421 Buffer capacity setting for data received in general purpose communication mode To use general purpose serial communication the receive buffer must be specified To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 420 and the volume number of words using no 421 The receive buffer layout is shown below Receive buffer Starting area specified a The number of in system register No received bytes 420 is stored here The number of words Received data specified in system storage area register No 421 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 USB Port 6 3 1 Functions of USB Port With the USB port the FP X offers one communication mode as below Computer link e Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received e A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC There are two different communication methods 1 1 and 1 N communication A 1 N net
198. A to 20 mA Conversion characteristics graph A D converted value t gt 0 T T Tr 5 10 15 20 mA lt Analog input range Table of A D converted values a Ye When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 mA or less Negative value 4000 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net DC input 0 V to 10 V Conversion characteristics graph K 4000 lt A D converted value t gt M 0 T 7 T 2 4 6 8 10V lt Analog input range gt Table of A D converted values Input voltage V A D converted value When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 V or less Negative value 4000 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net DC input 0 V to 5 V Conversion characteristics graph 4 A D converted value gt 0 T T T T t 1 2 3 4 5 V lt 4 Analog input range gt Table of A D converted values Input voltage V A D converted value When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 V or less Negative value OO 4000 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No ia a mes Cassette mounting part 1 Slot 0 Slot 1 Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them
199. Action on Error Time Link 0 0 Link 0 1 Usage settings 1 for CPU input Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output If No 26 Stop when an operation eror occurs Special input Special inputs Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Fort Nod Alarm Battery Error COM1 Part COM Fort i No 23 Stop when an lO verhication error occurs Cancel Head Pl Initialize Help Example1 When allowing duplicated output Turn off the check box for No 20 When operation is resumed it will not be handled as an error Example2 When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 Troubleshooting 13 2 1 If ERROR LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG mode the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box
200. Appa Target value 2 2000 pulses aa Frequency 3 5000 Hz Target value 3 5000 pulses Frequency 4 1000 Hz Target value 4 2000 pulses Pulse output stop setting KU Pulse output diagram Frequency speed Hz 5000 2500 Elapsed value of high speed 1000 counter 01000 3000 8000 10000 Amount of travel Execution condition R10 R911C R911D Note When the execution condition R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R911C R911D goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10000 and pulse output stops R911C R911D goes off Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 Control code lt H constant gt E Upper word H DOOOOOOOO 0 Fixed Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz E Operation mode 0 Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute Specifies the target value absolute value E Output method CW Incremental counting CCW Decremental counting Pulse and direction forward off Incremental counting Pulse and direction reverse on Decremental counting Pulse and direction forward on Incrementa counting Pulse and direction reverse off Decremental counting 2 Freqency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5Hzto9 8kHz
201. Between Versions of Controller Restriction on using the Add on cassette Programming Tool Restrictions 1 Features Functions and ReStrictions ccsccssseeseeseessceseeeeeensenseneeeens 1 1 1 1 Features and Functions of the UNnit ccecceeseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceseeeneeeneeenseoeseeeneseneeees 1 2 EZ UnU PY DES su scocccn sho acoct conch iaaa aaa aaa aA 1 6 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations ccccccceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeceneeceneeeeneeeeneneenenes 1 10 14 Programming MOONS aisin ees aaeei EAER ERE REREN 1 14 2 Specifications and Functions of Control Unit s saasnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 1 2 1 Pans ANG PUNCHONS oiicesice stich ct iwasbchcieche uses bets aaa a Dea aA aE sttchicaiebetisblabairdysudvaeuvetiene 2 2 2 2 POWEF SUPDIY SpecificatlONS tsistsisiabshassbn sninn ta niaaa naaa aaan a aaa a Naaa Kaaa ANENE 2 5 2 9 INPUT SPECI CATIONS skisis haehaa buhahaha taha aaia a n dcteticuctic ccicucctestcuasicvesisnecicvewebaseuavdueunwcades 2 6 2 4 OULDUT SPECHICATIONS sssssississatubnbnanbsba tsansa ian an aea ranean aaa Aaaa a Aaa Naaa aaa a NANEN NA 2 8 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points cccceeeeee 2 11 2 ae E LAV OUL E E E E T E E E 2 20 3 Expansion Cassette and Expansion FPO Adapter Specifications 3 1 3T EXDaMSIOMIMGUNOG wriin aae aeda aapi aiara a oara raaraa riaa 3 2 3 2 FPX Expansion WAM eiciecsssccsncetacelacccasecesecusucusecasbcasecasncacncaanca
202. Between analog output terminal and internal digital circuit part Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Between analog output terminal and analog input terminal Transformer insulation Isolation IC insulation Insulation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Terminal layout CHO Voltage input IN OUT 1 Current input CHo CH1 Voltage input os CH1 v I V i cosa v I cw Current input AAV CO ACG Common for input Input range selection SEL 0 to 10 Vor 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA VO 10 V1 I1COM V I COM a Voltage output _ Current output Common for output Note The CHO and CH1 will be the same range according to switching of the SEL terminal However the inputs of 0 to 5 V and 0 to 20 mA can be used at the same time depending on the connection Connection method With voltage input 0 to 10V Analog device al V B SEL COM With voltage input 0 to 5V With current input 0 to 20 mA el rh al _ p C SEL Short circuit the SEL Short circuit the SEL and COM terminals and COM terminals With voltage output 0 to 10V With current output 0 to 20 mA V V x X j Iz device l 3 CX Jani evi Sen COM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net DC input 0 m
203. C C60PD Number of 32 points per common which are 1 simulta 12 neously on 4255 Ambient temperature C Configuration DA2 A21 B A21 A21 DA2 DA2 DA2 A21 Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 3 3740 45 55 Ambient temperature C Upto 2 channels can be used for the current neously on j output 48 55 Ambient temperature C C60P Number of points per 28 common which are simulta neously on i0 404245 55 Ambient temperature C C14PD Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 37 40 49 55 Ambient temperature C C30PD Number of points per 14 common 44 which are simulta neously on 4951 55 Ambient temperature C C60PD Number of points per 28 common i r which are 7p 22 22 2 1 A simula neously on 10 42 55 Ambient temperature C 2 5 9 Transistor Tr Type PNP With AFPX DA2 and A21 Voltage Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14P AFPX C30P AFPX C60P AFPX C14PD AFPX C30PD AFPX C60PD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Number of points per common wh
204. Cancel is executed in the setting for PLC password the setting for the upload protection will be also cancelled cS Note When cancelling this setting forcibly All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading Keeping your programs is your responsibility Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following three functions of the FP memory loader AFP8670 AFP86 71 can be set through the FP X The setting will be effective when it is transferred to another FP X after the upload to the FP memory loader from the set FP X Setting conditions FP X V2 5 or later FP memory loader V2 0 or later FPWIN GR V2 8 or later 8 digit password is set 11 4 1 Download Protection Setting to Previous Versions Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 This is a function to disable the download from the FP X V2 5 or later to the FP X older than V2 5 for enhanced security When setting the download to be enabled the download can be performed regardless of the version of FP X however the limited distribution and upload protection settings cannot be used 11 4 2 Limited Distribution Function Allow the download in case of s
205. Click Tool Port Dialog box of PLC system register setting ELG Gontteuration Untitlel Hold on hold 1 Hold Non hald 2 Wo410 Unit No 1 No413 Communication Format Action an Error A No4i2 Comm Mode Char Bit E Bits General Communication Parity Odd ha Usage settings for CPU input der Ne Stop Bit l1 Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Terminator CR kai Special input Head CTH not epist Special inputs eader rot exist x Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Baudrate 9600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input 3 Starting address for data received of 4098 mo Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Baar ea ied pe aerate EE DT D 32764 Buffer capacity setting for data received of 2048 COMI Port serial data communication mode ee Software filter settings 4 of CPU input COM Part Cancel id PLI Initialize Help No 412 Communication Mode Select the tool port operation mode Click on Y and select General Communication No 413 Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits a ee Odd SOP Bil cexeevcsssteneee 1 bit Terminator CR Header 008 STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is
206. D R21 R21 61 k pF Fi DMV KO DT 8 Fi DMV K10000 prio F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 R91IC R2i RF R22 82 DF i R2 R22 L DF FI DMV K10000 DT8 Fi DMV K 10000 DT10 SLI LILI F175 SPSH DT 0 KO J R911C R22 RF 3 112 DF R911D R23 R23 121 k DF FI DMV KO DT8 Fi DMV KO brio 4 F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 ROIIC R23 R2F 142 DF R911D X i so FO MV H108 DT90052 FO MV H100 DT90052 FO MV H1108 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 171 T Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Home return operation Minus direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and CCW output Y3 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins In CHO when X6 turns on deceleration begins and when X4 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0 In CH1 when X7 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0 When the operations in both CHs is completed the return to home completes 0 V 24 V DC a AL Home return start Pulse output CW ee eee 2 EE Home input Pulse output CCW E l Bao N
207. DE ATA ATAPI controllers 5 gt Keyboards D Mice and other pointing devices Monitors B Network adapters EY Ports COM amp LPT Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers HoA EAE E E Reference lt 6 3 7 Confirming COM Ports gt 2 Double click Ports COM amp LPT As the table of allocation of COM ports confirm the COM port No CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller COM_n is the allocated COM port COMS is allocated in the following display Device Manager File Action View Help Here e aea na A MATSUSHI 5SOP919 Computer See Disk drives 2 Display adapters 4 DYDICD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives IDE ATAJATAPI controllers gt Keyboards D Mice and other pointing devices Monitors E Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT F Communications Port COM1 a Communications Port COM2 F F ECP Printer Port LPT1 Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers g Key Point COM port No is necessary for the connection with the FPWIN GR etc IEF Note When CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller in Other devices or Unknown device is indicated the installation has been failed Reinstall the USB driver amp Reference lt 6 3 9 Reinstallation of USB Driver gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web ww
208. DMV H1100 DT100 Pulses are generated from output Y100 at an initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms and a movement amount of 10000 pulses F1 DMV K500 DT102 F1 DMV K5000 DT104 F1 DMV K10000 DT108 When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below F1 DMV K300 DT106 F1 DMV KO DTO e F171 SPDH DT100 KO Positioning data table Control code H1100 OTIA Initialspeed SOO Hz BTiog Max speed 5000 Hz DT106 Acceleration 3 DT107 deceleration time 900 ms si Target value 4 10000 pulse R Pulse stop KO Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses With 30 steps Af 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz At 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60 steps Af 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz At 300 ms 60 steps 5 ms i l l l At lt oe Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration time For specifying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms No of steps x 1000 Initial speed fO Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
209. DT32764 Battery backu Memory that is set as hold area at system register However only when an j optional battery has been installed Battery life Note8 When AFPX MRTC is not installed C14 3 3 years or more C30 C60 2 7 years or more C14 2 1 years or more C30 C60 1 8 years or more Note More than 2 batteries can be installed In that case the battery life is the value multiplied by the No of batteries When AFPX MRTC is installed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Note1 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer Note3 This is the specifications when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC at 25 C The frequency will decrease depending on voltage temperature or usage condition Note4 The maximum frequency varies depending on the use Noted Precision of realtime clock At 0 C less than 119 seconds per month At 25 C less than 51 seconds per month At 55 C less than 148 seconds per month Note6 Writing is available up to 10000 times When the optional battery is used all areas can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers Note If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 w
210. Ethernet General purpose serial Computer link p p i communication IEEE802 3u 10BASE T 100BASE TX Max 3 connections Server Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Communication n Interface RS232C RS422 RS485 item Specifications Eaa RS422 isolated Notet 2 Communication mode a soad 1 N communication Communication method Half duplex communication wo wire half duplex communication Synchronous method Start stop synchronous system Transmission line Multicore shielded line Shielded twisted pair cable or VCTF Max 1200 m Max 1200 m Baud rate 9 to be set by system register Note8 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 5 7600 115200 bps Computer link ASCIl JIS7 JIS8 mission l ae ASCII JIS7 JIS8 Binary ee serial communication E format to be set by system register STX No STX Note4 CR CR LF None ETX Max 99 units No of connected units gt 7 2 units max 32 units when C NET adapter is connected Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below For baud rate
211. Expansion FPO adapter FPO power supply cable Length 1m AFP0581 FPO mounting plate Used for expansion FPO slim type a adapter and FPO Expansion AFP0803 ad unit 10 pcs pack Note The total length of the expansion cable should be within 160 cm Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 3 1 Restrictions on FP X Expansion Unit OTlMHMAMMC Beoeso Banton unit Exeanaltn unit Expansion unit Up to 6 units can be connected Controllable I O points i Number of I O points when Number of I O points when using 8 units of E30 in ntrol uni i using control unit expansion I O unit FP X C14 Control unit 14 points Max 254 points FP X C30 Control unit 30 points Max 270 points FP X C60 Control unit 60 points Max 300 points Ei note Up to eight units of FP X can be connected however the restrictions on each expansion unit vary For AFPX E16 E14 Two units cannot be connected consecutively since the power should be supplied from the unit with the power supply as no power supply is built in AFPX E16 E16 expansion I O unit cannot be connected on the right side of the control unit or AFPX E30 For AFPX E30 There is no restriction on AFPX E30 so that up to 8 units can be connected consecutively The total length of the expansion cable should be within 16
212. F H45 E byte DT204 H48 H H47 G Receive buffer when reception is completed Sample program for receiving data 10 byte data received in the receive buffer through COM1 port are copied to DTO R9038 eee ane ane Oe dF f Reception done detection The internal relay R10 is turned on when the R10 _eception done contact R9038 turns on FioBkMv D201 01204 oto Retrievingreceiveddata Foo The received data in the receive buffer is read from the area in which it is A stored DT201 and sent to DTO J The contents of the four words from DT201 to DT204 R10 Preparing to receive the next data F159 MTRN DT 100 Starting from DT100 To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instructon resets the buffer writing point KO and turns off the reception done contact R9038 The data in the receive buffer is not cleared ee ee Ge Ge Ge Ge Ge ee The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 The data sent from external devices is stored in the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 R9048 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 R9048 The system is now ready to receive the next data
213. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Checking and changing the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool port COM port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP X ress value Ce Starting number setting for 1008 0 to 1024 These
214. J J J 7 Scaling of real number S1 S2 D Floating point FSORT S1 S2 type data sort PFSORT S3 FSCAL S1 S2 PFSCAL D data 7 7 J 7 J When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 3 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D Searches the maximum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Searches the minimum value in the real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 The total value and the mean value of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 2 The real number data from the area specified by S1 to S2 are stored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order t
215. LE 7 IOLL F D H 7 See weer Ta aT oI 8 OTs or 0 0 Tr wow PAD ae PROG Y L Applicable special data register Symbol Potentiometer No Special data register Range of values Control unit DT90040 Volume Droo hae Volume 1 DT90041 PEPP DT90042 m DT90043 12 4 2 Example Showing How to Use Analog Potentiometer The FP X is provided with special data registers in which the values in the registers change in response to the analog potentiometers being moved If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting value area a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer Example Writing of the clock setting value The value of the special data register DT90040 that corresponds to the analog potentiometer VO is sent to the setting value area SVO of TMXO to set the time for the clock R9010 H Fo MV DT 90040 SVO Data transmission instruction The value of special data register DT90040 i sentto the setting value area RO Tiii 0 SVO Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 5 Sampling Trace Function 12 5 1 Overview The FP X control unit Ver2 0 and later versions support the sampling trace function Using this function enables to take samplings and record accumulate the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing and to exami
216. M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is 3 digits put 2 spaces and if it is 4 digits no space is needed Note The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems e The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs e The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link e f short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 6 Communication Function 4 MODBUS RTU Communication 7 6 1 MODBUS RTU Communication Function overview e The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP X and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit e Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions e Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped e The communication cassette can be used About MODBUS RTU e
217. M5 should be set Communication environment of FP X Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Setting communication environment of FP X The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1 port Select Option PLC Configuration in the menu bar and click COM1 Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 1 7 No 413 Communication Format Action on Error On n Time No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits zl pe ne General Communication M Parity Odd M Pulse 1 0 cassette settings HSC PLS Stop Bit 1 Controller input settings HSC vr Interrupt pulse catch settings Terminator ICR a v Interrupt edge settings Head STX not exist Time constant setting 1 of CPU input eader NOt Exist xl Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No 45 Baudrate 9600 bps x Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input No 416 Starting address for data received of DT J 0 32764 serial data communication mode Tool Port No 41 Buffer capacity setting for data received of 2048 0 2048 COM2 Port serial data communication mode Cancel Initialize Help COM1 port setting AFPX COM5 No Setting item dS ettingvalue Parity check Odd _ _ S Communication format Note1 Set the baud rate to match the baud rate COM1 port of the AFPX COM5 Setting Ethernet commun
218. MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO X3 HDF FO Mv H110 DT90052 T FO MV H 100 DT90052 In these programs the near home input is enabled in step 1 and O0 is entered just after In case of CH1 that in step 2 to perform the preset operations DF H FO MV H1110 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 2 Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output In case of CHO XT HDF H Fo MV H108 DT90052 The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting FO MV H100 DT90052 value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs In case of CH1 i LDF FO MV H1108 DT90052 FO MV H1100 DT90052 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 Key Point High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Ry type 15 12 U 8 T 43 0 e The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data register DT90372 and DT90373 Note The output counting value of the elapsed Near home input 0 OFF 1 ON value area may be
219. No of points No of points iki ih ll a percommon 4 per common which are which are simultaneou on simultaneou on 43 D5 50 55 Ambient temperature C Ambient temperature C Circuit diagram 21 6 to 26 4V DC Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 8 FP X I O Cassette Product No AFPX IN4T3 Input specifications po Description Rated input voltage 24 V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated input current Approx 3 5 mA Input points per common 4 points common Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 mA Input impedance Approx 6 8 KQ Response time tmsorless o Operating mode indicator LED display Output specifications po y o Description O O Output type Openoollector NPN O oS Rated load voltage 24VDC SSS Max load current O J0O3A Output points per common Spointsicommon SSS O Responsetme ven _ 0 4 msorless on gt off 0 8msorless o Operating mode indicator LED display _ oS O LED indication Terminal layout LED indication A 9 f ae l COM XO X1 X2 X3 COM YO Y1 Y2 IN4T3 Terminal layout Oo mee eeaece com OE Input XO X1 X2 X3COM YO Y1 Y2 Output Circuit diagram 68kQ ixn Ap my A Load 115 3 amp E J o 21 6 to i 13 24 6 to E gt 6200 264VDC S 26 4V DC E i i E i TOM
220. OB instruction F257 P257 SCMP S1 These instructions compare two specified character strings and op NO oO strings output the judgment results to a special internal relay F258 S1 These instructions couple one P258 coupling S2 D character string with another a ae Number of LEN S D These instructions determine the ofo e characters in a number of characters in a character O O O 0O 0 character string string F260 Search for SSRC S1 The specified character is searched P260 character string Retrieving data from character strings right side Retrieving data from character strings left side Retrieving a character string from a character string S2 D ina character string S1 These instructions retrieve a S2 D specified number of characters from the right side of the character string RIGHT LEFT S1 S2 D These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified position in the character string These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten NN N ior N Q 0 z F264 MIDW P264 oh Writing a character string to a character string Replacing chara
221. OCOL master via COM port Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D n Stores the self diagnostic error number n k100 n in DT9000 turns R9000 on and to K299 turns on the ERROR LED F149 Message Displays the character constant of S in P149 display the connected programming tool Q Available Not available A Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later and FP e 3 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type 4 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later S O J Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope mes A Boolean p Description A rand intelligent unit PREAD n D intelligent unit l 8 ey eee F151 Data write into WRT S1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent e aS F152 Data read from RMRD ST S2 Reads the data from the slave station remote I O slave station Data write into RMWT 1 S2 Writes the data into the intelligent MEWNET F PRMWT n D unit at the MEWNET F remote x x D slave station I O slave station ag S ge isi ff f P155 PSMPL i 5 4 Sampling STRG in the trigger of this ee EE EE t
222. OFF and deviation counter clear 27 Type home return Direction output ON and deviation counter clear 30 Type Il home return CW 31 Type Il home return CCW 32 Type ll home return Direction output OFF 33 Type ll home return Direction output ON 34 Type Il home return CW and deviation counter clear 35 Type Il home return CCW and deviation counter clear 36 Type Il home return Direction output OFF and deviation counter clear 37 Type ll home return Direction output ON and deviation counter clear 2 Speed Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range O 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 KHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto100kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHZ approx 3 KHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHZ approx 0 8 kHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range Initial speed Set 30 KHz or less 3 Acceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant gt With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify in 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify in 60 steps 5 4 Deviation counter clear signal ms lt K constant gt Output time of deviation counter clear signal is specified 0 5 ms to 100 ms KO to K100 Set value and error 0 5 ms or less Specify KO when not using or when specifying 0 5 ms Deviation counter clear si
223. OG mode In this case data can be transferred in both cases when the master memory cassette is installed and it is not installed ROM to RAM transfer function All points of the contents of the F ROM data area stored in the internal ROM are read to the operation memory DT This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode In this case data can be transferred in both cases when the master memory cassette is installed and it is not installed Internal memory to Master memory transfer function The program information such as ladder programs system registers F ROM data comments and passwords stored in the internal ROM is transferred to the master memory The upload disabled information is specified using the programming tool software It is selectable to transfer the F ROM data area and comments with the programming software or not When transferring the F ROM data area specify the block number that starts transferring and the number of blocks This function is only available by using the programming tool software in the PROG mode When data is transferred to the master memory the data not to be transferred will be erased Master memory to Internal memory transfer function The information stored in the master memory is transferred to the internal ROM when the PROG mode is changed to the RUN mode when the power supply is turned on in the RUN mode or when the transfer instruction is executed by then pr
224. PLS 1 PLS Near home input 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Clear Pulse output control DT90052 flag PLS Count 0 Enable 1 Disable PLS Software reset 0 No 1 Yes FP X Tr type 15 12 43210 ELE E TET ETT TT Channel setting PLS 0 to 3 CHO to CH3 PLS 1 PLS Near home input 0 Disable 1 Enable PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Clear PLS Count 0 Enable 1 Disable PLS Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available Address Neme Descripion in ing Ing ing Hour and minute data of the Real Time Clock are stored here This data is read only data It cannot be overwritten DT90053 Realtime Clock Higher byte Lower byte monitor hour minute ote Fa Hour data Minute data HOO to H23 HOO to H59 The year month day hour minute second near lime Clock and day of the week data for the Real Time DT90054 setting Clock is stored The built in Real Time Clock minute second will operate correctly through the year 2099 and supports leap years The Real Time Clock can be set by writing a value using a DT90055 nee NME LOCK programming tool software or a program that setting day hour uses the FO MV instruction see example for DT90058 Real Ti Clock Higher byte Lower byte Tim pT90056 oe 0 foe CT setting year month
225. PLS X100 X101 X200 X201 n 2fn 3 n 4 4 2 1 e Count Individual input mode only for pulse I O cassette Incremental decremental input mode AFPX PLS ON xo F LE LE LA LL LE LL__ cfe X200 ON X101 OFF X201 Count o 1 2 2 Ja 2 e f efefe e Le mle mle Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing ot Direction discrimination only for pulse I O cassette X100 pe X200 ON X101 X201 OFF Decreasing Increasing o Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Count for reset input only for pulse I O cassette Incremental input mode X100 or X101 N F F ON ga OFF X200 or X201 X102 D i X202 ebel e fal E E EE count is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 10 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required lt Single phase gt lt Two phase gt T n n Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 3 4 I O Allocation e As shown in the table of specifications the
226. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FP X Users Manual ARCT1F409E 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dism
227. Slot 0 Slot 1 Cassette mounting part 1 Cassette mounting part 2 100 to X19F X200 to X29F 100 to Y19F 200 to Y29F Control unit XO to X9F WX0 to WX9 YO to YOF WYO to WY9 aaa mounting part T X400 to X19F WX10 toWX19 Y100 to Y19F WY10 to WY19 ane mounting part 2 200 to X29F WX20 to WX29 Y200 to Y29F WY20 to WY29 Expansion 1st unit X300 to X39F WX30 to WX39 Y300 to Y39F WY30 to WY39 Expansion 2nd unit X400 to X49F WX40 to WX49 Y400 to Y49F WY40 to WY49 Expansion 3rd unit X500 to X59F WX50 to WX59 Y500 to Y59F WY50 to WY59 Expansion 5th unit X700 to X79F WX70 to WX79 Y700 to Y79F WY70 to WY79 Expansion 6th unit X800 to X89F WX80 to WX89 Y800 to Y89F WY80 to WY89 Expansion 4th unit X600 to X69F WX60 to WX69 Y600 to Y69F WY60 to WY69 Expansion 7th unit X900 to X99F WX90 to WX99 Y900 to Y99F WY90 to WY99 Expansion 8th unit X1000 to X109F Y1000 to Y109F j WX100 to WX109 WY100 to WY109 Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the cassettes and units Regarding I O number e Specifying X and Y numbers On the FP X and the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example on The same numbers are used for input and output e Expression of numbers for input output relays Input relay X and output relay Y are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below Decimal 12 3 9 He
228. Sp em el HoA Positioning done pulse 0 5 s R102 a o a l l Ol Ol Ol 1s type timer Setting K5 and using it as a 0 5 s timer Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry type Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input Operation start ae Encoder A Inverter Inverter operation Operation Stop Inverter high speed Fast Slow COM Operation chart I O allocation om Speed R101 _ Positioning operation start vo R102 __ Arrival at deceleration point R103 _ Positioning done pulse vf R9110 _ High speed counter CHO control flag Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops KS R9110 R103 R100 D e a a a a I oF Positioning operations running R100 OO R100 R101 eee et ee ee eee fs eee oe HDF _ Positioning operations start shy a or as of high m 7 K LFi omv Ko DT90300 t counter CHO j J aa Se encased eet a eet Geil ee juices eat eee F167 HCIR KO K 50
229. T procedure error frames 50 unkeetingeror nter by celgaing ne raremesienaiaton Link setting error l l aa l number 2y designating the dansinizsl28 Aallon ie aa a time ou error buffer is congested an Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link error unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple frame Busy error processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 160 Parameter error Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error i i designation size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that cannot be processed was executed during RUN PC mode error ee Link system error Link system error Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when P
230. T523 Y axis CH n number of 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off acceleration deceleration step 10 Absolute cwecw 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward offireverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Composite speed Initial speed Max speed Hz lt K constant gt 1 5 Hz to 100 kHz K1 to K100000 However 1 5 Hz is for an angle of 0 deg or 90 deg only Also specify K1 when specifying 1 5 Hz If the component speed drops lower than the minimum speed for each frequency range then the speed will become the corrected component speed so be careful See 26 When simultaneously using a high speed counter periodical interrupt or PLC link do no set to 60 kHz or higher If initial speed is set equal to maximum speed pulses will be output with no acceleration deceleration Composite speed Initial speed 30 kHz or less Specify composite speed to make the component speed of each axis become1 5 Hz or higher Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 Acceleration Deceleration time ms lt K constant gt KO to K32767 If this is 0 pulses will be output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration 4 Target value Movement amount K 8388608 to K8388607 Infinite feeding is not available When operating only one axis a In incremental mode set the target v
231. TX not exist for the header and None for the terminator in the general purpose serial communication enables the binary communication Sending data Sends the data of bytes to be specified Receiving data Check the No of bytes received before the process At that time the reception done flag does not work Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sending data to external devices Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the COM port Data Data register DT Data transmission using writing _ F159 MTRN External device Data table for transmission send buffer PK When transmission begins K8 DT100 When transmission ends KO i Reduces one by one at every transmission DT102 H44 D H43 C i Data is transmitted in order DT103 H46 F HASCE from the low order byte Binary data can be transmitted DT104 H48 H H47 G Data table before transmission Sample program for sending data The following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH Hex to an external device using COM port RO R10 a es HDF 1 Data transmission command The intemal relay R10 is turned on when the Rio transmission condition RO tums on H F95 ASC
232. The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them e There are ASCII mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP X is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible gt ENTZ Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave S Pa Master _ KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Master Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net MODBUS RTU command message frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRCCHECK END 3 5 character time 16 bits 3 5 character time ADDRESS Unit No 8 bits O to 99 decimal Note1 0 Broadcast address Note2 Slave unit No is 1 to 99 decimal Note3 For MODBUS 0 to 247 decimal FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Varies depending on commands CRC 16 bits END 3 5 character time Differs depending on baud rate Refer to reception judgement time Response in normal status The same message as a comman
233. The unit number of the PLC that sent the response Command message Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out successfully The type of command The unit number of the PLC to which the command is being sent The type of command Any settings and data required in order to execute the command Vv The command and data are sent to the PLC with the specified unit number processed If the command was used to read data the data that was read If an error occurred and the command could not be processed success fully the content of the erro Vv A response is returned and processed by the computer e g the computer retrieves the data that was sent Response message Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Format of command and response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before sending the command MHeader 2 Unit no of destination 01 to 99 decimal 3 Text Content depends on type of command Check code BCC hexadecimal 5 Terminator Two One digit digit opo Target that reads the value internal relay R1 Specified item S specifies that only 1 point should be read Command name e g read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command 1 Header start code Commands
234. This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will be stored in the DT9017 DT90017 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self
235. Time No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit E Bits gt a ae General Communication Parity Odd l Usage settings 1 for CPU input Stop Bit 1 v Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Terminator CR l Special input pe STX not exist Special input2 eader not exist Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Baudrate 3600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input Software filter settings 3 of CPU input Starting address for data received of DT 0 0 32764 Software filter settings 4 of CPU input ai data ee ne Tool Port uffer capacity setting for data received o 2048 48 io serial data communication mode 0 2048 Cancel f Initialize Help COM2 Port No 412 Communication Mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on Ral and select General Communication No 413 for COM1 port No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits PONY see cetcdseuseeetes Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header 008 STX not exist Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to the COM port No 415 Baud rate communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on Y and select one of the values f
236. V3 S3 DO oe or P191 data move PDMV3 S3 DO Sa o ges ny 3 gt D 5 D 4 Logic operation instructions 32 bit data DAND 1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 AND PDAND D a P216 OR PDOR F217 32 bit data DXOR z S2 S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 D 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR S2 gt D 1 D P218 Double word PM 3 0 S1 1 S1 AND S3 1 S3 OR 32 bit data S3 DO S2 1 S2 AND S3 1 unites gt D 1 D Data conversion instructions Time data gt TMSEC The specified time data a date Pa second Loud all and time is changed to the second conversion data ot Second The specified second data is data time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time O Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e only 2 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later 5 This instruction is available for FPX 32k type 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Boolean 16 bit binary GRY data gt Gray PGRY code conversion 32 bit binary data gt Gray Ope Description
237. WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD255 is used Main flag Link area Second half 1 WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD225 First half o WLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 3 Monitoring When using a PC PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays For PC PLC link 0 R9060 to R906F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9080 to R908F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data Punto 12 s slel7lele o nl elal ul Conditions ON When the PLC link is normal for on off OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PLC link is not used Operation mode relays For PC PLC link 0 R9070 to R907F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9090 to R9O9F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC me 2 s1 slel7lele o n elvlulolo Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off ON When the unit is in the PROG mode PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission wto 1 2 374 sjel7 sis ola 2 i 4 5 16 ON When a tra
238. Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes Click Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for CP210x USB Composite Device Click Finish to close the wizard 6 After that the PC recognizes the USB COM conversion driver automatically As the next message is shown select No not this time and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue Note This display is not be shown with Windows XP SP1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 The next message is shown Select Install the software automatically and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for CP210x USB to UART Bridge Controller C If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy
239. YT P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO FPO E8YR Expansion unit FPO E16X Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E16R Input 8 points X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 FPO E16T P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO E16YT P Output 16 points Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E32T P Output 16 points Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points WX30 WX32 WX34 CHO X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO A21 FPO analog I O unit CH1 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F WY30 WY32 WY34 conversion unit FPO TC4 CHO 2 4 6 X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F couple unit CH1 3 5 7 X310 to X31F X330 to X33F X350 to X35F Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 RTD unit CH1 3 5 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F gt WY2 WY4 WYG X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F conversion unit FPO A04I CHO 2 Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F CH1 3 Y310 to Y31F Y330 to Y33F Y350 to Y35F FPO FPO IOL Input 32 points X300 to X31F X320 to X33F X340 to X35F I O link unit Output 32 points Y300 to Y31F Y320 to Y33F Y340 to Y35F e The data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 FRO RTD unit FPO RTD6 and FPO D A conversion unit FPO A04V
240. a is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 Home return e When executing the F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X102 or X202 is enabled e To decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off gt on gt off e The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed JOG operation e Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state Also the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched e The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Precautions on programming Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to
241. a copy of it at the beginning of the program e When the control flag for a channel turns on another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 2 3 Booting Time The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output Booting time Approx 200 us with 30 steps Approx 400 us with 60 steps Approx 500 ps with 30 steps Approx 700 ps with 60 steps Type of instruction Pulse output instruction F171 SPDH Trapezoidal control home return Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH JOG operation Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH Data table control PWM output instruction F173 PWMH CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set Approx 20 us Approx 320 ps Approx Approx Approx 30 us Note If pulse direction is set a waiting time approx 300 us is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 3 High speed Counter Function 9 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function e The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value
242. a register DT90348 e The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90348 and DT90349 e Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value Kf Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output DF F1 DMV K3000 DT90348 CHO Reading the elapsed value X8 Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output DF F1 DMV DT90348 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 FP X Tr type Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output chO to ch3 Pulse output Channel No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area chO R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351 ch1 R911D DT90352 to DT90353 DT90354 to DT90355 ch2 R911E DT90356 to DT90357 DT90358 to DT90359 ch3 R911F DT90360 to DT90361 DT90362 to DT90363 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 5 Wiring for Pulse Output Sample Program F171 to F174 Wiring example FP X Tr type Input terminal Positioning start Positioning start Home return start Overrunning Home sensor Near home sensor JOG start gt z b contact a contact a contact b contact JOG start Stepping motor Moving table side 7 T side Bg un A rm Stepping motor driver CVV input Common COW input Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler
243. a table headed by OT200 is usec and pulses are output from CH2 The data table headed by DT200 is used R911D R50 TO R52 oonan Hor Positioning done pulse 1 second R52 TMX 0 K10 O1stypetimer 00 os Setting K10 and using it as a 1 s timer X200 e emer eee pe DF ro MV H1110 DT 90052 F Near home deceleration start Fo mv H 1100 DT 90052 Pulse output diagram Near home sensor Home sensor xa ON x200 ON x202 ON 1000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz _ me fad 150 ms 150 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 8 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG operation e This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on X3 F1 DMV H1110 DT300_ J F1 DMV K300 DT302 F172 PLSH DT300 KO Data table DT300 4 DT301 Control code H 1110 D1302 9 i DT303 Frequency 300 Hz Pulse output diagram The pulse of 300 Hz is output from Y100 during X3 is turned on When this program runs the data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below X3 JOG ON i command OFF 100 Pulse 1 Control code lt H constant gt _0 Fixed ET arget value setting 0 Mode with no target value 1 Target value match stop mode OHz HOOOOOUOOO0 1 Mi Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4
244. able as long as execution condition is on Data table Pulse output diagram X6 JOG ON idee Control code gt H 1110 ea OFF DT302 DT303 Frequency 300 Hz oe e YO Pulse OHZ Output stops when target value is reached A target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation As shown below this mode is selected in the control code and the target value an absolute value is specified in the data table Data table Pulse output diagram T NF rr S Target value K 1000 YO Pulse es A Target value matching Pulse stopping Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program JOG operation Plus direction While X6 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CW output YO of the specified channel CHO Program Data table X6 H DF H F1 DMV H1110 DT300 Control code H 1110 F1 DMV K300 DT302 Frequency speed 300 Hz Control code H1110 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to100 kHz Incremental counting CW X6 ss ee ee ee H F172 PLSH DT 300 KO f Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT300 is used The data table headed by DT300 is used __and pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output from CHO X3 east Gal eae eal Se Oe ees eee AA LDF Fo mv H108 DT 90052 r 4 Overrun process Pulse output stop pulse output sto
245. after the change in settings The information is notified by the data area write command WD of 10 words from the information area first number with MEW TOCOL For the memory area DT is fixed For the unit number EE is fixed Using this notification enables the completion of the initialization of Ethernet to be confirmed in a ladder program and to start communication When using the general purpose communication start the communication after receiving the data area write command for the network information notification and after the response timeout time PON __ AFPX COM5 g 3 o EEFWDD1000010009 Y Se FP X main unit Sample program Set DT10000 in the network information notification area fi Oan iP address is checked by the network infonmation notification when the power tums on fff l gt DT 10000 KO 4 DT 10000 K 266 Ril LI 3 i Namal start up j1 ff Enor occurs when the beginning of address is over 255 Iii gt DT 10000 H FF RIO Error occurrence gt DT 10000 H FF TI lt DT 10000 H 1FF R11 f7 DHCP get error gt DT 10000 H IFF lt DT 10000 H2FF Ri 28 LI L IP duplicate error Network information confirmation When selecting the computer link and client setting the network information can be confirmed from the FP X by enabling the network information confirmation setting It can be confirmed by reading the confirmation area by the MEWTOCOL data area read c
246. ail info ctiautomation net 2 Frequency Hz K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5Hzto9 6 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 0 8 kHz In case of count mode set the frequency to 30 kHz or less for executing instructions at the first time However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set fo a maximum of K20000 Hz 3 Target value Absolute value This is used when setting the target value match stop mode Absolute only Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will be different than the designated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode Output method Range of target values which can be designated Incremental counting Designate a value larger than the current value Decremental counting Designate a value smaller than the current value 3 Key Point The FP X supports two operation modes for JOG operation one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging operation feed no target value specified Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data t
247. al input Input terminal 1 Not used Input terminal 2 Aa l ri es Q Q 2 OO Q Q Q e e Q J 6 io m ae ae COM X1 X3 X5 X7 X9 XB XD XF NC JICOMICOM X11 X13 X15 X17 X19 X1B X1D X1F COM COM COM X10 X12 X14 X16 X18 X1A_X1C_ XIE XA XC XE o Y18 c6 Y1B Y1D ERREA ys ys c4 yB YD Hy By Ogee e Ope gs sur Not used used Output terminal 1 Output terminal 2 Relation between output terminals and COM YO CO Y10 CO Y1 C1 Y 11 _ _ C1 Y2 to Y5 C2 Y 12 C2 Y6 to Y9 C3 Y13 C3 YA to YD C4 Y14 to Y15 C4 Y16 to Y19 C5 Y1A to Y1D C6 g Key Point Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit However the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated They are not connected internally Output terminal Each COM port CO C1 is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 6 2 Transistor type AFPX C14T AC power supply terminal input Input terminal yi v3 ys NC yo y2 yaj nc Power supply for YO to Y5 Service power Output terminal Not used AFPX C14P AC power supply terminal input Input terminal T O _ com X5 X7 L N
248. alue for the axis which will be not be operated b In absolute mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value Infinite feeding is not available during the linear interpolation control x5 Component speed Initial speed and max speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type X axis com composite speed x X axis movement amount ponentepssa X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount Y axis com composite speed x Y axis movement amount ponent speed x axis movement amount Y axis movement amount Composite speed Initial speed Set to 30kHz or less Example Even if the initial speed is corrected see 2X6 the calculation value will be stored as is in the operation result storage area x6 Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz Range 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz Range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz a If maximum speed S 9800 Hz If initial speed lt 1 5 Hz initial speed is corrected to 1 5 Hz and range 0 is selected If initial speed 1 5 Hz range 0 is selected b If 9800 Hz lt maximum speed S 100000 Hz If initial speed lt 48 Hz initial speed is corrected to 48 Hz and range 0 is selected If 48 Hz S initial speed lt 191 Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 191 Hz range 2 is selected 7 Number of acceleration deceleration ste
249. ame Description R9100 to ee HSC CHO CHO oo R9113 roma E econ R9115 Turns off when the F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R HSC CH6 J Conto THSC CH instructions are completed R9118 flag HSC CH8 HSC CH9 R91A_ HSC CHA R911B HSC CHB 2 R911C_ PLS CHO R9110 PLS CH1 Turns on while the pulses are being output by the F171 PROVE PLS CH2 03 SPDH F172 PLSH F173 PWMH and F174 SPOH PLS CH3 No instructions Note1 This relay is available for the FP X Ry type only Note2 This relay is available for the FP X Tr type only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP X FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing Self diagnostic error The self diagnostic error code is stored here DT90000 code when a self diagnostic error occurs N A DT90001 Notused When an error occurs at the I O board for the application cassette the bit corresponding to Position of abnormal the board will be set on DT90002 I O board for iS 4 7 3 21 OBitNo application cassette SS ees e 2 1 Expansion No on 1 error off 0 normal DT90003 Not used _ _ J e o DT90004 Notused Je o DT90005 Not used J o lt gt Z lt gt Z gt lt gt lt gt Z gt z gt When an error occurs at the intelligent board for the application cassette the bit Position of a
250. ame password When downloading a program from the memory loader the program can be downloaded only when the program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled FP memory loader if f li J Program Password 01234567 EN E Limited distribution function ON re f e n e Download is possible X X Download is not possible y A 4 align ai 5A Ph F 1m i a P Gc amp A T atte al F tis a ths re We Hin H F y x op L Password 01234567 Password abcdefgh Password None pai a Ma pi h ACS ner Note This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP X older than V2 5 has not been made Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 3 Upload Protection Setting Function Set that PLC cannot be uploaded If this function is valid the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader FP memory loader i N Program A Password 01234567 A Upload protection function ON j a Downloading programs gt P ai ge s ae 7 git Poa 7 e F eh eis ss a i3 ee A Ss h in m 5 a r a a Ma r a a A a p Upload is prohibited FP memory loader ACS ner Note This function cannot be used when the se
251. ance and the same length Note2 Do not place the input signal line close to an AC power line or high voltage line Also do not bundle it with them Note3 Use shielded wires for the input signal line It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding Noter4 Do not connect one RTD to other equipment in parallel input RTD input range Conversion characteristics graph K 20000 8650 aeenesen sen ssesscesad t Converted value 21504 7 4 230 419 865 900 C lt Input value Table of converted values Input value C Converted value 2000 O 850 8500 When exceeding the rated range Reference values which accuracy is not assured are indicated up to 15 C Note When exceeding the maximum minimum value exceeding the rated range the converted values will be the values as mentioned above However if the temperature drops below 230 C or rise over 900 C more the data will be the same value 20000 as the one at the time of disconnection IES Note About RTD input range From the Power on to the converted data Ready approx 3 seconds the digital value will be K20001 Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs From the disconnection or exceeding the rated range digital value K20000 to the recovery and converted data Rea
252. and CH6 can be used When two phase input is specified for CHO CH2 CH4 and CH6 the settings for CH1 CH3 CH5 and CH7 corresponding to each CH No are ignored however specify the same setting for those channels Note2 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 403 and 404 Note3 If system register 400 to 404 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch gt Interrupt input lt Example gt When the high speed counter is being used in the addition input mode even if input XO is specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and XO functions as counter input for the high speed counter Note4 Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2 6 or higher version if the No of I O allocation is indicated with 1 digit number such as XO in the setting window No 403 404 and 406 of FPWIN GR Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Add Default nat item AE name SRE aon Unit No setting 1 to 99 Communication Computer link Computer link Baie mode setting General purpose communications Selectiomolimedem Ispisabled Enabled Disabled connection Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Data length SEEE bit 8 bits
253. and HOOA8 K168 isi n DT10002 0x00 reserve Own IP address 3 DT10001 DT10003 0x00 reserve Own IP address 4 When de stination po rt No is 9094 Explanation DT10004 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 1 deri aaa enomnedconnnmned in i nd DT10005 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 2 _ When the v ersion of AFPX COMS5is DT10006 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 3 1 10 H1100 is notified confirmed DT10007 0x00 reserve Destination IP address 4 Note T he de stination P a ddress and DT10008 Destination port No CESUNANON PONNE 0E ane notified confirmed only when selecting DT10009 Version of AFPX COM5 the computer link and client setting Note1 Error code 0 Normal 1 DHCP acquisition error 2 IP address duplicate error Connection information confirmation area No Higher bytes Lower bytes Destination IP address 1 Destination IP address 3 Destination IP address 4 Own IP address 1 DT10017 Own IP address 4 DT10018 Ox0000 reserve DT10019 Version of AFPX COM5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Network information notification If the network information notification setting is enabled the AFPX COM5 notifies the network information to the FP X on completion of the initialization of Ethernet Ethernet is initialized after the power turns on and when the unit is restarted
254. ansformer insulation Terminal screw M3 20 000 h at 55 C Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 3 Input Specifications 2 3 1 Relay Ry Type Input Specifications For C14R C30R C60R control units Insulation method Optical coupler Rated input voltage 24V DC 21 6 to 26 4V DC Approx 4 7 mA for control units XO to X7 Approx 4 3 mA from control unit X8 8 points common C14R 16 points common C30R C60R Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4V DC 1 mA Approx 5 1 kQ for control units XO to X7 Approx 5 6 kQ from control unit X8 For control units X0 to X7 0 6 ms or less normal input 50 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt off on Note Response time input settings From control unit X8 0 6 ms or less Operating mode indicator LED display EN61131 2 Applicable type TYPE3 however according to the above specifications Note this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 C Input points per common Input impedance Circuit diagram Af Internal circuit For X0 to X7 R1 5 1 kO R2 3 kQ From X8 R1 5 6 kQ R2 1 kQ COM Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points sar A Reference lt 2
255. ant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 Period ms 25 0 k 31 3k 41 7k 0 02 However f ort he medium speed c hannel CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it is not possible to specify from K21 to k24 12 5 k Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 specification of duty Specify using K constant If the control code is KO to K19 the duty is KO to K999 0 0 to 99 9 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 0 to 99 Values are specified in units of 1 K10 digits behind the decimal point are rounded off Note e If a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 10 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions For Ry Type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 1 Overview of Each Functions Describes the functions of the relay type Ry type FP X control unit 10 1 1 Usable Units and Cassettes 1 The pulse input can be counted using the inputs XO to X7 of the main unit Single phase 8 channels 2 phase 4 channels 2 The pulse input can be cou
256. antle or remodel the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Ground the protective earth PE terminal Class D grounding Failure to do so could lead to an electric shock Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction Such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Electric Works SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd and Xerox Corp All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_FPX Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of Contents Before You Start Differences in Functions
257. any other equipment that would generate high switching surges Min 100mm or less Static electricity Before touching the unit always touch a grounded piece of metal in order to discharge static electricity In dry locations excessive static electricity can cause problems Measures regarding heat discharge e Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat Upside down Horizontal installation Installation getting of PLC main unit the DIN rail upright e Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters transformers or large scale resistors Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation space e Leave at least 50mm of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm or more OLARMAAACT BESO i g 50 mm or more rs e Maintain at least 100mm of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 100 mm or more al Panel door PLC unit Other device e Leave at least 100mm of space open from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail Can
258. arallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the olo olo comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in _ pb S 82 5 r S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 or S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Floating point type real number data compare Start Floating point type real number data compare AND Floating point type real number data compare OR G p 81 82 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the ANF i pf 1 82 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 2 ANF lt a pene pts t4 4 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 F 31 52 a ae FC gt 51 82 aE F 51 82 ail Gab ee LET 51 52 m Fe 1 52 FPO FP e Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 eL bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 ee S2 1 S27 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition
259. at starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc O Available Not available A Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used channels 2 This instruction is available for FPX C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPZ DA O A A AA A AA E k ke eee a e a e a a a a ad info ctiautomation net FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPX Boolean ORS Description rand Screen display instructions F180 FP e screen SCR 1 S2 Register the screen displayed on display S3 S4 the FP e 4 x x x x x registration F181 FP e screen S Specify the screen to be displayed ball e e eee E switching Basic function instruction eee e ro a Lo S S L constant S3 DO the specified input processing F183 Auxiliary DSTM Turn on the specified output and ro ee e e ET Pele 0 01 s x set value Data transfer instructions EEA PPP eee P190 data move PM
260. ation net Wiring method 1 Remove a portion of the wire s insulation ince T mm 2 Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Tightening torque 0 22 to 0 25 Name Precautions on wiring e When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire e Do not twist the wires to connect them e Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration e After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire e In the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire e f two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 mm Clockwise Counter clockwise Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 8 1 Transmission Cables Please use the following cables for systems using the communication cassette Appropriate electrical cables ae cables Conductor Sample Cross sectional Resist Cable 5 l Thick i appropriate view ance BR diam abie at 20 C Belden 9207 Shielded Shield Hitachi Cable A FA A 0 5 mm Polye Max Approx twisted con A Ine Ltd KPEV ductor
261. attery error flag hold Operation error flag each non hold Constant scan error flag Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR901 FP X Address Name Description mos Initial on type pulse Goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has relay been started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans oa Initial off type pulse Goes off for only the first scan after operation RUN has R9014 been started and goes on for the second and subsequent relay scans eee e isto relay on type the step ladder control R9016 Notused e R9017 Notused e R ions in O JUL R9018 0 01 s clock pulse relay ie Operations MOH 0 01 s R ff i in 0 L R9019 0 02 s clock pulse relay epeats on off operations in 0 02 s cycles pop gt i i R901A 0 1 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s cycles MoT i i R901B 0 2 s clock pulse relay Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s cycles KEFY Repeats on off operations in 1 s Em R901 1 lock pul l EEN Repeats on off operations in 2 s LJ R901D 2 s clock pul l Repeats on off operations in 1 min 1 min clock pulse relay eycles i 1 min Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR902 FP X Address Name s Description _ _ _ Turns off while the m
262. atus of the password PLC Home setting Current status Password is nat set coe Specify the type of the password to be used aia retry counts 3 counts Face ane Specify an operation mode a T He Access Accesses programs by inputting a 8 digits alphanumeric Match case password Operation Mode Protect Sets a password 3 i Unprotect Releases the password setting Input a password Optional setting for FP memory loader C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric peacoat Use the FP X V2 5 or later and FPWIN GR Setting for FP memory loader option V2 8 or later and set it to download to the FP V Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 memory loader Ver2 0 or later Confirmation the contents of the password setting Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box Current status Indicates the current status of the password setting There are following five statuses 1 Password is not set Password is not set 2 4 digits Protect Password is 4 digit password and access is prohibited 3 4 digits Available to access Password is 4 digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 4 8 digits Protect Password is 8 digit password and access is prohibited 5 8 digits Available to access Password is 8 digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs
263. b www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 2 1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port AFPX COM3 AFPX COM4 SYS1 instruction is available for FP X which enables to change the time after receiving a command until a response is returned With the converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd in the RS485 communication adjust the response time by this instruction if necessary SYS1 instruction This is to delay a response for n scan time to be specified t SYS1 M COM1 WAITn n 0 999 Example RO 10 pF H sysi iM COMI WAIT2 a First second S keyword keyword Input all 12 letters after M including comma aligning to the right Exmapel M uuCOM1 WAIT2 123456 789101112 When RO turns on the response of COM1 port RS485 port delays for two scans If the scan time is 500us it delays for 1 ms Reference lt FP series Programming manual ARCT1F313E gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 3 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 3 1 Computer Link Overview Computer FP X Command message fee gt gt M Response message k Computer link e The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and external devices connected A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for communicating with the computer link MEWTOCOL COM is also used for the communication between the tool
264. be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal method fi il il 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever te 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Installation with screws Use M4 size screws for the installation ge Reference For the information on the installation dimensions lt 13 1 4 Dimension Diagram for Installation Installation and removal of the expansion FPO adapter FPO expansion unit Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail Can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal method 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail a6 aA Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate When using the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 for mounting FPO Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and
265. bient temperature C C14TD No restriction C30TD Number of 16 points per 15 common which are simulta neously on 52 55 Ambient temperature C C60TD Number of 32 points per common which are 18 simulta neously on 44 25 Ambient temperature C Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Configuration Stand alone COM5 C14T Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 3 51 55 Ambient temperature C C30T Number of points per 14 common neously on aa 55 Ambient temperature C C60T Number of points per 28 common which are simulta 14 neously on i 4042 55 Ambient temperature C C14TD No restriction C30TD common which are 49 simulta neously on 52 55 Ambient temperature C C60TD Number of points per 28 common which are 16 simulta neously on 44 Ambient temperature C 2 5 5 Transistor Tr Type NPN With AFPX DA2 and A21 Current Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14T AFPX C30T AFPX C60T AFPX C14TD AFPX C30TD AFPX C60TD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiau
266. bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note1 The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Note2 The terminal units of the AFPX COM3 AFPX COM4 and AFPX COM6 are specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette Note3 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings There is no need to change this for 1 1 communication but if 1 N communication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line e g in a C NET the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified The unit number is specified by using the system register Unit No a Commercially available conversion adapter Computer RS232C The command is sent specifying the destination with the unit number The PLC to which the response is sent is identified with the unit number Setting unit numbers with the system register A unit number between 1 and 99 can be set with the system register To set unit numbers with the FPWIN GR programming software Select Options
267. ble DER File Edit View Help 2 UnitNo 2 192 168 1 12 Enabled Enabled 3 Unit No 3 192168 1 13 Enabled Enabled UnitNo 4 192 168 1 14 15 Enabled Enabled 5 6 Hy Ready Set Network Table No 4 Host Name IP Address i 92168 1 14 Send Timeout f 5 sec Port No 9094 Select Port 10B SE T C AUI Memory Protect M Internal Memory Memory Gard Memory M Default Gateway Bao M Sub Net Mask baoo 7 Cancel ff Reference For the details of the settings for the GV lt GV42 GV52 GV62 Terminal GVWIN Additional Specifications gt lt GV series Communication Unit Manual Ethernet gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of FP X 1 FP X System register setting No 412 Computer link mode 2 Setting of AFPX COM5 Setting value Communication protocol TCP Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout JO UDP IP can be used for the communication method In that case change the setting for PLC Type Setting of the GV to FP series Ethernet UDP IP Set the communication protocol of the AFP COM5 to UDP and set the send type to UNICAST Note For the Ethernet communication with the GV the computer link is used The GV is the master and the FP X is the slave It cannot be used if setting the FP X as the master Note that the unit numbers for the GV and FP X are not duplicated Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ct
268. ble downloading to the old version on the FP X Ver 2 50 or later Note5 When transferring data from FP memory loader to PLC program data cannot be transferred by Ver 2 or later however only the Upload protection setting is effective Status of PLC that program has been downloaded downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader the password that has been already set on the unit may be changed Note the followings 8 digit password setting l I a Limited distribution setting Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting The password will not change Limited distribution setting On The program itself will not be downloaded Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 5 Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Set PLO Password Untitlel PLC Home Current status Password ts not set Available retry counts 3 counts digit number f 4 digits Hex fe 6 digits alphanumerc Match case Operation Mode 0 Access f Protect f Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric CEZEZEEI Setting for FF memory loader option M Allow the download to old
269. block Suitable wires M3 terminal screws are used for the terminal The following suitable solderless terminals are recommended for the wiring to the terminals F ork type terminal Round type terminal 6 mm or less 6mm or less 3 2 mm or more 3 2 mm or more Suitable solderless terminals Shae PartNo Suitable wires mm esme L as aasma JST Mfg Co Ltd yP Round type 2 MS3 Fork type 2 N3A 1 04 to 2 63 Suitable wires Suitable wires Tightening torque AWG22 to 14 0 3 to 2 0 mm The tightening torque should be 0 5 to 0 6 Ne m Connection to the terminal block When using the round type terminal remove the terminal cover The same character is printed on the terminal cover and terminal block to match After checking the characters fit the terminal cover Note Install the terminal block cover as it was after wiring to prevent electric shock Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net How to remove the terminal block The terminal blocks used for C30 C60 E30 can be removed for fitting the screws The terminal block for C14 E16 cannot be removed Removal slacken the mounting screws in 2 positions The terminal block will be floated gradually and removed As the mounting screws are fixed at the terminal block they are not come off even after the terminal block was removed from the main unit Mounting screws 2
270. bnormal corresponding to the board will be set on preeue a cara peices PP 15 11 7 3 2 1 O Bit No a 2 1 Expansion No on 1 error off 0 normal DT90007 Notused DT90008 Notused Communication error Stores the error contents when using COM2 DT90009 flag for COM2 port When the state of installation of FP X expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to i i the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary DT90010 Extension I O verify pers error unit pray 15 11 765432 1 O BitNo a eee ee 7654321 O UnitNo on 1 error off 0 normal N A aie gt gt Ziz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing ing ais the state of installation of an FP X add on cassette has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No DT90011 Add on cassette will turn on Monitor using binary display A N A verify error unit 15 1 7 3 21 0 BitNo Lo a o o oo 2 1 Expansion No on 1 error off 0 normal One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit Operation auxiliary positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction DT90014 register for data shift F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The Instruction value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT90015 DT90015 whe
271. can be used to measure the block time N A Z gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing The current scan time is stored here Scan Scan time current time is calculated using the formula DT90022 value Not Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 A N A ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan Scan time minimum time is calculated using the formula DT90023 value N Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 A N A ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maximum scan time is stored here The Sean time maximum scan time is calculated using the formula DT90024 value t Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 A N A ms Example K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the ataciceonditlon Instruction can be stored here Monitor using monitoring register eiary QISp AY PIES for interrupts a eE Lo H a A SA INTO to 13 13 11 7 0 INT No 0 Interrupt disabled i 1 Interrupt enabled pr90026 Notused J CNA NA Periodical interrint The value set by ICTL instruction is stored DT90027 interval INT24 p KO periodical interrupt is not used A N A K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s KO Sampling by the SMPL instruction DT90028 Sample trace interval K1 to K3000 x 10 ms 10 ms to 30 s DT90029 Notused l S O DT90030 DT9
272. carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions F410 Setting the SETB n Index register 10 to ID bank P410 index register PSETB number change over bank number Changing the CHGB n Index register 10 to ID bank index register PCHGB number change over with bank number remembering preceding bank number F412 Restoring the POPB Changes index register 10 to ID P412 index register PPOPB bank number back to the bank bank number inl before F411 CHGB P41 1 PCHGB instruction File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file SBFL n File register bank number change register bank pee 7 over number Ey Changing the File register bank number change file register PCBFL over with remembering preceding bank number bank number F416 Restoring the PBFL Changes file register bank P416 file register PPBFL number back to the bank before baal bank number F415 CBFL P415 PCBFL instruction Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later only 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is not available for FP10SH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in th
273. carry out the editing operation again After the operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds Gommunication Settine i Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The transfer data screen will open Select Condition to E a open Communication Setting screen Cancel Change the value for Timeout eee 15200 BE bes Iniiaize Click OK button to complete the change of setting Network type twill be set as the following value automatically Data Length 8 Stop Bit 1 f Even f D Time out 5 SEC Parameter for automatic setting W Baud rate T W Parity Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1 When the result of rewriting is a syntax error lt Example gt When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions 1 Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE 2 Subroutine instructions SUB RET 3 Interrupt instructions INT IRET 4 JP LBL 5 LOOP LBL 6 MC MCE Also rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors 2 During the forced input output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt high speed coun
274. cassette and secure the two positions top left and bottom right of the communication cassette which the ribs were cut with the screws AFPX COM5 has no rib Install it after the wiring of the application cassette The screw s tightening torque should be 0 3 to 0 5 N m Screw securely Communication cassette Application cassette Communication cassette Ha T Application cassette lt lt lt J inni Remove the cover gt Secured at 2 positions A ih Sl Fa A ee FAE he fpr i Call if 4 Set it i i al ea a Cut ribs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 4 2 Installing Application Cassette IEF Note The application cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 and 2 of the control unit Installation on the control unit Connect the connector on the back of the application cassette and the connector of the cassette mounting part of the control unit and secure the two positions bottom left and top right with the screws The screw s tightening torque should be 0 3 to 0 5 N m Screw securely d A 4 gt Secured at 2 positions 5 4 3 Precautions on Installation Do not touch the back side of the add on cassette and the connector The parts such as IC etc may be damaged by static electricity 5 4 4 State When Add on Cassette is Installed Communication cassette
275. cassette LED does not light the CS signal is not on 3 If the three wire type is used connect the RS signal and the CS signal of the communication cassette and turn the CS signal on Note For COM1 only Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap Procedure 4 When the RS232C is either one of the followings check if COM cassette is selected for Port selection 1 When controlling the 1 channel type RS232C with 5 wire type 2 When using the COM2 port with the 2 channel type RS232C 3 When using the COM2 port with the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C 4 When using the COM2 port with the Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C Procedure 5 Check that the baud rate is set to 9600 bps 19200 bps or 115200 bps for the COM2 port of the 2 channel type RS485 The settings of the system register and the cassette backside switch should be the same P ls Example lt Chapter 7 Communication Cassette gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 9 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS422 Condition No communication with 1 channel type RS232C RS422 cassette AFPX COM3 Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been correctly connected Procedure 2 Check if the transmission cables are within the specification
276. ccurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in R9082 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in R9083 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode os Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in R9084 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PLC R9085 link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PLC link mode Poss Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in R9086 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in sera te PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode transmission Sr l Pos ASSANE Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in R9088 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in R9089 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when
277. coctcehtesttcbetick hte oh ccd enh tech eked nde indi ened scndecseesd 5 25 510 Safety MC ASUNCS xiscasecececccccten tieec2xettecceasseeseneeadaccadacccadecadadesatecedztccadetadzteipessnatanateuayes 5 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 Tool Port and USB Port ccccccscscceeecncececscscecenencecececececeneaceeeaseeeeneneaeess 6 1 6 1 TOO Port and USB POM iiien atest aint en delve nied Eae 6 2 6 2 FUNCTIONS OF TOO POM cidecscccsc cece ccec sess soc sees sees caiacs nuaran aa aaa aoia case cacecsdacednecniensxenavexers 6 3 oie VSB ade gd mana naan err rece nC ere err trcrentr rrr rrr rrer rer Trrrrreerrrrrrrrererr er trier rr errr errr rerr reer eccr 6 6 7 Communication Cassette casiswccsisccenicncaceneniwaceawes vavenacnecawaeaamcecnsaneceaneawecexes 7 1 TA PUNCTIONS ANA TYDES soci S 7 2 7 2 Communication Specifications ssssssssnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 7 16 7 3 Communication Function 1 Computer LINK ccccesseeeeseeceseeceneeeeeeeeneeseeeesens 7 20 7 4 Communication Function 2 General purpose Serial Communication 7 36 7 5 Communication Function 3 PC PLC Link cece eeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeseneseneeees 7 56 7 6 Communication Function 4 MODBUS RTU Communication ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 75 7 7 Ethernet Communication AFPX COMD ccccccssseeeseeeseeeeeseeseeesee
278. code F1 omv K 500 DT 102 OT 102 initial speed DT itd F1 Dmv 5000 DT 104 Dirias MAK Sees ee Acceleration time Fi DMV K300 DT106 Taig akan Movement amount 10000 pulses F1 DMV K10000 DT 108 Pusa siot Fi DMV KO DT 110 Contotcode HJT 00 14g AG 46 Hz t100 KHZ Incremental CW and OCW F171 SPDH DT 100 KO OO e i table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used i The or table epe DTA oa is used Pulses are output from CHO ne R911C R10 TO R12 D HDF 4 Positioning done pulse 1 second R12 K 10 Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 500 Hz 0 Hz lt Lag 300 ms 300 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Incremental Position Control Operation Minus Direction When X1 turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory Y1 does not turn on off according to the pulse output 0 V 24 V DC ie XT mwe IRT Startinput z side 8000 pulses Program X1 R911C R22 R20 a RA DF a a Positioning operation running J R20 ee R20 R21 SS me flip as Si n DF S 1 t Positioning operation start _J R21 Positioning data table F1 DMV H1100 DT100 DT100 Controlcode H1100 F1 DMV K 1000 DT 102 DT103 Initial speed 1000 Hz DT104 l F1 DMV K 6
279. connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below _ For baud rate 2 115 2 kbps F r baud rate 57 6 kbps Humber of units stations 40 ron 1000 1200 Transmission distance rm When using a baud rate of 300 bps to 38400 bps you can set up to a maximum of 99 units stations and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m Note3 Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Noted The converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side Adjust the response time for the FP X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary Note6 Unit numbers should be registered by the system register Note The termination resistance of the RS485 RS422 in the COM3 COM4 and COM6G is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port Note8 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS instruction only Ver2 0 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Communication specifications 2 Interface Ethernet Pp yom Specifications _ _ Connector shape RJ45 elaine Communication
280. cremental input X200 Incremental input X200 Reset input X202 Decremental input X202 Decremental input X202 Reset input X202 Incremental decremental input X200 X201 Incremental decremental input X200 X201 Reset input X202 Incremental decremental control X200 X201 Incremental decremental control Does not set input X201 as high speed counter Incremental input X201 Incremental input X201 Reset input X202 Decremental input X201 Decremental input X201 Reset input X202 Normal output Y200 Y201 Pulse output Y200 Y201 PWM output Y200 Normal output Y201 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Note1 If the operation mode is set to Two phase incremental decremental or incremental decremental control the setting for CH9 is invalid in system register 400 and the setting for CHB is invalid in system register 401 Note2 If reset input settings overlap the CH9 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CHB setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 CHA CHB and CH1 input signals in system register 401 are the signals when the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS is installed in the cassette mounting part 2 Note4 If the operation mode setting for the pulse output CHO and CH1 is carried out it cannot be used as normal output When the operation mode for the pulse output CHO is set to 1 the reset input sett
281. csqecanesaganagenanecaswanveeieebyen 3 3 3 9 FP X Expansion FPO Adapter ssisssisssissssuusinsususnissn sesu panaan aana akidai aaia akakana 3 11 AVO UOC QUIN osissa a EE 4 1 AA VO AMO CATION essenin saa Eaha aiaa aaa wsnduiss duaticeansandyciudelcuaeebchebesnteadesucuctte 4 2 4 2 Allocation of FP X Control Unit a saannannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 4 3 4 3 FPO Expansi n Unit ANOCAUON ccsiiisvcisecssecicesvceshcusbeisketsbeisebenenseeadetadetadetadetadeteiedsveddans 4 3 4 4 Allocation of FPO Expansion Unit assasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 4 4 4 5 I O Allocation of FP X Add on Cassette cccccssecceseeceeeeceseeeneeceneeeneeeeneesenenseneees 4 6 5 NStalaton and VV IPI scssi 5 1 D1 ANS TAMA OM aa a tabeui ee iebireti shades dnal asia aiaia E 5 2 5 2 Installation Using Expansion Cable ccccssseeeseceeeeeeeeeneseeeseneeenseeeseeeaesenesonseoeeees 5 5 5 3 Expansion Method of FPO Expansion Unit ccccseeeeeeeseeseeeseeenseeseeeneseneeeneeeenens 5 8 5 4 How to Install Add on Cassette sincsticct iil ile hah natiainiiasiaiies 5 9 DD POWEr SUDO IY sisan aaaeaii ea e AAA AA 5 11 5 6 Wiring OL InbuUU and OUIDUT oiiire areira tada ini 5 17 5 7 Wiring Ol Terminal BIOCK sssaaa anaiai aiina 5 20 5 8 Wiring of Add on Cassette Terminal BIOCK ccscecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesensesensesenseseaees 5 22 5 9 Handling of Backup BAlen Vicca ccc
282. ct No AFPX AD2 Specifications No of input points 2 channels cassette Voltage Oto 10 V Input range 0to20mA Digital conversion value KO to K4000 Resolution 1 4000 12 bits Conversion speed 1 ms channel Total accuracy 1 F S or less 0 to 55 C Voltage 40 KQ Input impedance 1250 0 3 to 15 V Absolute max rating gt to 30 MA Input protection Diode Insulation Non isolated between analog part and internal digital circuit part Note1 When the analog input values exceed the upper and lower limits the digital values maintain the upper and lower limit values As the resolution is 12 bits the higher 4 bits of the input contact are always 0 Note2 Following time is required to reflect the analog data in the input of the control unit 10 V OV Conversion Waiting for ppan npu time refresh 1 ms to 2 ms Oto scan time K4000 WX10 w Note3 Averaging cannot be processed with the cassette If averaging is necessary use a ladder program to execute averaging process Terminal layout pa 5 CHO CH1 CHO Voltage input J v OT SAOMV I SLOM I Current input QOODDOOOOD Voltage current select SaaS COM _ Channel Cnc CH1 Voltage input VO I0 SELCOM L Current input Voltage current select Channel 1 V1 l1 SEL COM eNannel 1 COM Common Note There is no LED indication AD2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomati
283. cter strings 35M N is N o is p N starting from a specified position in the character string Available gt x Not available A Not available partially This instruction is available for FP2 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP2 Ver 3 10 or later 3 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later Pe Z O na O O L O Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope ee Boolean p Description rand Integer type data processing instructions F270 Maximum S1 Searches the maximum value in the P270 value word S2 D word data table between the S1 and data 16 bit S2 and stores it in the D The a IL address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 A F271 Maximum DMAX S1 Searches for the maximum value in P271 value double PDMAX S2 D the double word data table between word data 32 the area selected with S1 and S2 bit and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F272 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in P272 word data 16 S2 D the word data table between the area bit selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 F273 Minimum value S1 Searches for the minimum value in P273 do
284. ctiautomation net FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FPX ee O d Description lean peran p BCD arithmetic instructions E re 9 a OOO data addition PB Pan damman pose e z olofofefe e data addition PDB re imam e Peor ehhe data addition PB Pag datwadation pose e OD Ja o ofololo data addition PDB fms act pe Os fell olo subtraction 8 digit BCD data DB D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D Pas sbacion pos re z ofofofofo o Eli poje CE subtraction subtraction PDB oe oes eee ee ee ieee ley oper felefele multiplication mitpesion poB DrD a a D rll multiplication PDB oH division PB a ee 8 digit BCD data DB S1 S2 D S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 quotient division PDB D 1 D Oj Oo Oo remainder DT9016 DT9015 Fad p E increment PB 1 8 digit BCD data DB 1 D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D reremen elelelelele r aremm rex 8 foo lola decrement PB 1 ee ee ee ee 8 digit BCD data D 1 D 1 D 1 D ins decrement PDB 1 Data compare instructions F60 16 bit data CMP 1 S2 gt S2 gt R900A on P60 compare ig Fi on 32 bit data sr ET on compare PDCMP S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on 16 bit data band an S S1 gt S3 gt R900A on compare PWIN S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 gt R900B on S1 lt S2 gt R900C on O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email
285. ction for FPOR High speed S Performs high speed counter counter and Pulse DT90052 and Pulse output controls output controls according to patterns of each cam output MV the control code specified by S Change and read DMV l of the elapsed DT90300 value of high speed counter and Pulse output DT90300 D E according to the elapsed value of counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Controls cam operation on off The control code is stored in Cam control CAMO the high speed counter DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed Target value much HC1S n S D Turns output Yn on when the on with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse output reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S counter control Pulse output control Target value much HC1R n S D Turns output Yn off when the off with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse output reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S counter control Pulse output control Pulse output JOG S n Positioning pulses are output positioning type from the specified channel in 0 1 Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of control the data table that starts with S Pulse output JOG PLSH S n Pulse strings are output from the operation 0 and 1 specifi
286. d counter Channel No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area ch0 ch ch2 ch3 ch4 ch5 ch6 ch7 ch8 ch9 chA chB Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 3 6 Sample program Control Unit and Main Unit I O Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FP X Ry type Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input xO Operation start x5 COM Encoder Output terminal utput termina ierte Inverter operation YO Operation Stop Operation chart I O allocation Main XO Encoderinput unit X5 Operation start signal vO Speed 5000 R00 Positioning operation running MURDU See R101 Positioning operation start 3 R102 Positioning done pulse vt Wee R9110 High speed counter CHO control flag Program When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops X5 R9110 R102 E Positioning operations start ee ee NR FF H Fi omv Ko DT90300 n eee eee ee F1e7HCIRKO K5000_ YO F Target value match off instruction 1 1 YO goes off when elapsed value of high L speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses R101 r r Set the inverter operation signal YO See fms time Semi te eee Soe R9110 R100 E E meme
287. d for the input other than XO to X1F add on cassettes or expansion units by the F182 FILTR instruction e The time constant processing is invalid when the high speed counter pulse catch or interrupt has been specified Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 13 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 1 Self Diagnostic function 13 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition Status indicator LEDs on control unit e The control unit has a self diagnostic function which ERUN mPROG mERR Jit QAQAS identifies errors and stops operation if necessary l e When an error occurs the status of the status indicator Status indicator LED n 200088 LEDs on the control unit vary as shown in the table above po a Ts o oe 3 inate status Operation ERROR Description Pe ALARM on Normal operation PROG mode Light on Off LED does not flash even if the forcing Stop Normal l Hi output is performed in program mode conan Forcing input output in Run mode Flashes RUN and PROG LED Operation alternately Abnormal condition Light on Light on Light System watchdog timer has been l Stop or off or off on activated Status indicator LEDs on expans
288. d instructions can be R9044 l i instruction execution flag executed During executing the instruction On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the COM1 port SEND RECV execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV R9045 neirucionerecutionend instructions for the COM1 port as follows Off No abnormality detected flag On An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90124 R9046 Notused e O Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data R9047 COM2 port communication communication error flag Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction COM2 port R9048 reception done flag during Turn on when the terminator is received during general purpose general purpose serial communication communicating COM2 port Goes on when transmission has been completed in R9049 transmission done flag general purpose serial communication during general purpose Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose communication On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions for the COM2 port as follows Off No abnormality detected On An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90125 e ee O R904F Note R9
289. d is returned for single write command A part of a command message 6 bytes from the beginning is returned for multiple write command Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command except transmission error Slave address unit number Function code 80H One of either 1 2 or 3 Error code CRC Error code contents 1 Function code error 2 Device number error out of range 3 Device quantity error out of range Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received Approx 6 7 ms Approx 3 3 ms Approx 0 3 ms Note The reception done judgment time is an approx 32 bit time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Supported commands 5 yecute s Name MODBUS Remarks instructions for a Name for FP X maste decimal original Reference No F146 RECV F146 RECV Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils Read Input Status Read X Input F146 RECV F146 RECV Read Holding Registers Read DT Read Input Registers Read WL and LD and Rs Words Cannot be issued Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask Cannot be issued Read Write 4X Registers Read Write DT Table for MODBUS reference No and FP X device No MODBUS reference No Data on BUS hexadecimal FP X device No Co
290. d system register RR Reads the contents of a system register RK K C D Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 SC i point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range R RT M AB Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting communication parameters Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 IEF Ca note e As the default of the COM2 port is Internal USB select COM cassette e When the MEWTOCOL master is used also select Computer Link Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Contieuration Untitlel Hold Norn hald 1 Hald Nor hald 2 Nodilo Unit No 1 No 413 Communication Format No412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits Computer Link Parity Odd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Modem Enabled amp Stop Bit 1 Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output Special input Special input Software filter settings 1 of CPU input No4iS Baudrate 3600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input a i i Software filter settings 3 of CPU input y Software filter setting
291. data To prepare to receive the next data the F159 instruction resets the buffer writing 1 point and turns off the reception done L contact R9038 based on the empty data J Buffer statuses The tables below show the statuses of the send and receive buffers when the sample program is run Send buffer Receive buffer K19 Number of bytes to be transmitted Number of I bytes received H30 0 H25 H30 0 H25 Set automatically H23 j H31 1 when the instru H24 5 H31 1 I Ver 2 0 or later TT H30 0 H44 D H36 6 Received data H30 0 H30 0 H30 0 is stored in onder from the H30 0 H30 t0 H38 8 j H43 C lower order byte H30 0 j H30 0 H30 0 H30 0 I H30 0 H30 0 H2A H31 1 Statuses when reception is completed Statuses before transmission H46 F H36 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 Key Point Contents of the response If K100 is stored in DTO and K200 is stored in DT1 of the FP series PLC on the other end 01 RD6400C8006F is returned from the FP series PLC on the other end as the response when the program is executed The received data is stored in the data registers as shown below DT4 DT3 DT2 DT1 DTO Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte H30 H30 H34
292. data is discarded For TCP the connection is disconnected End code when selecting NONE The message data is transmitted to the connected destination Set the area of DT to be used for the network information and Information ate areata No connection information 10000 Setting range 3000 to 12000 NGIWO When the power turns on the network information will be l information a Invalid bee ase notified to the FP X notification NORNDTK When using the computer link and client the network information Invalid i information can be confirmed confirmation MS S Connection i When using the computer link and server the connection information Invalid i information can be confirmed from the LAN side confirmation Destination unit No and A command is transmitted to the IP address corresponding to A l i Invalid IP address is the unit number specified Unit No Select a unit number Invalid l Can be selected from the range of 1 to 99 IP address Set an IP address 192 168 1 100 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 5 Communication Mode 1 Computer Link Ethernet The supplement is described below to perform Ethernet communication by the computer link Overview Computer FP X Command message 7 LEE amm i oni Response message weet tetera MAC PO PODO Ley Sop e Communication is cond
293. data table F284 Inclination S1 Executes the linear output for the P284 output of 16 bit S2 specified time from the specified 10 x data S3 D initial value to the target value 0 Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 When S1 gt S3 S1 gt D P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 When 1 lt S3 S2 gt D i control S3 D When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 S3 D 16 bit data O Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is only available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH rand F286 Upper and DLIMT 1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S1 1 P286 lower limit PDLIMT 3 D 1 gt D 1 D control When S2 1 gt S3 1 S3 S2 1 32 bit data 2 D 1 D When 1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND S1 S2 When S1 gt S3 S3 S1 D P287 control PBAND 3 D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2 gt D 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 OD F288 Deadband DBAND 1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D 3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1
294. de Server mode ja i Baud rate COM1 115200 bps 9600 bps Server Mode A Communication mode Computer link Control unit Communication cassette Baud rate of COM1 9600 bps v Source port No 9094 raii Time out O Source Port No posa 1025 32767 Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the oe a 3 Hoa communication environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP X Client Setting Destination IP Destination Port No 1025 32767 Source Port No 0 1025 32767 Time Out Doo oas D No TimeOut Retry Time 0 1800s Setting of a computer IP address setting Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 2 x tem General IP address 192 168 1 100 N You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports S u b n et mas k 2 55 2 55 2 55 0 this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Obtain an IP address automatically Note The IP address of a computer is an example f Use the following IP address Set the IP addresses of the computer and a aee l communication cassette AFPX COM5 ALA ona 255 255 255 0 according to the network environment to be Default gateway Tanlines E sca use d Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server l Alternate DNS server s Advanced Cancel Phone
295. de that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave e Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 1 Only the slave function is available for the FP X relay type Ver1 20 or former version 2 Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP X transistor type and relay type Ver1 21 or later version however the master function is not available for the TOOL port MEWTOCOL master function Transistor type and relay type Ver1 21 or later version e This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side Othat issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit eco power meter For the MEWTOCOL master function communication is possible with the COM1 and COM2 ports only Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit amp A Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Y Master di era FP e FPE KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit Phone 800 894 0
296. dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please a a Stops contact your dealer AlAIATALAIAIAIA FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or E27 installation Stops Te ink units l AIAITA AI AIA error gt Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual System ee an abnormality in the system n g p gt Check the system register setting or error ee initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available P X Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Configu ration parameter Interrupt error 1 Interrupt error 2 Multi CPU unmatch MEWNET F illegal unit MEWNET F r
297. dians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees F337 Floating point P337 type data degree radian F338 Floating point P338 type data radian degree Floating point type real number data processing instructions Floating point FCMP S1 S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt R900A on type data compare PFCMP S2 S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on 10 x O S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on F346 Floating point FWIN S1 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on P346 type data band 2 compare S PFWIN S2 S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 R900B on O Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later H o Converts real number data specified p 1n o xr Se NANA 09 E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net zem A Description rand Floating point FLIMT S1 S2 type data PFLIMT S3 D upper and lower limit control Floating point FBAND S1 S2 type data PFBAND S3 D dead band control Floating point S1 S2 type data S3 D zone control Floating point FMAX S1 S2 type data PFMAX D maxi mum value S1 S2 D Floating point type data mini mum value type data total and mean values Floating point i
298. different from the input counting value of the motor side if the pulse output is stopped by the Continue stop of pulse output After the Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit pulse output stops execute the home return DT90052 L Channel specification CHO HO CH1 H1 HSC PLS specification 1 PLS Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Note Software reset U No 1 Yest Pulse output control code monitor area Channel No poh T9082 poh 90383 gt fa Reference lt 10 2 1 Table of specifications gt for information on the special data register Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the pulse output control e Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special data register DT90348 e The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90348 and DT90349 e Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 Set the initial value of K3000 in the pulse output DF F1 DMV K3000 DT90348 CHO Reading the elapsed value X8 Reads the elapsed value of the pulse output DF F1 DMV DT90348 DT100 CHO to DT100 and DT101 FP X Ry type Elapsed value and target value areas of pulse output ch0 to ch1 Pulse output Channel No Control flag Elapsed value area Target value area R911C DT90348 to DT90349 DT90350 to DT90351 R911D DT90352 to DT9035
299. dododododddd a TT ol olol ol d o o ol ol ol elol ol ol a ol joo pe 6 r Dee o e comcon xn xis as xz xt xe io aE com xo x2 xa xe xe xa xc xe Al oan De a ae Te Te tea tye PRE dc Tn gs Dsl ve ee eed Yo v2 v4 ye va YA Nc yio viz via vie vis vial yicl NC TITTIE EITI POST SP PPTL OPER ES ETN used Qutput terminal 1 used ear used Oulpul terminal 2 ain used Left Power supply for YO to Y7 Len Power supply for 7 10 to Y17 Right Power supply for Y3 to YD Right Power supply for 718 to Y1D 3 Key Point Input terminal Each COM terminal in the same terminal block is connected within the unit However the COM terminals of the input terminals 1 and 2 for C60 are isolated They are not connected internally Output terminal Each power supply terminal is separate Use them in the range surrounded by the bold black lines Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 3 Expansion Cassette and Expansion FPO Adapter Specifications Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 1 Expansion Method Two types of expansion method are available for the FP X 1 Installs the FP X expansion unit or FPO expansion uni
300. dy approx 3 seconds the digital value will be K20001 Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 6 FP X Input Cassette Product No AFPX IN8 amp Insulation method Rated input voltage 24 V DC 8 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 mA Input impedance Approx 6 8 kQ Response time Operating mode indicator LED display EN61131 2 Applicable type TYPES however according to the above specifications LED indication Terminal layout LED indication oOoOooooa0an 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Terminal layout VOUWVWVVVVUY XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 COM l i M _ 5 l i J2 l D i i ls 21 6 to 26 4V DC C 2 i l 1o S penal l E ee ee a EES ee eS Ss EE E E Se ee es ee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 7 FP X Output Cassette Product No AFPX TR8 Insulation method Output type Rated load voltage Operating load voltage range Max load current Max inrush current Output points per common Off state leakage current On state voltage drop Response time Surge
301. e f there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent 3 Key Point e With the FP X an expansion header lt is supported to send single frames of up to 2048 characters as well as general Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters Max 2048 characters Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer DHeader 2 Unit no of source PLC that processed the command decimal 3 Text Processing results and communication error codes ar estored here Check code BCC Hexadecimal m STerminator R C Two One I digit digit Read value Processing results for contact area read contact is off Command name e g read contact area Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred 1 Header start code A ASCII code H25 or lt ASCII code H3C must be at the beginning of a message The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command The val
302. e FPWIN GR The storage area is composed of 16 blocks 1 block 2048 words that are from the blocks No 0 to No 15 Cannot be selected th Reference For the details on the F12 ICRD and P13 ICWT instructions lt Programming Manual ARCT1F353 gt 12 2 3 Relation between Security Setting and Transmission Status of FP X master memory cassette is installed Security not Uploading 4 digit and 8 digit specified disabled passwords Transmission from the internal A N A A memory to master memory Transmission from the master i A A A memory to internal memory A Available N A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 2 4 Handling of Master Memories Created with Different Models Tr type C14 C60 C60 E25 E25 E25 Installed A Can be installed and operated Can be installed depending on the program capacity E25 Master memory model unmatch error Note1 If the E25 occurs the mode will not be the RUN Also the transfer operation from the master memory to the internal memory of the controller will not be executed The transfer operation from the internal memory of the controller to the master memory can be executed even if the E25 occurs Note2 If the version of the Ry type is older than Ver2 0 the E26 User s ROM error is detected not the E25 Note3 Use the tool software to execute the program conversion between diffe
303. e I O cassette the input of the main unit can be used Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 e Up to two driver systems can be connected lt When using CH0O gt lt When using CH1 gt FP X Ry type AFPX PLS first FP X Ry type AFPX PLS second Home input Home input Near home input Near home input Driver Driver Pulse output Pulse output Direction output Direction output Input such as X100 or X101 on the pulse I O Input such as X200 or X201 on the pulse I O cassette can be specified for the near home cassette can be specified for the near home input input gt a Reference lt 10 2 1 Table of Specifications gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO
304. e high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device The terminal block cover must be used for preventing electric shock 5 10 2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 10 ms the FP X continues to operate If the power is off for 10 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset Although the duration of the power failure for the expansion FPO adapter is 10 ms judge the permissible time as a system after confirming the permissible duration of the power failures for the DC power supply that supplies power to the expansion FPO adapter Supply the power to it from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit When the expansion unit that has a power supply built in E30 expansion FPO adapter depending on the duration of the momentary power failure only one unit may be without electricity momentarily and the I O verify error may occur In that case turn off the power supply and then turn on again 5 10 3 Protection of Output Sections Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fu
305. e in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 14 8 1 Processing when forced input output is initiated during RUN External input X External output lt Y ee d 1 Processing of external input X e Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure B At this time the inout LED will not blink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten e Contacts not specified will read in the on off state according to the condition of the input from the input device 2 Processing of external output Y e Regardless of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram e The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result 3 Processing of Timer T and Counter C e Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced inpu
306. e input terminals e f the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool e f the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again Check 1 Check for the duplicated use of output Check whether the output has been rewritten using the high level instruction 2 Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 5 A Protect Error Message Appears When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the Access radio button Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password and click on the Settings butt
307. e return start Beara Pulse output CW eats vio ER sA TA Home input Pulse output CCW bes JUUL cexooal EEEE Near home input Motor i Home input driver Near home input side side Motor TY cH X202 C x200 side side Motor es 7 mim ALILI CHO X102 7 x100 Home sensor Near home sensor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program XO R9110 R9110 R44 R40 ee ee A DF Positioning operation running R40 Se R40 R41 a e a m BF S _ Positioning operation start J Ral Positioning data table CHO GH1 HFI omv unai orzo J G T202 e ea a Fi omv 2000 oT 204 Fi DMV K 150 DT 206 aa al seer nee Not used Control code 1121 Fi DMV KO DT 208 Doyseges _T 48 He to 00 Kee Home reium COW Pulse output instruction Home return Fi 71 SPDH DT 200 _ KO SSS a The data table headed by 07200 is used and pulses are output fram CHO F1 71 SPDH DT 200 Ki Pulse output instruction Home return g The data table headed by OT200 is used and pulses R9110 R40 R44 R42 Ho p a ee 1 Fo MV H110 DT 90052 le CHO near home deceleration start mi Fo MV H100 DT 9005 a DF b oy 1 gt Fo Mo H1110 DT 90052 CH1 near home deceleration start j Fo mv H1100 DT90052 g Key Point As there
308. e way errors are displayed depending on the model FP FPO FPOR FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit Screen display Continually lit Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected
309. ear home input Motor Home input driver Near home input side side Motor TY cH x5 Al Home sensor Near home sensor side side Motor es 7 mim ALILI CHO X4 X5 Home sensor Near home sensor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program xO R911G 8 RO11D R44 R40 iy ey ae a et er ee Positioning data table CHO CH1 H F1 omv Hunza oT 200 oan Initial speed 200 Hz She eee Eel FI omy K 2000 orz 7 Fi DMY K 150 DT 206 Deviation counter clear input Not used Control code 42121 Fi DMV KO DT 208 Duly 1 4 25 AE Hz to100 KHz Home return OC yy i Pulse output instruction Home return E F1 71 SPDH DT 200 _ KO a l The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses re output from CHO es F1 71 SPDH DT200 KI E 2 ee ee Pulse output instruction Home retur The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses R911C R40 R44 R42 oF CHO home return completes R42 R9110 R40 R44 R43 a g ce E ca is a le _ CH1 home return completes _ R42 R43 R44 ebin ES ats E m HI Home return completes X6 ee ee 1 Fo MV H110 DT 90052 FO MV H 100 DT 90052 xT DF y 1 Fo MY H1110 DT 90052 CH1 near home deceleration start J Fo MV H1100 pT90052 3 Key Point
310. ecovery and converted data Ready approx 3 seconds the digital value will be K20001 Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs Note5 The conversion speed is 200 ms or less regardless of the number of channels to be used And it will be reflected in the internal data register after the completion of a scan Note6 The full scale F S is 200 to 850 C for the accuracy range of RTD Pt100 Note7 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as the table below Installed slot ilar ani Expansion slot 0 Expansion slot 1 Cassette position Cassette position Channel 0 CHO WX10 WX20 Channel 1 CH1 WX11 Note8 Supply power for 15 minutes or more after the power on for performing the accurate measurement before using the cassette Terminal layout Digital conversion value A RTDinutA B RTDin putB B RTDin putB A RTDinutA B RTD B RTD RTD input B RTD input B Do not connect anything NCA B B NC Channel 0 d CA BB Channel 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Connection method Connect each channel as mentioned below After the connection confirm that the polarity and terminal positions are correctly connected CHO CH1 A B B A B B 14 5 JE lt G X Use 3 wire type Lage a Pt100 Pti00 Pti00 Note1 When extending the lead wire of RTD use 3 wires in the same resist
311. ed in D Converts the 32 bit integer data with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the D 1 D F327 P327 floating point type converted data is stored in D data Floating point type DINT data to 32 bit integer PDINT conversion the largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data O Available Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later and FPO V2 1 or later F328 P328 Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign the largest integer not exceeding the floating point data and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email FPX FP2SH FP10SH info ctiautomation net Boolean Description rand FPO FP e o O 23 FPX FP2SH FP10SH FIX PFIX Converts real number data specified Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D DFIX PDFIX KA o Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rou
312. ed output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output with PWMH S n PWM output is output from the channel specified output in accordance specification with the contents of the data table that starts with S Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2SH FP10SH z F174 Pulse output Outputs the pulses from the Selectable data specified channel according to table control peration the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Performs the home return F176 Pulse output SPCH Circular interpolation according to the specified data F177 Pulse output Home return table F178 Input pulse PLSM 1 S2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle of pulses to be input No of pulses to the high speed counter of the cycle for input specified channel pulses ri F175 Pulse output S n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2007 O d Description lean peran p High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPX FP X High speed MV counter and
313. ed simultaneously If the master memory cassette that is prohibited uploading is installed on another FP X the information on the settings will be transferred to the FP X automatically therefore that FP X will be prohibited uploading as well gt a Reference For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette lt 12 2 2 Master Memory Function gt Cancelling the upload protection using the programming tool Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Upload settings under Tool on the menu bar The following displays will be shown Upload settings dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box PLC Home Seer J Current status Password is not set Set that PLC cannot be uploaded k lose Available retry counts 3 counts P Force Cancel digit number 4digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Select Release the upload protection by 5 a com pulsion C Unprotect Click Execute 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option V Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 r Click Force Cancel Note 1 If the setting for the upload protection is cancelled all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted 2 If Force
314. eed the acceleration deceleration interpolation SPSH oma P aia time and the target value EFT Note e With the Tr type the CPU output is used to perform the pulse output function The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used Setting the system register When using the pulse output function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 When performing the home return by F174 SPDH instruction the home input should be specified in the system register No 401 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method lt Forward YO f f F F F CW pulse yo y4 Ye no LLL LUE L CCW pulse yg Y5 7 Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON w Forward Reverse Puse Pasel ya yey FLLI ALLELE Reverse OFF ON Yi Cra YS Y7 Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF Forward x Reverse w TFL LE LLL Pulse Pulse Y2 Y4 Y6 E Rotation nl Y1 ON OFF Rotation aii Sign Y3 YS Y7 Incremental counting Decremental counting IEF a Note Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the sp
315. eed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is OFF Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of rotation with on off signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out when the rotation direction signal is ON The output signals are the number of the built in output of the main unit When the pulse output has been set only the pulse is output and the values of the output memories YO Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 and Y5 are not output So they will not be turned on off even if monitoring with the tool Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Operation mode Incremental lt Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when Pulse output from CW direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Positive Pulse output megane from CCW Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with t
316. egister21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 I O error Sele Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at ctable 1 0 error in the status display function MEW NET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Opera tion Description and steps to take status An abnormality in an intelligent unit FPx FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FPS Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22
317. elays which are on bill be held in the on status To turn them off in the RUN mode use forced output e If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change e f deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Operation of each instruction SSTP STPE JP LOOP LBL A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area Writ
318. emory cassette AFPX MRTC The default setting is Clock calendar only Transfer from the master memory to the control unit There are two ways to transfer data 1 Operation using the FPWIN GR Transferring is available in the PROG mode only 2 Automatic transfer when the PROG mode was changed to the RUN mode When the power supply turns on when started in the RUN mode Transferring using the FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Internal memory gt Master memory under Tool on the menu bar Internal memory Master memory dialog box x Select either Internal memory gt Master G jiena nema 5 Wasir memo memory or Master memory gt Internal Master memory gt Internal memor TT Close memory The program and system register that is stored in the internal memory of PLC will be transferred to the master memory Help Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Select item except for system register and program Comment Data register DT Starting block No 0 15 Number of transter ploci 1 16 Transferring is available in the PROG mode only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Select the data to be simultaneously transferred with programs and registers
319. emote limitation I O mapping Interrupt St Probably a hardware abnormality error 0 oP gt Please contact your dealer Description and steps to take A parameter error was detected in the MEW NET W2 configuration area Set a correct parameter An interrupt occurred without an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to noise is possible gt Turn off the power and check the noise conditions There is no interrupt program for an interrupt which occurred Check the number of the interrupt program and change it to agree with the interrupt request A A This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system Refer to Multi CPU system Manual MAARN An abnormal unit is installed FP FPOR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link system is installed on the slave station gt Remove the illegal unit from the slave station The number of slots or I O points used for MEW NET F remote I O system exceeds the limitation Re configure the system so that the number of slots and I O points is within t
320. en if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET RST instruction or high level instruction such as data transfer it is not regarded as duplicated output e If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists it will be normally flagged as an error The ERROR ALARM LED will flash and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using the tool software Select the Debug gt Totally Check Program in the menu bar and click Execute If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed Enabling duplicated output e If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled e In this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable e When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed 14 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of internal and output relays during operation e When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation lt Example gt Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on This sec
321. er of 0 to 32764 general serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PC PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps ff Note2 W Reference For information on MODBUS RTU mode operation lt MODBUS RUT Specifications gt Data length bit 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Communication format setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Add Default Phat en E nome Ra tein Unit No setting 1 to 99 cae Computer link Communication mode Computer G al of Bie setting ink eneral purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled connection Selection of port Built in USB Bulltin USB Communication cassette Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Data lenath Parity check none odd even ane Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Communication Me _ The following setting is valid only when f Parity check Aan ie format setting with odd the communication mode specified by ae system register 412 has been set to Stop bit 1 bit E ET General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not e
322. er than Version 2 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Close Force Cancel Help 1 Select 8 digits for Digit number 2 Uncheck Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 in Setting forF P m emory loader option 3 Check the functions to be used of Options for FP memory loader Limited distribution function Allow t he download i nc ase of same password Enable the upload protection setting Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 4 After setting the above check box input a 8 digit password and then click Setting The setting has completed Note This function is available only when the version of FP X is Ver2 5 or later and a 8 digit password has been set 11 5 Table of Security Settings Cancel When setting the security on FP X control unit When the master memory cassette is not installed on the FP X control unit set protection password password F ww A SO A OU A Cancels 4dioitpasswora A A NA 8 digitpassword A a Na When the master memory cassette is installed on the FP X control unit Status of security Security not Upload 4 digit 8 digit set protection password password Sets Upload protection Na NA NA 4 digit password NA NA _ NA 8 digit password Cancels pli A Available N A Not available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
323. erature KT temperature control unit control unit MEWTOCOL slave function e This function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC e The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Master Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Outline of operation when using computer link MEWTOCOL slave Command and response e Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer MEWTOCOL COM sketch e Communication is carried out in a conversational format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures e Data is sent in ASCII format e The computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent Computer Transmission program Reception processing program LEE
324. ere are two operation modes for a home return with the FP X Type and Type II Type home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Without near home input With near home input Speed Home input ON Speed Near home Home P P input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed Initial speed 0 Hz OHz Home input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Near home Speed input ON Home Max speed input ON Initial speed OHz Type II home return In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed Speed Near home input ON Home Max speed Input ON Initial speed OHzZ Home input is effective only after deceleration has been completed Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the near home input lt 9 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Home return operation using CHO Minus direction When X2 turns on a pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When X5 turns on deceleration begins and when X4 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is comple
325. es not a ra pr yer ANSIN Transmission pointer e Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device e When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off e Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed 3g Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Changing communication mode of COM port An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general purpose to computer link R9032 RO HDF HH h 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed Changing from computer link to general purpose RO R9032 HDF JHA 1 4 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed The COM port communication mode flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected IEF Note e When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register no 412 takes effect
326. es the 1 1 communication between the FP X and a computer using the computer link Ethernet Computer FP X Setting of IP address of a computer FP X Sytem register setting FF X COMS cassette setting Setting of IP address of FP A System register setting of FP X specified using FPWIN GR Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Frai as i 1 v No 413 Communication Format Action on Error No 410 Unit No Time No 412 Comm Mode Char Bit fa Bits l re one Computer Link l Parity Odd Pulse 0 cassette settings HSC PLS Modem Enabled Stop Bit f Controller input settings HSC Interrupt pulse catch settings nterrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No 415 Baudrate 3600 bps 7 Time constant setting 3 of CPU input Time constant setting 4 of CPU input T C 2048 Cancel Initialize Help COM1 port setting AFPX COM5 No Setting item Setting value Parity check Odd S No 413 icati Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 specified using Configurator WD IP address setting Setting IP Address Default Gateway Tee Ae ae Te FF Communication setting Communication Setting ia ox Communication protocol Computer Link v B z Cancel Action mo
327. et 8 3 5 FP X RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Cassette Product No AFPX RTD2 oem itsts s CNCOC C Specifications sis RTD Pt100 200 0 to 850 0 C In normal condition K 2000 to K8500 When exceeding rated range K 2150 to K 2001 K8501 to K8650 When wire is broken K20000 When data is getting ready K20001 Ne Note4 0 1 C Minimum unit 200 ms or less Total accuracy 0 2 F S or less Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Allowable Input wire Resistance value per wire 10 Q or less resistance Between analog input circuit and internal circuit Transformer insulation Insulation photo coupler insulation Between analog input channels Transformer insulation Occupation No of I O Input 32 points Note7 contacts Note1 Use a 3 wire type RTD Note2 When exceeding the rated range reference values which are not in the range of the conversion accuracy assurance are indicated up to 15 C However if the temperature drops below 230 C or rise over 900 C more the data will be the same value K20000 as the one at the time of disconnection Note3 The digital value will be K20001 from the Power on to the converted data Ready approx 3 seconds or when an error occurs watchdog timer time out error on the microcomputer for the RTD cassette Take care of the use of the data during this period not to influence other programs Note4 From the disconnection to the r
328. et High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP X Tr type 15 i 11 8 7 4 3 0 Jj l J Channel specification HO to H7 CHO to CH 00 fixed Clear high speed counter instruction 0 Continue 1 Clear Reset input setting 1 0 Available 1 Not available Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes e The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90370 to DT90377 Note e In the reset input setting the reset input X6 or X7 for CHO or CH2 allocated in the high speed counter setting of the system registers are defined to enable disable e The high speed counter to be used with the reset input is CHO and CH2 only High speed counter control code monitor area Channel No cho ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 ch5 ch6 ch7 ch8 DT9368 ooo o ch9 DT9369 ooo o chA DT90370 e chB o DTO oo e O Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90300 e The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed
329. et when A Hence P eerget instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1IR DT90323 Higher words SE ARER Counting area for input X6 or A eee e eee X6 X7 of the main unit P DT90325 Higher words HSC CH6 The target value is set when A ASPS eR Target instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HCIR DT90327 Higher words DE a ence ee DT90328 Elapsed Lower words vounung an TOmIN PULLAT SO A Tan the main unit A DT90329 Higher words HSC CH7 The target value is set when A O39239 Target instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R DT90331 Higher words Ceara nes Counting area for input X0 or A value A DT90333 area Higher words HSC CH8 Note2 The target value is set when A epee Target instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R ted DT90335 Higher words i errec die Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only Note2 Available for the FP X Ry type only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing Counting area for input X1 of A DT90336 Elapsed Lower words the pulse VO cassette A Note A DT90337 Higher words HSC CH9 Note2 The target value is set when A a Margel PONE WONGS instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R DT90339 Higher words a Counting area for in
330. etting of system register No 4 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 10 Safety Measures 5 10 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input output or mechanical power apparatus e Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit externally Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended e Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode e Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generat
331. exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 Exchange the data between D1 and block D2 with the data specified by D3 exchange Control instruction F19 Auxiliary jump SJP The program jumps to the label S ed S instruction specified by S and continues from there Binary arithmetic instructions 16 bit data S D a joo addion mf OPO fo F21 32 bit data D D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D as pot_ addtion pds addition P S2 D addition PD S2 D 2 Se a subtraction eibuacilon j me Sees la Eo TO BOL P27 subtraction S2 D 7 j Pas sumiraenion poe s20 CSS SA Or P o o e P28 subtraction S2 D multiplication Se D Boo lean Description ne O1 02 02 007 Ps lofolo S1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient D 1 32 bit data S1 1 S1 X S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 multiplication 2 D o D 16 bit data S1 S2 gt quotient D division eA a D e DT9015 i D 32 bit data D division PD 16 bit data multiplication oy S2 D a DT9016 DT9015 S1 X S2 gt D 2 result in 16 bits r a increment P 1 32 bit data D 1 F37 16 bit data P37 men Pa F38 32 bit data a D 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D D 1 gt D D 1 D 1 gt D 1 D S1 1 S1 x S2 1 2 gt D 1 D 32 bit data multiplication 2 D result in 32 bits Q Available gt X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info
332. external device is completed Reception of any further data is prohibited RO F159 MTRN DT100 KO KI To repeatedly perform only reception specify KO e To receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 R9038 R9048 also turns off when MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done flag transmission is performed with a byte number specification R9038 R9048 g Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Data to be sent received with FP X Remember the following when accessing data in the FP X send and receive buffers e f a header has been chosen in the communication format settings the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent e The data without the Code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer and the reception done flag turns on when the terminator end code is received When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not work However if the code STX is added in the middle of the data the number of received byte is cleared to 0 and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer again e A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent e There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send bu
333. ffer will be sent just as it is Example The data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to an external device 1 Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCII code 1 23 45 Data to be transmitted ib Conversion to ASCII code H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 2 If DT 100 is being used as the send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the upper and the lower byte DT103 DT102 DT101 Upper byte Lower byte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 Receiving data The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example The data 12345 is transmitted from a device with RS232C port e f DT 200 is being used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Flag operation in serial communication Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows gt Data received
334. for the FP X that this function is set at the same time Also this function can be specified for the FP X that a password is set 11 3 1 Upload Protection Setting Following two methods are available to set the upload protection 1 Set in the control unit using the programming tool 2 Specify the information on the upload protection in the master memory cassette and set in the control unit Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Upload settings under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Upload settings Untitlel x Select Set that PLC cannot be uploaded PE Hone Fa ee Click Execute f Set that PLC cannot be uploaded __ Close Release the upload protection by compulsion Help Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Specifying the information on upload protection in the master memory cassette Programs cannot be transferred from the FP X prohibited uploading to the master memory cassette The upload protection can be set to the master memory cassette from the FP X that is not prohibited uploading using the Internal memory to Master memory function of the programming tool At that time if there is the information on the password protect it will be transferr
335. from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state Also the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched e The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Precautions on programming Flag conditions The uses of the flag in the program R911C Control flag CHO R911D Control flag CH1 R911E Control flag CH2 R911F Control flag CH3 Note Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CHO This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CH2 This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 Turns on during execution of pulse output instructions and then maintains that state during pulse output from CH3 This flag is the same for instructions F166 to F175 e The above flags vary during scanning Example If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions there may be the different states in the same scan Replace with internal relays at the beginni
336. g edge differential initial execution D i G 2 type tJ ty L tL oO a D a 1 P3 J I S This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses For the FP2 and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Boolean Description UP DOWN F118 l Increments or decrements from the counter UDC e preset value S based on up down 3 input Shift Date Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal register relay WR data to the left Left right F119 YR rigursR Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range shift LRSR eke specified by D1 and D2 to the left or register LET n to the right 1 4 D Reset Control instruction
337. g input cassette Communication cassette RS232C part and protection earth terminal Note4 Excluding between the input terminal and the output terminal of the pulse I O cassette immunity Power supply specifications AC Power Supply o cme coon lt a Inrush current 40 Aor Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals Internal power supply part 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw Service Power Supply for Input Output Used for AC power supply type only Specifications C30 C60 E30 Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 15 A Overcurrent protection l l Available function atabe O Terminal screw Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected it may lead to damages Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net DC power supply Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC nrush current 12 Aor less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3
338. ges or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90300 e The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90300 and DT90301 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed LDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90300 counter Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 Read the elapsed value of the high speed DF F1 DMV DT90300 DT100 counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA If the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 HDF F166 HC1S KO K10000 Y7 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on Example 2 XB If the elapsed value DT90308 and DT90309 LDF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns on Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 XC If the elapsed value DT90304 and DT90305 DF F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off Example 2 XD If the elapsed value DT90312 and DT90313 DF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Y5 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off FP X Ry type Elapsed value and target value areas of high speed counter ch0 to chB High spee
339. get value for the axis which will be not be operated b In absolute mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value Infinite feeding is not available during the linear interpolation control x5 Component speed Initial speed and max speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type X axis com composite speed x X axis movement amount ponentepssa X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount Y axis com composite speed x Y axis movement amount ponent speed x axis movement amount Y axis movement amount Composite speed Initial speed Set to 30kHz or less Example Even if the initial speed is corrected see 2X6 the calculation value will be stored as is in the operation result storage area x6 Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz Range 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz Range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz a If maximum speed S 9800 Hz If initial speed lt 1 5 Hz initial speed is corrected to 1 5 Hz and range 0 is selected If initial speed 1 5 Hz range 0 is selected b If 9800 Hz lt maximum speed S 100000 Hz If initial speed lt 48 Hz initial speed is corrected to 48 Hz and range 0 is selected If 48 Hz S initial speed lt 191 Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 191 Hz range 2 is selected 7 Number of acceleration deceleratio
340. gether with carry flag R9009 data F127 P127 F128 P128 Bit manip pulation instructions F130 ie ee Sets the value of bit position n of m ofolofofo P130 PBTS the data of D to 1 ca eee a e aaa Tofo fofofof P131 reset PBTR the data of D to O hei e pr peanae Oe P132 PBTI the data of D 16 bit data bit test BTT Tests the value of bit position n PBTT the data of D and outputs the i to R9OOB ler ee tees Stores the number of on bits in the P135 bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D BE BE Be lee Steerer both bits in 32 bit data PDBCU data of S 1 S in D O Available X Not available A Not available partially Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2SH FP10SH Bee Ope Description lean rand Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR S D Turns on the specified output and s Jofo o ofole timer 16 bit R900D after 0 01 s x set value o Special instructions S O D FPO FP e FPX Special instructions F138 Hours min S Converts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data F139 Seconds to Converts the seconds data of S 1 S P139 hours to hour minute and second data minutes and and the converted data is stored in seconds data D 1 D
341. gh speed counter Incremental input X3 Decremental input X3 Two phase input X2 X3 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Two phase input X3 X4 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Incremental input X5 Decremental input X5 Two phase input X4 X5 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Incremental input X7 Decremental input X7 Two phase input X6 X7 KO xi ee ee AD ABG KI Controier input 100 101 A102 x20 Pulse O cassette The pressed contact is set for the pulse catch input KO xi AdO 4 Ad AS Se KI Contader input x 100 101 102 x200 x201 x202 Pulse IO cassette The pressed contact is set for the interrupt input Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Ry type ress XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Interrupt edge setting for Leading edge controller Inter input Leading edge XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Trailing edge The pressed contact is up and set to trailing rupt edge edge X100 X101 X102 X200 X201 X202 settings Interrupt Leading edge edge setting C dina edac a X100 X101 X102 X200 X201 X202 for pulse I O J ong reling edge cassette The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 For counting two phase input only CHO CH2 CH4
342. gnal is allocated in Y102 for CHO and in 202 for CH1 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP X Type and Type II Type home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration has been completed Without near home input With near home input Speed Home input ON Speed Near home Home P P input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed Initial speed 0 Hz OHz Home input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Near home Speed input ON Home Max speed input ON Initial speed OHz Type II home return In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed Speed Near home input ON Home Max speed Input ON Initial speed OHzZ Home input is effective only after deceleration has been completed Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the near home input lt 10 4 4 Pulse output control instructions F0 F1 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www
343. ground for each device O CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device Inverter etc Other device Inverter etc Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Example Since the power supply line of the expansion FPO adapter power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth the varistor may be shorted 24 V DC OV Varistor 82 V Function earth Expansion FPO adapter power supply line Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 6 Wiring of Input and Output Do not apply the voltage that exceeds the rated input voltage to the input terminal 5 6 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity sensor Relay output type NPN open collector output type sensor Sensor T I E circuit Internal circuit Power supply forsensor Power supply for input Power supply for input Voltage output type Two wire output type Sensor Sensor Internal Power supply for input Power supply for input Precaution when using LED equipped lead switch input terminal When a LED is connected in series to an input LED F cpy Contact such as LED equipped lead switch make nen atc sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input terminal is greater than 21 6V DC In par
344. gt Connects a Form A normally open contact p0 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the 0 0 a8 0 6 comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 r S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 ANDe Connects a Form A normally open contact Os 51 52 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 AND lt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 39 bit hall Connects a Form A normally open contact in p0 5 5 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare ORD lt gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 g AND D lt gt S1 S2 aL A D gt S1 S2 JL all D lt 81 82 ai ll poss 82 5 or S14 1 S 1 gt S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in Os 5152 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in p gt 31 82 p
345. he specified range paai I O overlap or I O setting that is over the range is detected in the allocated I O and MEWNET F I O map Re configure the I O map correctly it Ih Ht A Available so r Oo EPa ee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Opera tion status Description and steps to take mapping error according to the I O points of the slave stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged IC card Stops 7 Writing is disabled read error PS There is an abnormality in the AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger MEWNET F F E A lt mes VO ee aac slave I O mers ee e erminal units an in termina Stops Re configure the I O map for slave stations than the capacity of the CPU gt lnstall an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FPX FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system r
346. he FP series PLC is connected to COM 1 port re ar Data transmission command I The internal relay R10 turns on when the J R10 _F95 Asc m 01 RDD00000 DT101_ SO1TFRDDODOOO is converted to ASCII code and written to D1101 to DT 106 I F95 ASC M 00001 ___ _ DT107 00001 is converted to ASCII code Five speces inserted CO OOOO EE ET EE eV F159 MTRN DT 100 K19 Ki Data transmission I The data in the send buffer is sent from COM1 port B p J are sent from COM1 port K1 a is Reception done detection __ The internal relay R11 turns on when on The received data in the receive buffer l is read from the area in which it is stored DT201 and sent to DTO are written to data registers DTO to DT7 R114 DT1 H2431 R12 HoF L l r R12 _F72 AHEX DT3 K8 DT50 Check of received data Reception To determine whether the received dala is a normal response the comparison in j struction is used to check whether the i character string 15 is stored in DT1 Check of received data The eight character ASCII code beginning l with OTS is converted to a hexadecimal Value and stored in DT50 and DT51 R11 F159 MTRN DT100 KO Starting from DT100 the contetns consisting of 0 bytes are sent from COM1 port K1 h Preparing to receive the next
347. he largest word is first Scaling linearization on a real number data table is performed and the output Y to an input value X is calculated _ N N x x Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 3 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net an a FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Ope rr Boolean p Description rand Time series processing instruction PID processing S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 Easy PID S1 Temperature control PID can be S2 easily performed using the image S3 S4 of a temperature controller Compare instructions F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revision PDDTR specified by S 1 S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009
348. he system register setting of FP X LED indication Terminal layout O LEDs for Ethernet r LED indication Bii LINKIACT SD ERA o AD LINK ACT On Connection establishment T Flashing During communication On 100 Mbps Off 10 Mbps RS232C On Error occurred Flashing Initialization switch ON It is used to restore the setting to the factory default in such a case that an error occurred in Initialization of mmunication in communication setting communication The setting is initialized by turning on electricity with the switch being on After Default initialization turn off the power supply of the main unit and then turn the switch off p11 communication 1 N communication Computer link Available Available A dia d of 3 i General purpose serial Oe a A PC PLC link Note2 Note2 computer link mode MODBUS RTU Available Not available Note1 The RS232C of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X Note2 The PC PLC link function of the FP X is available via Ethernet Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 channel RS485 Type Product No AFPX COM6 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with an isolated two wire RS485 port LED indication Terminal layout LED indication Sig nal COM6 ets direction COM1 COM Transmission day LEED tine rea ASAS 100 USEL TE Transmission COM1 port oo ae
349. he target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON CW CCW Pulse output when direction output is Target value greater than Pulse output current value oN OFF Target value Pulse output when Pulse output i i less than direction output is from CCW current value ON Example Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 Home return e When executing the F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X4 X5 X6 or X7 is enabled for the C14 Tr type X4 X5 or X6 e To decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off gt on gt off e The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed However the deviation counter clear output is available only for CHO and CH1 JOG operation e Pulses are output
350. he transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link As a result the PC PLC link response time is longer e The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or more stations that have not been added to the link Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added If there are stations that have not been added to the link the Tlk time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer T max Ts1 Ts2 7Tsn Tit Tso Tlk IK Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis link error stop command sending time Tso master station scan time With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1TO 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keywo
351. hen the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note8 Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note9 Refresh time of FPO expansion unit 16 point unit 32 pointunit No of units used x 1 3ms Note10 The contact information and the elapsed value EV of the counter is backed up The setting value SV is not held 15 1 3 Communication Specifications Computer link Genera pupa MODBUS RTU communication 1 N 1 N PAPES 1 N 1 1 j 1 1 link 1 1 er commu Bo commu er commu communication ts communication ae communication ane nication nication nication inter RS232C E RS232C RS422 RS485 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS422 RS232C RS422 RS485 RS485 TOOL port Target AFPX AFPX items COM3 COM3 Two wire Two wire Two wire Token SOMME aieaupie Halt Half duplex nalr bus Half duplex i nication duplex duplex DRT s duplex D communication communication i Floating communication method communi communi communi master cation cation cation Note1 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily Communication port Ethernet
352. hus derivative output is obtained Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net lt Example 2 gt Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions RO FP 1 XO CT 100 X1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO KO Counting operation Final timing at which the The count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous JP instruction previous JP instruction was not executed has not been change and was not executed the execution condition XO for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 RO KO Counting operation Final timing at which we The count is not incremented because the count input changed previous JP instruction from off to on after the final timing at which the previous JP was not executed instruction was not executed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 6 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly Do not write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly lt Example 1 gt NS xo xt YO ue H DF T X2 e When X1 was on prior to XO YO will not be on even if XO becomes on lt Example 2 gt ANS X0 X1 TMX5 K30 YO H ft X2 e TMX will activate if X1 becomes on whether XO is on or off lt Example 3 gt Cw T H Y1 o T f Lees e When X2 was on prior to XO Y1 will not be on even if XO
353. iautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 14 Initialization Procedure Overview e The Ethernet communication environment setting of the AFPX COM5 can be initialized Initialization procedure Switch 1 Turn on the switch at the back of the AFPX COM5 2 Install the AFPX COM on the FP X and turn on the power supply 3 The ERR LED of the AFPX COM5 flashes every 5 seconds Initialization completes 4 Turn off the power supply of the FP X Remove the AFPX COM5 5 Turn off the switch at the back of the AFPX COM5 6 Install the AFPX COM5 on the FP X and turn on the power supply Note The Ethernet communication setting including the IP address cannot be changed when the switch at the back of the AFPX COM5 is on Always turn it off after initialization Setting for initialization IP address setting Setting IP Address Get IP Address to auto Cancel Unit Name FPX_ET IP Address 192 168 71 65 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 166 E 3 Communication setting tem iC Firmasi ej iis T ho Timeu G Cirmi Selmi Dertnation IP Addas mEn Destination Port He nu Seuren Piri Ma item Trreetaut Bo om Di Me Tiri Gein Roky Tiria E He Raty C 1800 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 8 Application Cassette Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web ww
354. ication cassette non insulated between AFPX COM6 channels Ethernet 3 wire 1 channel RS232C Application 2 channel analog input AFPX AD cassette non insulated 2 channel analog output FP X Analog output cassette insulated insulated AFPX DA2 between channels 2 channel analog input FP X Analog I O cassette insulated 1 channel AFPX A21 analog output insulated 2 channel thermocouple input FP X Thermocouple cassette insulated insulated AFPX TC2 between channels FP X RTD cassette SP nae AER ID insulated between channels FP X Input cassette 8 point DC input AFPX IN8 8 point transistor output AFPX TR8 NPN EP Se per eee 6 point transistor output PNP AFPX TR6P 4 point DC input 3 point FP X I O cassette transistor output NPN AFPX IN4T3 FP X Pulse I O cassette SCION speee Counts AFPX PLS 1 ch pulse output i FP X Master memory cassette e memo Preatme AFPX MRTC FP X Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 2 5 Related Parts Pp Name s _siDeescription Product No Necessary for the backup of FP X Backup battery data registers etc or for using AFPX BATT the realtime clock function For C30 C60 control unit FP X terminal block for E30 expansion I O unit C30 C60 with 21 pin cover no printing 4 pcs pack AFPX TAN FP X expansion cable N 30 cm AFPX EC30 80 cm AFPX EC80 For
355. ication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD is used to set Ethernet communication environment of the AFPX COM5 Reference lt 7 3 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD gt Start the Configurator WD Search the AFPX COM5 Select the AFPX COM5 from the search result and set an IP address to connect with a computer After that search again Select the AFPX COM5 and select Edit gt Communication Setting in the menu or right click to select Communication Setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net When Communication cassette AFPX COM5 is in the TCP client mode Dialog box of communication setting Setting of AFPX COM5 Communication Setting Protocol Mode TCP Cancel ction Mode Option Setting Client Mode v Control unit Communication cassette Setting Baud rate of COMI Port 9600 bps Communication protocol Action mode Baud rate COM1 Communication mode Destination IP No Destination IP address Destination port No 025 to 32767 1 0 1025 to 32767 Time out O to 1800 s Retry time O to 1800 s Client Setting Note Specify the same baud rate as the communication Destination IP Address 192 168 1 100 bet a 008 2260 environment setting of the COM1 port of the FP X Source Port No m 01025 32767 Timeout 0 No Timeout 0 1800 Retry Time IE
356. ich are simulta neously on 45 55 Ambient temperature C C30P Number of 46 points per 44 common which are 11 simulta neously on 48 55 Ambient temperature C C60P Number of 32 points per common which are 18 simulta 45 neously on 55 Ambient temperature C C14PD Number of points per common which are simulta 5 neously on 44 49 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 76 points per common which are 11 simulta neously on 51 55 Ambient temperature C C60PD Number of 32 points per common which are 1 simulta 17 neously on 4355 Ambient temperature C Configuration Number of points per DAZ common A21 which are simulta A21 A21 neously on DA2 DA2 i i DA2 A21 Ambient temperature C C30P Number of points per 14 common which are g simula neously on 48 55 Ambient temperature C Number of a28 points per common i which are 16 i simulta 713 fa N neously on 45 25 Ambient temperature C C14PD Number of points per common which are simulta 4 neously on 44 49 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 44 points per common which are 9 simulta neously on 51 55 Ambient temperature C C60PD Number of points per 28 common which are 43 55 Ambient temperature C 2 6 Terminal Layout 2 6 1 Relay Type AFPX C14R AFPX C14RD AC power supply nee ry han Input
357. igh speed counter part Pulse output part _ Output indicator LED A terminal i 21 6 to 26 4VDG Output terminal External BE 2 o Load power 6 Load power supply g j supply 21 6 to a l terminal 5to 24V DC 28 4 Y DC I E o i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 10 FP X Master Memory Cassette Product No AFPX MRTC po tem Specifications _ Setting items Year month day hour 24 hour display minute second and day of week Clock Calendar At 0 C less than 104 seconds per month Accuracy At 25 C less than 51 seconds per month At 55 C less than 155 seconds per month Memory capacity Flash ROM 512 kB System registers Master memory Ladder programs Storable data function Comment data 328 kB F ROM data area Security function ACS ner Note Only the Clock Calendar function is valid at the factory setting Install a battery in the control unit to use the Clock Calendar function If the battery is not installed the Clock Calendar does not function Function changeover switch between the Clock Calendar and the master memory Use the switch at the back of the cassette to switch between the Clock Calendar and master memory functions Chageover switch backside Realtime clock OFF RTC Factory default setting Realtime clock amp master mem
358. il 000001 001760 0000 06DF Y0 Y109F 002049 006144 0800 17FF RO R255F OX aX Ax Bx OX o F145 SEND 06 Preset Single Register__ WriteDT1Word 4X Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics LoopbackTest a 4 i 0X 1X i i 4X i 3X F145 SEND Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X X l Ox i 4X 4 LD0 LD255 Note For C14 MODBUS reference No 400001 411285 data on BUS hexadecimal 0000 2FFC FP X device No gt DT0 DT12784 Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Change the display to the Online monitor by selecting Online Edit Mode under Online in the menu bar or pressing CTRL and F2 keys at the same time 2 Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Dialog box of MODBUS RTU setting PLO Confteuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hald Non hald 2 No410 Unit No 1 m No 413 Communication Format Acton on Error Time Ho412 Comm Mode Char Bit E Bits Link wi 0 MODBUSRTU t Ce C te Odd Link WwiD 1 MEDEA SRF Parity 0dd Usage settings 1 for CPU input Computer Link Stop Bit i General Communication Usage settings 2 for CPU input Usage settings for CPU output PE Link Terminator SP Special input PMCS A oc ccucsans
359. iming Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as 1 MC and MCE instructions 2 JP and LBL instructions 3 LOOP and LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 5 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN Starts Operation of first scan after RUN begins e The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation of instruction Not executed Executed e f you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode make a program as below using R9014 initial pulse off relay R9014 is a special internal relay which is off during the first scan and turns on at the second scan lt Example 1 gt DF leading edge differential instruction YO xO HDF y y Add R9014 AQ R9014 Eu ee RUN Power on xO Y Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the DF instruction is off to on at the second scan therefore derivative output Is obtained lt Example 2 gt CT counter instruction xO CT 100 x1 G Add R9014 XO R9014
360. inal Between input terminals and power supply earth terminals Between output terminals and power supply earth terminals Between cassette I O terminal and 100 MQ or more power supply earth terminals 500 V DC Between cassette I O terminal and measured with a megohm meter input output terminals Between communication cassette RS485 and power supply input output earth terminals Between power supply terminal and earth terminal 900 V AC for 1 Insulation resistance Note l Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net lem i esecription i O 5 to 9 Hz single amplitude of 3 5 mm 1 cycle min a eras 9 to 150 Hz constant acceleration of 9 8 m s 1 cycle min 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 147 m s 4 times on 3 axes 1500 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and ius based on in house Noise measurements AC power supply terminal 1000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and 1s based on in house measurements DC power supply terminal Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Se EMC EN61131 2 LVD EN61131 2 directive Overvoltage category Category Il Pollution level Pollution level 2 Note1 Not isolated between the tool port USB port Analog input cassette and Communication cassette RS232C part Note2 Cutoff current 5 mA Factory default setting Note3 Excluding between the Analo
361. inal Transmission tine so send bata 80 Ro Receive data RD lt Using AFPX COM5 gt Combination of Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port side 3 pin terminal FPO COM port side 3 pin terminal FP X side 5 pin terminal Ro Receive Data RO Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Procedure of communication In this example an FP series PLC is connected to COM1 port K100 and K200 are respectively being stored in DTO and DT1 of the PLC on the other end FP series PLC Data register RS232C port Data area read amp command is 5 set in send buffer Data transmission with F159 MTRN R9039 off and R9038 off o lt Receive buffer writing point reset Data area read command 250 1 RDD00000 00001 transmission c a 2 a c oc i Transmission done flag R9039 on Data register value of PLC on other end is received lf normal 01 RD6400C8006F Reception done flag R9038 on lf error occurs 011OO00 p 5 F Bcc eq__ __ _ 6 Error code Empty data transmission with F159 fabled R9039 off and R9038 off Receive buffer writing point reset Reception 6eaooo89qo o9od 80690 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program In the following example t
362. ine M __ a c_ lt gt To conversion adapter of computer connection Reference lt 1 3 Type of Communication Cassettes AFPX COM3 COM4 COM6 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Unit no 1 When X1 is input LO of the link relay goes on and when X2 is input L1 of the link relay goes on X1 LO S f Control unit no 2 begins operation J X2 L1 c n f Control unit no 3 begins operation J Unit no 2 When LO of the link relay goes on YO is output LO YO PM ___ _ _ _ __ _ H YO output J Unit no 3 When L1 of the link relay goes on YO is output L1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 5 PC PLC Link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula T max Ts1 Ts2 T7sn Tit Tso Tlk LY TIk link addition processing time DTS transmission time per station 7 3 TSO master station scan time TIt link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below lt Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PC PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx sending time per byte x Pem PLC link sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms
363. inear interpolation function perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one shown below X axis CHO CW direction P41 0 0 P2 10000 0 P3 0 10000 P4 10000 10000 Y axis CH1 CH direction Relay allocation Relay No Relay No Positioning start R9010 Always ON Emergency stop switch R911C Pulse output flag CHO From P1 to P2 start R911D__ Pulse output flag CH1 R22 From P3 to P4 stat R23 From P4 to P1 stat R2F Positioning done _ Data register allocation DTO to DT1 Conrdcode Control code when executing linear interpolation absolute DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz User setting DT4 to DTS Target speed 2000 Hz area for DTG Acceleration de 0 ms linear celeration time interpolation DT8 to DT9 Target position Specify the target position of X axis when moving X axis from P1 gt P2 gt P3 gt P4 gt P1 Target position Specify the target position of Y axis when moving epi aala from P1 gt P2 gt P3 gt P4 P1 Work area DT12 to DT23 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction storage area execution are stored Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program R9010 0 H Fo MV H1010 _ DTO Fo mv K200 p2 FOMV DT2 DT4 4 FO MVY KO DTS R91iC RI1ID R2F R20 xi 22 LY DF 7H R20 R20 31 I DF FI DMV K10000 DT8 FI DMV KO Dio
364. info ctiautomation net Boo lean FPO FP e FPX FP2SH FP10SH Description rand S1 S2 S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on s3 S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on DWIN PDWIN 32 bit data band compare F64 Block data BCMP P64 compare PBCMP Logic operation instructions pwa AND PWAN F66 16 bitdata WOR re PWOR 16 bit data XOR exclusive PXOR OR 16 bit data exclusive 1 2 S3 S1 S2 D S1 AND S2 9 D S1 S2 D S1 OR S2 gt D S1 S2 D 51 AND S2 OR S1 AND 2 gt D P67 F68 S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D P68 XNR PXNR S1 S2 D N NOR F69 16 bitdata WUNI S1 S2 82 1 AND R S2 AND D P69 unite PWUNI S3 D S1 AND IS3 OR S2 AND S3 gt D When S3 is HO 2 gt D When S3 is HEFFF S1 gt D Data conversion instructions Block check BCC code PBCC calculation S1 S2 S3 D Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S1 Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD gt H 42 41 44 43 P70 F71 P71 HEXA PHEXA Hexadecima S1 S2 D data gt ASCII code F72 P72 ASCII code Hexadeci mal data AHEX PAHEX
365. ing for the high speed counter CH8 and CH9 is invalid When the operation mode for the pulse output CH1 is set to 1 the reset input setting for the high speed counter CHA and CHB is invalid Note5 Upgrade FPWIN GR to Ver2 6 or higher version if the No of I O allocation is indicated with 1 digit number such as XO in the setting window No 400 and 401 of FPWIN GR Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Ry type ress CHO Cont roller input settings HSC Inter rupt pulse catch settings High speed counter settings X0 to X7 Pulse catch input settings Interrupt input settings Do not set input X0 as high speed counter CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter CH2 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter CH3 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter CH4 Do not set input X4 as high speed counter CH5 Do not set input X5 as high speed counter CH6 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter CH7 Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Not set Description Do not set input X0 as high speed counter Incremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Two phase input X0 X1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Two phase input X0 X1 Do not set input X2 as high speed counter Incremental input X2 Decremental input X2 Do not set input X3 as hi
366. input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Two phase input X4 X5 Individual input X4 X5 Incremental decremental control input X4 X5 Normal input Home input of pulse output CHO Do not set input X5 as high speed counter Incremental input X5 Decremental input X5 XD Normal input Normal input Home input of pulse output CH1 Do not set input X6 as high speed counter Incremental input X6 Decremental input X6 Two phase input X6 X7 Individual input X6 X7 Incremental decremental control input X6 X7 Normal input Home input of pulse output CH2 Reset input of high speed counter CHO Do not set input X7 as high speed counter Incremental input X7 Decremental input X7 Normal input Home input of pulse output CH3 Reset input of high speed counter CH2 FP X Tr type ress CHO Normal output YO Y1 Pulse output YO Y1 Normal output PWM output YO Normal output Y1 Normal output Y2 Y3 Pulse ei Pulse output Y2 Y3 PWM output Normal output PWM output Y2 Normal output Y3 settings settings CH2 Normal output Y4 Y5 PLS YO to Y7 l Pulse output Y4 Y5 Normal output PWM output Y4 Normal output Y5 CH3 Normal output Y6 Y7 Pulse output Y6 Y7 Normal output PWM output Y6 Normal output Y7 Bilsetatch nti XO Xi X2 X3 X4 XS X6 X7 t Not set ontroller inpu Inter Pa The pressed contact is set for the pul
367. input to the high speed counter Roller Motor Encoder N output Inverter START STOP signal Cutter Cutter blade control signal Tape lead wire Pulse output function Control unit Stepping motor Combined with a commercially available FP X Tr Pulse output CW one Ha motor driver the function enables positioning oi P control With the exclusive instruction you Pulse output CCW ae S non h E can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation Pulse output CW JUUL Motor Pulse output CCW driver JUUL 9 step ping motor servo motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net PWM output function Control unit When you increase the pulse width By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio When you decrease it Note The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type control unit Heating increases Heating decreases 9 1 3 Performance of Pulse I O Function Number of Channel I O to be used High speed counter Pulse output Single phase 8 channels or 2 phase 4 C14 Tr type 3 ch channels C30 C60 Tr type 4 ch Note The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type control unit Built in Control unit Counting range e K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 b
368. inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R for desired output relays Yn n lt 300 When using CH8 of the pulse I O cassette When using CH8 of the pulse I O cassette with incremental input and reset input with two phase input and reset input FP X Ry type FP X Ry type Count input AFPX PLS A phase input AFPX PLS B phase input Reset input Reset input ON and OFF output ON and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified as desired value is reached can be specified as desired from the outputs of the main unit or add on from the outputs of the main unit or add on cassette cassette Pa le Reference lt 10 2 1 Table of Specifications gt 10 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO e This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction e Counter software reset bitO e Counting operation enable disable bit1 e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions
369. install according to the dimensions shown below d mm 12 5mm 10 mmj Installation i 5 i i i 30 mm E z I oi 30 mm The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails Tighten the screws after joining all of the slim type mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example When two expansion units Unit mm G9 6 Umm Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 2 Installation Using Expansion Cable The FP X expansion unit and the FP X expansion FPO adapter are connected to the control unit using the exclusive expansion cable The expansion cable AFPX EC08 is packaged with the expansion unit and expansion FPO adapter It can be purchased separately The expansion cables AFPX EC30 and AFPX EC80 are sold separately Note The total length of the expansion cables should be within 160 cm When using the expansion cable AFPX EC30 or EC80 keep it away from the devices and wirings generating noises as much as possible Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 2 1 Expansion Method of FP X Expansion Unit 1 Remove the expansion cover 2 Fit the expansion connector cable into the expansion connector part of the control unit and the one left side of the expansion I O unit 4 Set the terminato
370. interrupt input Pulse With high speed 2 chs 100 kHz each For linear interpolation composite speed 100 kHz With medium speed 2 chs 20 kHz each For linear interpolation composite speed 20 kHz Input of main unit PWM High speed 1 5 Hz to 41 7 kHz Medium speed 1 5 Hz to 15 6 kHz 1000 resolution 12 5 kHz or less 100 resolution over 12 5 kHz C14 1 ch C30 C60 2 chs when 2 cassettes are installed Pulse I O cassette is Pulse with 1 ch 100 kHz with 2 chs Pulse I O cassette cannot be installed installed 80 kHz each PWM 1 5 Hz to 41 7 kHz 1000 resolution 12 5 kHz or less 100 resolution over 12 5 kHz 14 points Input of main unit 8 points XO to X7 Pulse I O cassette 3 points x 2 8 points Input of main unit 8 points XO to X7 Periodical interrupt 0 5 ms to 30s Potentiometer Volume C14 C30 2 points resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 input Constant scan Available 4 points resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 Available year month day hour minute second and day of week However this Realtime clock can only be used when AFPX MRTC and an optional battery has been installed Note5 Flash ROM backup Note6 Backup by F12 Bin instnicaons Data register 32765 words Automatic backup when power is cut Counter 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relay 128 points WR248 to WR255 data register 55 words C14 DT12230 to DT12284 C30 C60 DT32710 to
371. ion The FPO expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FPO expansion adapter The I O numbers are allocated from the unit nearest to the expansion FPO adapter in ascending order if zT AAT E A A a ss a h 2 Kd Expansion FPO adapter FPO expansion unit Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 Expansion unit 3 4 4 2 Number of Expansion Units and I O Allocation Only one expansion FPO adapter can be connected at the last position of the FP X expansion bus The I O allocation varies depending on the installation location of the expansion FPO adapter Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 4 3 VO Allocation of FPO Expansion Unit I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit aera Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion YP allocation unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 FPO E8X Input 8 points X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 EPO EBR Input 4 points X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343 Output 4 points Y300 to Y303 Y320 to Y323 Y340 to Y343 FPO E8
372. ion check if the power supply of the HUB is on Procedure 2 Check if the LINK ACT LED lights up When the LED is off the LAN cable is not connected correctly Procedure 3 Check the IP addresses and the destination Procedure 4 Check if the communication format and baud rate for the COM1 port of the FP X matches the configuration setting of the AFPX COM5 Condition The ERR LED of Ethernet 1 channel type RS232C is flashing Procedure 1 Check the status with the Configurator WD If the IP duplicate error is indicated for the status the IP address may be duplicate on the network Specify an IP address that is not duplicate If the DHCP error is indicated for the status getting IP from the DHCP server has been failed Check if there is no problem on the network system Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 14 Precautions During Programming Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 1 Use of Duplicated Output 14 1 1 Duplicated Output What is duplicated output e Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program e f the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Ev
373. ion FPO adapter PEES O POWER Status indicator LEDs OVr O ERROR Panasonic AFPX EFPO TED status Description POWER ERROR P Normal Light on Light on Normal operation Light on FPO expansion unit is not connected The FPO expansion unit that had been connected when the power supply for the FP X control unit turned on came away elias SON enon rigenes An error has occurred in the communication of data between the expansion FPO adapter and FPO expansion unit due to noise etc The expansion FPO adapter turned on later than the eee FP X control unit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 1 2 Operation Mode When an Error Occurs e Normally when an error occurs the operation stops e For some errors the user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped by setting the system registers You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below PLC System Register setting menu on programming tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs select PLC System Register setting under Option on the menu bar and click on the Action on Error tab The screen shown below is displayed PLO Confieuration Untitlel Hold Hon hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 iw No 20 Disable settings for duplicated output
374. is not interpolation function for the home return the home return should be executed for each channel After the home return for both channels is completed the positioning operation running program R40 turns off Pulse output diagram Near home sensor Home sensor X0 ON X100 ON X1020N 2000 Hz La lt La 150 ms 150 ms Near home sensor Home sensor X0 ON X200 ON x202 ON 2000 Hz gt lt gt 150 ms 150 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O Cassette 10 5 1 Overview of PWM Output Function PWM output function With the F173 PWMRH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting When using the PWM output function set the channel CHO and CH1 with system registers 400 and 401 to Use output YO Y3 as PWM output Note With the FP X Ry type the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS is necessary to use the pulse output function 10 5 2 Instruction to be Used for PWM Output Function PWM Output Instruction F173 X6 Fo MV K1 DT100 While X6 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 502 5 ms and duty ratio of 50 is FO MV K500 DT101 output from Y 100 of specified channel CHO When the program runs the data table will be F173 PWMH DT100 KO as shown below Data table DT100 Control code 1 K1 DT101 Duty
375. isters System regis 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home DT90233 link a 5 Unit ter 42 and 43 unit mentioned in the left column will be i System regis changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the D130233 ag system register 46 will be set as it is 5790235 BERSA System regis Also the system registers 40 to 45 ter 46 and 47 corresponding to other units will be System regis Changed to the values which the received DT90236 ter 40 and 41 values are corrected and the registers 46 PC PLC ic and 57 in the home unit are set for the System regis DT90237 He ter 42 and 43 registers 46 and 47 ni System regis No 5 or 13 lt ane 2 DT90239 Be ae ter 46 and 47 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available Feed T cnc T Ing Ing DT90240 System regis The contents of the system register ter 40 and 41 settings pertaining to the PLC inter link PC PLC function for the various unit numbers are DT90241 is stored as shown below ter 42 and 43 Unit DT90242 station System regis lt Exam gered Aa 9 i 0 ter 44 and 45 igher byte ower byte es ooz yr System regis ice DT90243 nit Station ter 46 and 47 No 1 Setting contents of system register Be 40 42 44 and 46 DT90244 etal ae Setting contents of system er 49 an register 41 43 45 and 47 PC PLC System regis DT90245 iink e When the system register 46 i
376. it binary e The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there Y Max value 2 147 483 647 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 645 2 147 483 646 2 147 483 647 Min value 2 147 483 648 j i E E a oF ne Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 is used the value for the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 Coded 24 bit binary Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 9 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function High speed counter by the input of the main unit g specifications Reset Max onne input Control eran eOUntiFG flag speed area ee DT90300 DT90302 DT90304 DT90306 speed DT90308 DT90310 DT90312 DT90314 DT90320 DT90322 DT90324 DT90326 DT90328 DT90330 XO DT90300 DT90302 Ie Prase speed X2 DT90308 DT90310 2 phase input CH2 x3 X7 R9112 DT90309 DT90311 One input eae X4 DT90316 DT90318 Medium spee X6 DT90324 DT90326 inpu R9116 DT90325 DT90327 100 ps Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read w
377. it turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices e Please contact your dealer for further questions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads e f the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again e f the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDS are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a programming tool e f the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function e f the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check e f the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to th
378. itations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14T AFPX C30T AFPX C60T AFPX C14TD AFPX C30TD AFPX C60TD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Number of points per g common which are simulta 4 neously on 1 51 55 Ambient temperature C C30T Number of 46 points per common Which are 10 simulta neously on 49 55 Ambient temperature C points per common which ar 4g simulta 15 neously on 42 55 Ambient temperature C C14TD No restriction C30TD Number of 46 points per common 13 which are simulta neously on 52 55 Ambient temperature C C60TD Number of 3 points per common Which are 18 simulta 4 neously on 44 55 Ambient temperature C Configuration Number of points per DAZ common A21 which are simulta 3B A21 A21 neously on 3 DA2 DA2 DA2 A21 Ambient temperature C C30T Number of points per 14 common Which are o simulta neously on 49 55 Ambient temperature C C60T Number of 28 points per common which are 14 simulta neously on 11 40 42 55 Ambient temperature C C14TD No restriction C30TD Number of points per common 12 which are simulta neously on G 52 55 Ambient temperature C C60TD Number of 28 points per common which are 16
379. ith Windows XP SP1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 The next message is shown Select Install the software automatically and click Next Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for CP210x USB Composite Device C If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 6 or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue 4 The installation of the USB driver starts Although an alert for the Windows logo testing is indicated during the installation click _ Continue Anyway to continue the installation Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard searches Hardware Installation A The software you are installing for this hardware CP210x USB Composite Device has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP Tell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
380. ith a destination device during this setting time Seconds in the state that connection is Time out established connection will be cut Setting range 0 to 1800 s When 0 is set the connection will ry time not be cut Ret When failed in the connection with a destination device 15 Setting range 0 to 1800 s Note1 Set when the server mode has been selected for the action mode Note2 Set when the client mode has been selected for the action mode Note3 As the communication between the FP X and AFPX COM5 is performed using serial communication the baud rate for them should be set to the same value Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Option setting Response timeout When selecting the Set the wait time for the response computer link only This is the code for the AFPX COM5 to confirm the end of the message data to be received from the FP X CR CR LF or NONE can be selected Reception continues until the end of the message CR CR LF will be received When selecting NONE the end code is not confirmed 5000 Set the wait time for the end code If the next message data is not received within the judgment time without termination ms after the last received message 20m data the AFPX COM5 judges that is no termination and Judgment time without performs the following operation termination End code when selecting CR CR LF The received message
381. l info ctiautomation net 13 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 1 13 SCl DIAGNOSIIC TUNCUION cd socccieicceicc lust ioe e cileict ctiniiaie ie sista nice diced aAa ENE EEEN 13 2 WG 2 MPOUDIECSMOOUNG ocscsccdececes ieee E ec sc sees T T 13 4 14 Precautions During PrograMMIng cccesecseseeeseeeseeeeseeneeeeeeeeneeenees 14 1 1451 Use of Duplicated OUTDUN acieccscccocstuessicccseccscrceceiececicctacdedegcseaacedegtzaatecacccssiaceatetenaanes 14 2 14 2 Handling BCD Daldinia dec sieeefecstacetacatacacsdetadecadecadacadecadacatamesesseassence 14 4 14 3 Handling Index Registers ccccseseceeseeeeneeeeseeneneeeeeeeeaeeaeaeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeseneeneneeoeneeoas 14 5 TAA ONCKAUOR EOTS eicciccccceceorecedaxcucvecaiecetodedeedialaicduuddaidil aE eee 14 7 14 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method cccecsceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenens 14 9 14 6 Precautions Tor Programming ss assena EPR RNRP 14 13 14 7 Rewrite Function During RUN ccicececcdadeciccdecacecececscacedadedectcadecatecscedzeadscadecatzcacesaceas 14 14 14 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeseeees 14 19 15 SPCCIICATIONS risana eee eee ee 15 1 15 1 Table Of SPECHICALIONS csicesaccce tec saccec cx reacaire cadad oes ec sane a a a aa aai aanas 15 2 15 2 Table of 1 0 Number Allocation isiccccscesecetecesacesecedecccecceesdeacdccadecasesdexadesadssacsencseueas 15 13
382. l info ctiautomation net For PC PLC link 1 Link relay allocation FP X FP2 FP2SH FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Receive area System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission Link relay transmission size 20 20 24 jo Note No 50 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation FP X FP2 FP2SH FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 LDI 28 No 1 System registers Setting for various units No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 Range of link registers used Starting No for link register transmission Link register transmission size 40 40 48 lo Note No 51 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128
383. l is provided as a standard feature This can be used in applications such as analog timers without using the programming tools Heating decreases Realtime clock function can be added Optional FP X master memory cassette AFPX MRTC and backup battery enables the realtime clock function Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 2 Unit Types 1 2 1 FP X Control Units No of I O Specifications Product No points Powersupply Input Output Connection Relay type Ry type AFPX C1AR AFPX C30R 16 14 100 to 240 V AC 24 V DC AFPX C60R 32 28 Common es Terminal block AFPX C14RD po arities amp common AFPX C30RD 16 14 24 V DC AFPX C60RD 32 28 Transistor type NPN Tr type AFPX C14T AFPX C30T 16 14 100 to 240 V AC 24 V DC AFPX C60T 32 28 Common Transistor a PN Terminal block AFPX C14TD polarities NPN amp common AFPX C30TD 16 14 24V DC AFPX C60TD 32 28 Transistor type PNP Tr type AFPX C14P AFPX C30P 16 14 100 to 240 V AC 24 V DC AFPX C60P 32 28 Common Transistor af Terminal block AFPX C14PD polarities PNP amp common AFPX C30PD 16 14 24V DC AFPX C60PD 32 28 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 2 2 FP X Expansion Unit Ais SE E14 E16 Product No No of I O Specifications points Power supply Input Output _ Connection Relay type
384. l code H1200 H When the execution condition R10 goes F1 DMV K 1000 DT402 Frequency 1 1000 Hz on pulses are output from YO of the F1 DMV K 1000 DT404 Targe value 1 1000 pulses pulse I O cassette at a frequency of 1000 Hz and positioning begins F1 DMV K 2500 DT406 Frequency 2 2500 Hz At the point when 1000 pulses have F1 DMV K 2000 DT408 Target value 2 2000 pulses been counted the frequency switches to 2500 Hz Positioning is then carried F1 DMV K 5000 DT410 Frequency 3 5000 Hz out sequentially in accordance with the F1 DMV K 5000 DT412 Target value 3 5000 pulses Values of the data table until it stops at f the data table containing the pulse F1 DMV K 1000 DT414 Frequency 4 1000 Hz output stop value KO F1 DMV K 2000 DT416 Target value 4 2000 pulses When the program runs the data table and pulse output diagram are as shown Rio lF DMV K 0 DT418 Pulse output stop below H DF F174 SPOH DT400 K0 Pulse output start Positioning data table Control code H 1200 Frequency 1 2 1000 Hz Target value 1 3 4000 pulses Frequency 2 2500 Hz Target value 2 2000 pulses odin Frequency 3 5000 Hz Target value 3 5000 pulses Frequency 4 1000 Hz Target value 4 2000 pulses DT418 Pulse output DT419 stop setting Pulse output diagram Frequency speed Hz 5000 2500 Elapsed value of high speed 1000 f A counter
385. l l The upload protection setting is cancel the setting forcibly also deleted Releasing the protection of PLC Programs are retained Set PLC Password Untitle1 As the dialog box is shown select as below Current status 8 digits Available to access Close Dig it num ber prey ate Nae Force Cancel Select 4 digits or 8 digits igit number C 4 digits Hex Se 8 digits alphanumeric Match case O p e rati on M O d Operation Mode Sel ect S U n p rotect P C Access C Protect 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a password to be set 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric eK Cl i C k j S etti n g s pi Setting for FP memory loader option Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 rc x Click OK A The protect of PLG was released Note The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Executing the force cancel Programs and security information are all deleted Set PLC Password Untitle1 Click Force cancel PLC Home Current status 8 digits Protect Available retry counts 3 counts digit number 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access C Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option I Allow the download to older than Versi
386. lable Available General purpose Notrsaiectabie Not available Available communication Computer link Not available Available Option setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 4 Communication Tool Software Configurator WD Ver1 10 or Later The communication tool software Configurator WD is required to set Ethernet communication for the AFPX COMS5 Install the Configurator WD before setting the AFPX COM5 The Configurator WD can be downloaded from our website free of charge http panasonic denko co jp ac e fasys plc plc fp x software index jsp Member registration is required Free of charge The setting is saved in the AFPX COMb5 IP address setting pCi escription Cs Defaut When selecting Obtain an IP address automatically an IP address is Use the obtained from the DHCP server When selecting Use the following IP following IP address an IP address is set manually Unit name for Communication cassette AFPX COM5 can be specified FPX_ET IP address of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 IP address Set an IP address other than 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 19210819 Subnet mask Netmask of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 255 255 255 0 Gateway of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 192 168 1 1 Note1 When an error occurs the ERROR LED will be turned on Obtain IP address automatically Note1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888
387. le speed inverter Wiring example FP X Tr type Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input Operation start Xe Encoder A Motor Inverter Inverter operation t Operation Stop Inverter high speed Fast Slow t COM Operation chart I O allocation Speed 0 4500 5000 Number of pulse Positioning operation running Positioning operation start Arrival at deceleration point YO J RO O Positioning done pulse i J LL R900C Comparison instruction lt flag gt R9110 High speed counter CHO control flag Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90300 and DT90301 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops XS R9110 R103 R100 ee Positioning operations running R100 R101 a a a a nee Resets elapsed value of high speed Counter CHO R101 Fi omv Ko DT90300 F E Target value match off instruction 7 l YO goes off when elapsed value of high speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses F167 HCIR KO K5000 YO H Sets high speed counter CHO When elapsed value reaches 5000 R101 YO R100 et a ee es et rs DCMP K4500 DT90300 32 bit data comparison i
388. less 220mAorless AFPX E30P 350 mAorless 225mAorless _ _ PAFPX E30TD fC 170 mA or less PAFPX E30PD fC 220 mA or less AFPX E14YR 75 mA or less 40 mA or less 210 mA or less AFPX COM1 AFPX COM2 i Note ee sala ee e Note1 15mAorless 10mAorless 15 mA or less AFPX COM5 30mAorless 20mAorless 75mAorless AFPX COM6 15mAorless 10mAorless 15mAorless Analog input g Note1 AFPX AD2 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 15 mA or less Analog output AFPx DA2 50mAorless 30mAorless 120 mA or less cassette ANADO AFPX A21 30mAorless 20mAorless 70 mA or less cassette Thermocouple Note1 25mAorless Applica AFPX TC2 10 mA or less 25 mA or less Zee cas AFPX TREP 7 Kuen AFPX PLS 10mAorless 10mAorless 15mAorless cassette Dieta wey A RIE 10mAorless 10mAorless 10 mA or less cassette Programmable display eee 25 mA or less 15mAorless 80 mA or less Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 mA or less 10 mA or less 10 mA or less Note1 These current consumption indicate the increased amount of the current consumption of the Control unit refer to the example of the calculation below Note2 The current consumption of E30 is the current consumption at the supply terminal of E30 The current consumption of the control unit does not increase Unit tvpe Current consumption a
389. m one unit to the next Never run two wires from a single unit to two other units Correct wiring oU HHNH Incorrect wiring x With 1 N communication the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables Use only one and terminals AFPX COM4 Connection diagram FP X side 5 pin terminal frrenemisson ine __ Ro Receive Data RD In case of using the AFPX COM4 connect two cables each to the terminal and terminal Use the wires of the same cross sectional area which should be 0 5 mm To external device with RS485 port To external device with R5485 port AFPX COM6 Connection diagram FP X side 5 pin terminal com renemision ineo CON COMB Transmission ne 113 _ a io To external device with RS485 port To external device with RS485 port To external device with RS485 port To extemal device with RS485 port In case of using the AFPX COM6 connect two cables each to the terminal and terminal Use the wires of the same cross sectional area which should be 0 5 mm Note Non insulated between the COM1 and COM2 AN Setting of terminal unit The terminal unit is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette FP X FP X FP X FP X E e Transmission li is i To conversion adapter of computer connection Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation
390. me return according to the specified data table The elapsed value area CHO DT90348 DT90349 and CH1 DT90352 DT90353 is cleared to zero after the completion of home return Note If the home return is executed set the home input by the system register 401 If the home return is executed without the setting an operation error occurs x2 HDF F1 DMV H1125 DT200 DMV K200 DT202 Pulses are output from Y1 and a return to the home position is carned out at an initial speed of 200 Hz a maximum speed of 2000 DMV K2000 DT204 Hz and an acceleration deceleration time of 150 ms When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below DMV K10 DT208 F1 F1 F1 DMV K150 DT206 F1 F171 SPDH DT200 KO Positioning data table wile Control code i A 1125 DT202 Initial speed 2 5200 Hz DT204 DT205 Max speed 2 2000 Hz DT206 Acceleration 3o DT207 deceleration time 150 ms Deviation counter 4 clear signal output time 10 ms Pulse output diagram when home position proximity input is not used xa ON Home sensor m 150 ms Pulse output when home position proximity input is used X2 ON Near home Home sensor j sensor ON O 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz J 150 ms 150 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration For specifying acceleration deceleration
391. menu bar and click the IP Address Setting tab to set the IP address of GV Unit Setting Touch Switch DIO Mem Overlap E Mail Memory Expansion Backlight Buzzer System Made Switch Blink Flash Environment Setting IP Address Setting v IP Setting M Select IP Address from Network Table N j IP Address 168 1 100 Default Gateway Sub Net Mask j 0 Port No fioo00 Send Time Out fis sec Memory Protect M hternal Memory M Memory Card Memory omer Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Select Comm Parameter under System Setting in the menu bar and select FP series Ethernet TCP IP Then click the Detail tab and select 1 n for the connection to set the local number Gomm Parameter Main 1 Detail Connection EMM settins _ Local No fi i Comm Err Handling oud ie Stop C Continuous Send Delay Time 0 msec C 7 5 f 8 bit Start Time 0 a sec ip Bi G 41 hi Retrials 3 DS Code Time Out Ti 300 H so ime Out Time 10msec G DEC C BOD Text Process f LSB to MSB C MSB to LSB Default Cancel Apply Select Comm Parameter under System Setting in the menu bar and select Network Table Setting Ethernet to open the screen to edit the network The network table number corresponds to the unit number of the FP X 1 GYNetCfeMin untitled Edit Network Ta
392. mode of the PLC Operation mode This sets the RUN mode The program is executed is executed and operation begins PROG downward This sets the PROG mode The operation stops e The remote switching operation from the programming tool is operable e When performing remote switching from the programming tool the setting of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED e Restart FP to operate in the mode set with the RUN PROG mode switch RUN upward USB connector B type This is a connector to connect the programming tool Commercial USB cables AB type can be used e The baud rate with the USB is 115 2 kbps fixed e Either USB port or COM2 port of 2 channnel type communication cassette is selected The USB port cannot be used when the COM2 port is used Analog potentiometer analog dial Turning this dial changes the values of special data registers DT90040 to DT90043 within the range of KO to K1000 It can be used for analog timers and other applications C14 and C30 equips 2 points and C60 equips 4 points Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Tool port RS232C This port is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit PinNo Signalname __ Abbreviation Signal direction SignalGround S amp G
393. mounting part 2 p Slot 0 Slot 1 wY10 WY20 L Sur Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires power wires or load DA part Internal block diagram A voltage amplifier and a current amplifier is connected in parallel to one DA converter IC Do not connect an analog device to the voltage output terminal and current output terminal of the same channel simultaneously m Voltage amplifier DA iiri converter computer Current amplifier ai a4 Ee a Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 4 FP X Thermocouple Cassette Product No AFPX TC2 Po i ote Specifications O No of input points 2 channels cassette Inout rande Thermocouple type K 50 0 to 500 0 C P J Thermocouple type J 50 0 to 500 0 C In normal condition K 500 to K5000 Digital value When exceeding rated range K 501 K5001 or K8000 When wire is broken K8000 When data is getting ready K8001 0 2 C The indication is 0 1 C by the software averaging procedure 200 ms 2 channels 0 5 F S or less Cold junction error 1 5 C 344 KQ Transformer insulation isolation IC insulation Note1 When the wire of thermocouple is broken the digital val
394. ms Deviation counter 4 clear signal output time 10 ms Pulse output diagram when home position proximity input is not used X2 ON Home sensor ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz gt 150 ms Pulse output when home position proximity input is used X2 ON Near home Home sensor sensor ON ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz e oa w 150 ms 150 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration For specifying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 Steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms 2 No of steps x 1000 Initial speed f0 Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 Control code lt H constant gt H 0000000 0 Fixed LI Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range QO 1 5 Hz to 9 8 KHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Optional mode and output type 20 Type I home return CW 21 Type I home return CCW 22 Type home return Direction output OFF 23 Type l home return Direction output ON 24 Type home return CW and deviation counter clear 25 Type home return CCW and deviation counter clear 26 Type home return Direction output
395. munication mode Computer link Target IP address for Send type UNICAST unit No Destination IP address No 1 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 11 No 2 192 168 1 12 Destination port No 9094 Source port No 0 Slave unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 11 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type UNICAST Source port No 9094 Slave unit2 IP address 192 168 1 2 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Server connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type UNICAST Source port No 9094 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 When using the MEWTOCOL master function in UDP BROADCAST communication Set as follows for each unit using Configurator WD IP address setting Communication setting Option setting Master unit IP address 192 168 1 5 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode Client connection Gateway 192 168 1 1 Baud rate 115200 bps Communication mode Computer link Send type BROADCAST Destination IP address 192 168 1 11 Destination port No 9094 Source port No 0 Slave unit 1 IP address 192 168 1 11 Communication protocol UDP Not necessary Netmask 255 255 255 0 Action mode
396. must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 ASCII code H3031 should be specified The unit No of the PLC is specified by the system register 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case characters following the fixed formula for the particular command o Specification and name data to be written Command code ASCII code H23 0 1 C gt A 0 0 0 1 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by entering ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC 5 Terminator end code Messages must always end with a Cp ASCII code HOD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Note When writing e The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command
397. n special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialog box and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 13 2 2 lf ERROR LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on e f the ERROR LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the FP X control unit Please contact your dealer e f the ERROR LED is flashed go to chapter 11 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode e If the ERROR LED is turned on the program execution time is too long Check the program Check 1 Check if instructions such as JMP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish 2 Check if interrupt instructions are executed in succession Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 3 ALL LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is in the range of the rating e Be sure to check the fluctuation in the voltage Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP X control unit is shared with them e f the LED on the control un
398. n number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14R AFPX C30R AFPX C60R AFPX C14RD AFPX C30RD AFPX C60RD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net C14R Number of g points per common which are simulta 4 neously on 4446 Ambient temperature C C30R Number of 6 points per common Which are 9 simulta neously on 7 4045 55 Ambient temperature C C60R Number of 50 points per common which are simulta ia neously on Number of points per common which are simulta a aiana heeled bela 3 neously on 3 44 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30RD Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 8 40 43 5055 Ambient temperature C Number of 32 points per common which are simulta 15 neously on 12 3740 5055 Ambient temperature C Number of points per common Which are simulta neously on 1 Ambient temperature C C30R Number of 14 points per i common 8f777777777 which are simulta neously on 4045 55 Ambient temperature C C60R Number of 28 points per common Number of points per 6 common which are simulta neously on 44 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30RD Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 7 11 40 43 50 55 Ambient temperature C C60RD Numbe
399. n steps The system automatically calculates the number of acceleration decelaration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the oepration result is 0 pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found using the formula acceleration deceleration time ms x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental initial speed 300 Hz max speed 5 kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5 s CHO target value 1000 CH1 target value 50 CHO componet _300 1000_ _ 599 696 Hz initial speed 10002 50 CH1 componet __ 900x50 14 981 Hz initial speed 1 502 l CHO number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 x 299 626 147 8 gt 60 steps CH1 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 x 14 981 7 4 7 steps Note Precaution for the specification of composite speed initial speed If each component speed initial speed of CHO and CH1 which is calculated using the following formula is not 1 5 KHz or higher the path may not be linear f gt 1 5 Ax2 y2 E Ax AX CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is short Ay CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is long Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program of interpolation control Wiring example FP X Co
400. n the Unit home unit is in the standard setting the A N A E station values in the home unit are copied in the No 7 or 15 ter 44 and 45 system registers 46 and 47 When the system register 46 in the DT90247 System regis home unit is in the reverse setting the oreo registers 40 to 45 and 47 corresponding to the home unit mentioned in the left System regis DT90248 een an column will be changed to 50 to 55 and 57 and the system register 46 will be DT90249 PC PLC System regis set as it is link ter 42 and 43 Also the system registers 40 to 45 Unit corresponding to other units will be DT90250 station System regis changed to the values which the No 8 or 16 ter 44 and 45 received values are corrected and the System regis hepa oral 57 in the home unit are ter 46 and 47 gisters 46 and 47 DT90252 Notused S DT90253 Notused S O DT90254 Notused S DT90255 Notused o DT90256 Notused gt O Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing a ae area for input XO or Bae El DT90300 apsed Lower words words XO X1 of the main unit Seon The target value is set when T Note orac a aeenmer ence instructions F166 HC1S and DT90303 Higher words F167 HC1R are executed DT90304 Elapsed Lower words Sounting a tO POLS the main unit HSC CH1 The target value is set when Note DT90306
401. n the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The Operation auxiliary ee divided remainder 32 bit is stored in hee division 5790015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is executed DT90016 The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction After commencing operation the address DT90017 Operation error where the first operation error occurred is address hold type stored Monitor the address using decimal Z N A display The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs Operauon Error the new address overwrites the previous DT90018 address non hold a N A type address At the beginning of a scan the address is 0 Monitor the address using decimal display The data stored here is increased by one 2 5 ms ring counter every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF DT90019 Note1 Difference between the values of the two N A points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The data stored here is increased by one every 10 24 us HO to HFFFF 10 us ring counter Difference between the values of the two DT90020 Notet Note points absolute value x 10 24 us Elapsed time between the two points Note The exact value is 10 24 us DT90021 Notused J CCNA Note1 It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan Note2 As DT90020 is renewed even if FO MV DT90020 and D instruction is being executed it
402. n the execution of related instructions F166 to F175 e If an instruction related to the high speed counter F166 to F175 is executed the control flag special internal relay R9110 to R911D corresponding to the channel used turns on e Please be aware that the control flag in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program e When the control flag for a channel turns on another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed 10 2 3 Booting Time The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output Booting time Approx 200 us with 30 steps Approx 400 us with 60 steps Approx 500 ps with 30 steps Approx 700 ps with 60 steps Type of instruction Pulse output instruction F171 SPDH Trapezoidal control home return Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH JOG operation Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH Data table control PWM output instruction F173 PWMH CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set CW CCW is set Pulse direction is set Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 30 us Note If pulse direction is set a waiting time approx 300 us is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instructi
403. n using them with the output current at 1 mA to 10 mA the condition is the same as the current output range Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Programming Tool Restrictions Restrictions on usable programming tools depending on the units as of Feb 2009 Type of unit AFPX C14R AFPX C14T C14TD C14P C14PD AFPX C30R AFPX C30T C30TD C30P C30PD AFPX C60R AFPX C60T C60TD C60P C60PD Used Used Windows software poe ee Ver 2 5 or later Ver 2 70 or later FPWIN GR Ver Windows software peewee Used Used Ver 6 Type of programming tool ea FPWIN Pro Used Used Vero Ver 5 1 or later Ver 5 22 or later AFP1113V2 AFP1114V2 AFP1113 unit AFP1111A AFP1112A AFP1111 Not used Not used AFP1112 FP memory loader eo eae y AFP8671 Only programs and system registers can be transmitted IEF wil Note Precautions concerning version upgrade e In case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 e FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 5 or later free of charge at our web site e FPWIN Pro Ver 6 0 can be upgraded free of charge at our web site e The handy programming unit cannot be used Do not download any programs for other units such as FP1 to the FP X using the handy programming unit Website address http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl software list patch plc jsp Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
404. nation device 1 Freremssion ne Com Trersmission ne frrenemission ine o CoMa Transmission ine C nose To other device Destination device 2 Trrenerriesion tne 9 To other device Note Non insulated between the COM1 and COM2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 5 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports Port type ieee f Port name USB is used USB is not used Communication function Fitted with the main unit as a standard l Computer link PORON a a General purpose serial communication Mini DIN 5 pin connector purp Computer link Communication cassette General purpose serial communication PONE DOME Iot PC PLC link Communication MODBUS RTU Fitted with the main unit as cassette a standard equipment Computer tne COM2 port AE General purpose serial communication aR PON MODBUS RTU For C30 C60 only Note There are restrictions of use on the communication cassette when using the USB port refer to the next page The PC PLC link cannot be used with the AFPX COMB5 7 1 6 About USB Port For C30 C60 Only The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port and the functions of the communication cassette are restricted as below when the USB port is used e The USB port is available in the default setting It is the same when the system registers are initialized When USB port is not used When USB port is used
405. nation unit number and IP address is specified Unit Number IP Address Target IP address for unit number setting 1 192 168 1100 T aZ m 192 168 1100 i g Ee Unit Number 2 Target IP 192 168 1 O E TE oO 192 168 1100 1 Check Destination unit number and IP address is specified in the Option dialog box 2 Check the destination unit number you want to set and double click the IP address Unit numbers 1 to 99 3 Specify the destination IP address that is corresponding to the unit number Note When connecting to the IP corresponding to a unit number via TCP a new connection should be established after disconnecting the existing connection Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 13 Example of Connections Ethernet Ver 1 10 or Later Connection with FP2 ET LAN unit Overview Connection can be established with a maximum of 8 FP X simultaneously using a FP2 ET LAN unit and transmission is performed by the computer link Example of connection Unit No 2 IP address 192 168 1 12 Server Listen port No 9094 FP2 ET LAN unit FP X Unit No 3 er IP address 192 168 1 13 S f Listen port No 9094 Command HUB Response i KEE Z Unit No 4 Server SY IP address 192 168 1 14 Listen port No 9094 Active open Client Unit No 1 IS IP address 192 168 1 100 Max 8 unit
406. nd stores it in D 1 D l BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data PBCD specified by S to four digits of BCD 5 lo 3 F77 32 bit binary data gt ASCII code DBIA PDBIA S1 S2 F78 ASCII code gt DABI P78 32 bit binary PDABI data S1 S2 5 5 O O 16 bit binary data gt 4 digit BCD data data and stores it in D Example K100 H100 F81 4 digit BCD BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data P81 data 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data BCD data and stores it in D 1 D F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data P83 data 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary 7 binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV Inverts each bit of data of D P84 invert com PINV plement of 1 F85 16 bit data P85 complement of 2 F86 32 bit data P86 complement of 2 P87 absolute PABS P88 absolute PDABS F89 16 bit data EXT P89 sign extension PEXT Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign Gives the absolute value of the data of alo i D he ra Gives the absolute value of the data of 3 lolo D 1 D
407. nding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point ROFF type data to 16 bit PROFF integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to Ma o Converts real number data specified by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D DROFF PDROFF Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to integer Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point down Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point off Floating point F type data sign PF changes Floating point type data absolute by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D FINT PFINT 1 o The decimal part of the real number data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D FRINT PFRINT The decimal part of the real number data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 D The real number data stored in S 1 S is changed the sign and the result is stored in D 1 D Takes the absolute value of real number data specified by S 1 S S D o o FABS PFABS and the result absolute value is stored in D 1 D RAD S D The data in degrees of an angle PRAD specified in S 1 S is converted to ra
408. ne the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampling at an arbitrary timing The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the FPWIN GR The instructions functions special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below F155 SMPL sampling instruction F156 STRG sampling stop trigger instruction Time charge monitor of FPWIN GR R902C Sample point flag OFF Sampling by instruction ON Sampling at regular time intervals R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts 0 stops R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on R902F Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts DT90028 Interval of sampling trace kO For sampling by instruction k1 to k3000 10ms to 30 seconds For sampling at regular time intervals 12 5 2 Details of Sampling Trace Function No of data collectable at one sampling 16 bits 3 data Sampling capacity No of samples accumulable C14 300 samples C30 C60 1000 samples Types of sampling timing When an instruction is executed or at regular time intervals 1 Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2 Sampling by F155 SMPL instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction Also more than one samplings can be executed in one scan Timing for the execution of the F155 SMPL instruction can be set by the ladder sequence ACS
409. net Email info ctiautomation net 5 9 3 Replacement of Backup Battery The procedure for replacing the backup battery is as follows Procedure 1 Supply power to the control unit for more than five minutes Charge the built in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the battery 2 Turn off the power supply 3 Remove the battery cover using a tool such as a screwdriver 4 Remove the used battery 5 Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power Place the battery to fit into the guide section of the control unit and connect the connector 6 Install the battery cover and expansion cover Note If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery retained memory data may be lost Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 9 4 Lifetime and Time for Replacement of Backup Battery Battery lifetime when the master memory cassette AFPX MRTC is installed Number of Per Type of control unit inetalledihattarles Battery lifetime Suggested replacement interval po o tp 1 yearsormore 3years Note1 The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied Note2 Note that the lifetime may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note3 The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even when power is supplied
410. nfo ctiautomation net Count for reset input Incremental input mode Unit input ON XO or X2 TLL G A O A FLL OFF x6 or XT count is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 9 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required lt Single phase gt lt Two phase gt T lel i T i ra gt T T Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 3 4 VO Allocation e As shown in the table of specifications the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R for desired output Yn n lt 300 When using CHO of the high speed counter with incremental input and reset input FP X Tr type Count input Reset input Yn ON and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified as arbitrary output of the main unit or add on cassette When using CHO of the high speed counter with two phase input and reset input FP X Tr type A pha
411. nformation confirmation setting It can be confirmed by reading the confirmation area by the MEWTOCOL data area read command RD from the LAN For the memory area DT is fixed If the connection information confirmation setting is enabled the AFPX COM5 responds to the MEWTOCOL data area read command for the confirmation area regardless of unit numbers RD command message 01 RDD10010100195C SR RD response message 01 RDDCOOO AFPX COM5 L gt External device The command is not notified to the FP X main unit en a Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net How to transmit a command message to each unit FP X IP address A Z gt Unit No 2 a hy server amp 4 wy FP X IP address B Lh Unit No 3 FP X lt IP address X g Unit No 1 JIL Client FP X IP address C S Te ym Unit No 4 LA ERREEN A w Target IP address for unit number If Destination unit number and IP address is specified is checked a command can be sent to the IP address corresponding to each unit number Settable conditions When selecting the client and computer link When selecting the UDP and general purpose communication When selecting the broadcast IP address takes priority and a command is transmitted via unicast Setting method s Tareet IP address for unit number W Desti
412. ng of the program as a measure Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Use this to prohibit the simultaneous execution of other high speed counter instructions and pulse output instructions and to verify completion of an action Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 3 VO Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW lt When using CH0 gt FP X Tr type Home input Near home x4 input X100 i Driver CW output YO Y1 CCW output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y4 is used for the C14 Tr
413. ng when battery error occurs When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR ALARM LED flashes 10 to 81900 ms Wait time setting for multi frame 6500 0 ms communication Timeout setting for SEND RECV RMRD RMWT commands 10000 0 ms 10 to 81900 ms 0 Normal scan Constant value settings for scan Normal oiam Sansone edh time scan Ha specified time interval 0 Expansion unit recognition time No wait 0 to 10 s 0 1 second bit time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X ress value Range of link relays used for Range of link data registers used for eee oie PLC a2 Starting number for link relay fo wie Ga link transmission Wo 0 43 Link relay transmission size O 0 to 64 words Sei Eg Starting number for link data register Go BA ting transmission 45 Link data register transmission size O Oto 127 words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Maximum unit number setting for 1to16 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link baie of link relays used for ans of link data registers used for Staring number for link relay PPE transmission WO0 1 53 Link relay transmission size O0 O to 64 words Es Starting number for link data register 128 to 255 transmission 55 Link data register transmission size O Oto 127 words Maximum unit number setting for at MEWNET W0O PC PLC link Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 72
414. nk relays and link registers of one PLC are automatically fed back to the other PLCs on the same network e PC PLC link is not the default setting Therefore the setting of system register COM1 Port setting communication mode no 412 must be changed to PC Link in order to use this function e Unit numbers and link areas are allocated using the system registers e It is available with the COM1 port only FP X FP gt FP2 FP2SH FP X Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Send area Receive area Receive area Send area Receive Receive area Receive area R5485 The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Operation of PLC link e Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network e Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network Link relay Link relay LO for unit no 1 is turned on The status change is fed back to the programs of the other units and YO of the other units is set to TRUE HH ae No 3 Link register No 4 Link register s RO No 1 Link r AS oof wo Link register
415. nnel unit with an isolated two wire RS485 port and 1 channel unit with an isolated three wire RS232C port LED indication Terminal layout COM SD ADSD AD l Transmission m r Mot used ji RS485 RS232C mene fo ooo Transmission line on eo Terminal layout POOP Send Data FP X External device RS232C H O SD AD SG JDO RD Receive Data_ FP X lt External device COM2 SG Signal Ground Po For terminal station set SW 1200 to ON side SW p11 communication 1 N communication Computer link a ee Available General purpose serial communication Available PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU Pw Available Note1 Only the RS485 can be used COM1 port Note2 The RS232C of the COM2 port is not available when using the USB port of the FP X Note3 When using this cassette the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit2 regardless the setting of stop bit The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Ethernet and 1 channel RS232C Combination Type Product No AFPX COM5 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with an Ethernet interface and an isolated three wire RS232C port Ethernet performs communication at 100 Mbps or 10 Mpbs but communication between AFPX COM5 and FP X is performed at up to 115200 bps according to t
416. not in the PC PLC link mode posa Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in R908A PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in R908B PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Foose Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in R908C PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in R908D PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in R908E PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Poe Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in R908F PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR909_ FP X pa R9092 Turns on when Unit No 3 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 5 i
417. nseoeseeeeeeeaeseneeons 7 81 S Application CassSenescakncee nn teen enna een a 8 1 8 1 Expansion of Application Cassette cccccccsseeceseeceseeceneeeeneeenseseaneseenesensesoeneseaees 8 2 B 2 APDlICAlOn Cassetes i dcciecacececavescsecedecacececacececatedsaneccsaseccscaecceasen S E EERIE na 8 3 Bid SOECIIICALIONS cctdcccecccesecetesetacetesacecesacetacadcacagecesasecesaaecesasecusaaecsadenusiaeacuaveusvaves susveusu eves 8 5 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions For Tr TY DO seseccwanenscene seve A E E E N E E E 9 1 9 1 Overview Of Each FUNCTIONS ccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeneeeneeeneeeeseeeneseassonseonseoeneeeaenenees 9 2 9 3 High speed Counter FUNCGHON seicesscwscecac veces eee cect iweeee tb aAa EEA AEA 9 11 9 4 Pulse OuUIpPUUPUNCUOM successive ceteve cm eiesticcttvanassreceensielwte te nute tate aitunetetitert eas 9 19 9 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O Cassette ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenseeseeeneees 9 51 10 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions For Ry TY DO cepa E 10 1 10 1 Overview of Each FUN CtiOns ccccccceeecceeeneeeeeeneeeneeeescnesenseessonsenssenseensenseoness 10 2 10 3 High speed Counter Function c cccccceseeceneeceneeeeneecenseeeeeseneeseneeeensesensesennesoaees 10 9 10 4 Pulse Output Function Pulse I O Cassette cccsceseeeeceeeneeeesensseeseneseneees 10 20 10 5 PWM Output Function Pulse I O Ca
418. nsion units from a single power supply Turning on off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence make sure to turn off the control unit before the input output power supply If the input output power supply is turned off before the control unit or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below e When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit e Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct e Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws e Set the mode selector to PROG Mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program Operation procedure when using FPWIN GR Ver 2 Select Online Edit Mode on the FRWIN GR On line menu Select Clear Program on the Edit menu When the confirmation dialog box is displayed click on Yes to clear the program Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss
419. nsmission error has occurred in the PLC link or when there is an error in the setting for the PLC link area OFF When the unit is in the PROG mode Conditions for on off Le Key Point Monitoring the PC PLC link status In FPWIN GR the PC PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored by selecting the PC PLC link switch on the FPWIN GR Status Monitor screen wall Note Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 4 Connection Example of PC PLC Link When using three PLCs In the example shown here link relays are use When X1 of PLC with unit no 1 turns on YO of PLC with unit no 2 turns on When X2 of PLC with unit no 1 turns on YO of PLC with unit no 3 turns on Link relay LO turns on FP X R5485 FPE FP2 FP2SH Unit no 1 Oe Unit no 2 Unit no 3 System register settings When using a PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed Set Value Communication format for COM1 Data length 8 bits port Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 115200 bps Unit no and communication mode settings Setting for the FP X with unit no 1 No 410 Unit no for COM1 port a
420. nstruction R900C turns on when the CHO high speed counter elapsed value becomes greater than 4500 pules R100 R9OOC R102 J 2 ee a aa __ _ Speed reduction point reached R102 Y1 Reset the inverter TEA R9110 R100 TO R103 SO Hor Positioning done pulse 0 5 s R103 a nM lM IMi K5 0 1 s type timer Setting KS and using it as a 0 5 s timer Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 Pulse Output Function 9 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control Exclusive T f control D ription ype of contro ASLON escriptio Provides trapezoidal table shaped control for automatically Trapezoidal coniro F171 obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial soeed maximum ea speed acceleration deceleration time and target value Enables automatic home return operation Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is F172 JOG operation on A target value can also be set so that pulse output stops at PLSH i the point when the target value is matched Data table F174 gis ae control SPOH Enables positioning control in accordance with the data table Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control by nea mak specifying the composite sp
421. nted high speed counter or the pulse output and PWM output can be carried out using the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Single phase 2 channel or 2 phase 1 channel pulse count can be carried out for one pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Also 1 ch pulse output is available Using the pulse I O cassette enables the count of the faster pulse than the input of the main unit Restrictions on the pulse I O functions of each control unit type type type Input of main unit XO to X7 Input and output of Cassette mounting part 1 Pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Cassette mounting part 2 10 1 2 Three Pulse I O Functions A Available N A Not available There are three pulse I O functions built into the FP X Ry type High speed counter function Control unit Pulse I O cassette Encoder output is input to FP X the high speed counter Roller Motor Encoder 2 UK Inverter START STOP signal Cutter blade control signa Cutter Tape lead wire Pulse output function Pulse I O cassette Stepping motor Servo motor FP X Pulse output CW JUUL Motor driver 1 Pulse output CCW PUL Pulse output CW JUU LN AFPA PLS Motor driver 2 Pulse output CCW JUUL f stepping motor Servo motor The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desi
422. ntrol unit Input terminal Home return start Positioning start Emergency stop Home sensor for CHO Home sensor for CH1 Near home sensor for CHO Near home ss sensor for CH1 side side side BE wow T AAA AAAA AAAA AAAI E CHO Output terminal Moving table Pulse output CW for CHO Pulse output CCW for CHO Pulse output CVV for CH1 Pulse output CCW for CH1 side 2 2 Stepping motor driver CH1 24VDC power supply driver epping motor i tT Stepping mot T R Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a 2 KQ 1 2 W resistor with the R1 and a 2 kQ 1 2 W to 470 Q 2 W resistor with the R2 Table of I O allocation Xo O xt X2 X6 O XA Home sensor Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW XT Near home sensor 0O X5 Home sensor Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW 0 1 X7 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Restrictions on positioning data setting e Designate settings for the target position and moving amount so they are within the following range Allowable range 8 388 608 to 8 388 608 e When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions Sample program Continuous interpolation control e Using
423. ntrols Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control Exclusive Type of control instru Description Usable cassette ction Provides trapezoidal table shaped control for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial F171 speed maximum speed SPDH acceleration deceleration time and target value Enables automatic home return operation AFPX PLS Trapezoidal control Causes pulses to be output as long as the execution condition is on A F172 JOG operation target value can also be set so that PLSH pulse output stops at the point when the target value is matched SPOH accordance with the data table Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control by specifying the composite speed the acceleration deceleration time and the target value F175 SPSH Only when using 2 Linear interpolation units of AEPX PLS Note e With the Ry type the pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS is necessary to use the pulse I O function Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to Use output YO to 2 as pulse output or Use output YO as PWM output Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise co
424. o Send Data Unit External device 3 Receive Data RD Unit External device Not used a a Unit gt External device The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory The system register Tool port setting should be used to change these Baud rate 9600 bps Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity Stop bit length 1 bit Note The unit numbers station numbers of the tool port should be specified using the system register Tool port setting Power supply and input terminal block This is the power supply and input wiring terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Service power supply for input and output terminal block This is the service power supply for input and output wiring terminal A solderless terminal for M3 can be used Expansion cover It is used after the expansion cable and the battery has been installed W Add on cassette connector B Connector For connecting expansion I O unit and expansion FPO adapter An exclusive expansion cable is inserted Battery cover This battery cover is removed when the optional backup battery is installed Installing the backup battery enables the backup of the realtime clock or data registers DIN rail attachment lever This lever enables the units to attach to a DIN rail at a touch Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctia
425. o the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM1 port Note The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 Ethernet Communication AFPX COM5 7 7 1 AFPX COM5 Overview The communication cassette AFPX COM5 has an Ethernet interface at the COM1 port and a 3 wire RS232C interface at the COM2 port The Ethernet at the COM1 port supports the computer link and general purpose serial communication and the RS232C at the COM2 port supports the computer link general purpose serial communication and MODBUS RTU The use of the COM2 port is the same as other cassettes such as the AFPX COM2 and it is selectable from the COM2 port or the FP X USB communication Although the Ethernet interface is connected to other device via Ethernet the AFPX COM5 communicates with the FP X via RS232C and it functions as a converter between Ethernet and RS232C 7 7 2 Functions of APFX COM5 Ethernet COM1 port Computer link Max 1 connection Client Max 3 connections Server General purpose serial communication Max 1 connection Computer link General purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU 1 1 Note1 For Ver1 10 or later the PC PLC link function of the FP X is available via Ethernet RS232C COM2 port 7 7 3 Additional Functions Ver 1 10 or Later Additional functions Support UDP IP too
426. ode Reverse voltage 3 times the load voltage Averag rectified torward current Load current or more Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Inductor Output M Load Output Load FP X terminal Lead o Fp x terminal mL COM COM Q 5 6 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings Isolate input output power lines e Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm e Wirings other than the above specifications or incorrect wirings may cause the fault or malfunction Others e Wiring should be carried out after the power supply to the PLC was turned off e Also turn of the power supply when the control unit expansion units and various cassettes are connected If they are connected during the power supply is on it may cause the fault or malfunction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 7 Wiring of Terminal Block Supplied terminal
427. ode R9078 0 operation mode relay i Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode z a ee a Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R907B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode R9076 Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR908 FP me TE Turns on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in R9080 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode ost Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in R9081 PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error o
428. ode in the transmission data The terminator is added automatically e When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 or 414 do not add the header to the transmission data The header is added automatically e When using the AFPX COMT1 transmission does not take place until CS Clear to Send turns on If you are not going to connect to the other device connect to RS Request to Send e The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048 e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port Specify K 8 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Receiving data from external devices Data register DT Data input from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified by the system register Data reception aiaa and the reception done flag goes on If the ee reception done flag is off data can be received External Tiia at any time s wll Reception done flag on Data table for reception receive buffer This is the state when the above program is executed DT200 The received number of e DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive bytes is stored as data is DT201 H42 B H41 A stored buffer System register settings are as follows BESI pemen rs System register 416 K200 i f Received data is stored in gt order from the lower order System register 417 Ko DT203 H46
429. ode selector is set to PROG R3020 erode nag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9024 Notused __ e O R9026 a flag Turns on while the F149 m instruction is executed m a O R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay timer counter contacts Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by R902A Interrupt enable flag the ICTL instruction R902B Interrupt error flag Turns on when an interrupt error occurs f Sampling by the instruction 0 ii Sampie point iag Sampling at constant time intervals 1 When the sampling operation stops 1 even Sample Wace ena Hag When the sampling operation starts 0 Sampling stop trigger When the sampling stop trigger activates 1 flag When the sampling stop trigger stops 0 When sampling starts 1 Samplngenabie Nag When sampling stops 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR903 FP X Address Name Description R9030 Notused e Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being used Goes off when any function other than the general purpose communication function is being used On Execution is in progress rewrite during the RUN operation Notused e O Notused e O Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data communication Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction COM1 port communication er
430. of times procedural errors have occurred DT90179 No of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 to DT90189 DT90194 to DT90218 N A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available Atoms Mame Deseripton mg i Unit No Station No stad l DT90219 selection for DT90220to 2 Unit No Station No 1 to 8 A NA DT90251 1 Unit No Station No 9 to 16 ter 40 and 41 dee System regis Unit ter 42 and 43 DT90222 station The contents of the system register settings No 1or9 Ler 44and45_ pertaining to the PLC inter link function for DT90223 System regis the various unit numbers are stored as ter 46 and 47 __ shown below FORES System regis en i E When DT90219 is 0 Unit ter 42 and 43 is Higher b L byt DT90226 station Stem resis serene _ Laway station ter 44 and a5_ DT9022010 DT90227 System regis Unit Station ter 46 and 47 No 1 Setting contents ter 40 and 41 Va PC PLC System reg me ayy key DT90229 link iian Unit I A N A DT90230 station When the system register 46 in the home No 3 or 11 ter 44 and 45 unit is in the standard setting the values in DT90231 System regis the home unit are copied in the system ter 46 and 47 registers 46 and 47 DT90232 System regis When the system register 46 in the home PC PLC ter 40 and 41 unit is in the reverse setting the reg
431. ogramming tool software in the PROG mode Nonexistent data is not transferred Once the data is transferred afterwards the information in the internal memory and the master memory are compared and the matched information is not transferred Key Point Selectable using FPWIN GR on from Tool of the menu in the PROG mode or online monitor mode P al Reference lt FPWIN GR Operation Guide Book ARCT1F332E gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 2 Function of Master Memory Cassette The clock calendar to set year month day day of week and time and the master memory is equipped in the master memory cassette The following 2 methods can be selected with the switch at the back 1 Clock calendar only default setting 2 Clock calendar Master memory Note It cannot be used as master memory when it has been specified to be used as clock calendar only Install the optional battery in the control unit to use the clock calendar The clock calendar does not work without the battery 12 2 1 Clock Calendar Function The clock calendar function can be used if the backup battery is attached in the FP X and the FP X master memory cassette AFPX MRTC is installed Note that this function cannot be used without the backup battery gf Reference lt 5 9 Installation and Setting of Backup Battery gt Specifications Pp ttem Specifications p sol
432. omation net FP X A Available N A Not available ing ing COM1 SEND RECV For details refer to Programming Manual D190124 instruction end code F145 and F146 N A N A lt gt lt gt COM2 SEND RECV For details refer to Programming Manual DT9012 l instruction end code F145 and F146 F pT90126 Forced ON OFF Used by the system N A N A operating station display DT90127 to N A N A DT90139 DT90140 1E number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90141 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90142 The sae Interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90143 The maximum interval between two receiving MEWNET WO operations value in the register x 2 5ms A N A PC PLC link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is DT90144 performed DT90145 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90146 The UM interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90147 The mest interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90148 ae number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90150 The PAO interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90151 The maximum interval between two receiving MEWNET WO operations value
433. omation net FP X Ry type ress Pulse I O cassette settings HSC PLS High speed counter settings X100 to X102 Pulse output settings Y100 to Y101 High speed counter settings X200 to X202 Pulse output settings Y200 to Y201 CH8 Do not set input X100 as high speed counter CH9 Do not set input X101 as high speed counter CHO Normal output CHA Do not set input X200 as high speed counter CHB Do not set input X201 as high speed counter CH1 Normal output Description Do not set input X100 as high speed counter Two phase input X100 X101 Two phase input X100 X101 Reset input X102 Incremental input X100 Incremental input X100 Reset input X102 Decremental input X100 Decremental input X100 Reset input X102 Incremental decremental input X100 X101 Incremental decremental input X100 X101 Reset input X102 Incremental decremental control input X100 X101 Incremental decremental control input X100 X101 Reset input X102 Do not set input X101 as high speed counter Incremental input X101 Incremental input X101 Reset input X102 Decremental input X101 Decremental input X101 Reset input X102 Normal output Y100 Y101 Pulse output Y100 Y101 PWM output Y100 Normal output Y101 Do not set input X200 as high speed counter Two phase input X200 X201 Two phase input X200 X201 Reset input X202 In
434. ommand RD For the memory area DT is fixed The unit number is arbitrary If the network information confirmation setting is enabled the AFPX COM5 responds to the MEWTOCOL data area read command for the confirmation area regardless of unit numbers Pea aii ____ AFPX COM5 m Po 01 RDCO00A800 601 RDD 100001 00095C CR nal a FP X main unit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Set DT10000 in the network information notification area fii Confirms network information when switching RUN PRO Mi liii Reads the network information confirmation area fil R010 FO HY gt H gt OT 10 FO My gt H1001 gt DE Ral44 R3020 RO TML 0 amp nH H e _ 1 I Fl46 RECY ODT i0 DED gt K 10000 BT 10000 HU Own IP address is checked by the neiwork infomation notification when the power tums on ffi ed 2 DT 10000 K 1f 3 DT 10000 k zoi RO Normal start up Al M Error occurs when the beginning of address is over 255 WN COmmunication start OK 2 DT 10000 H FF Fil Emar occurrence 2 DT 10000 H FF ake z DT 10000 H 1FF Flt Ap s DHCP get error 2 DT 10000 H IFF gt DT 10000 H 2FF Ri of LI i IP duplicate error Connection information confirmation When selecting the computer link and server setting the connection information can be confirmed from the LAN side by enabling the connection i
435. on Set PLC password dialog box 4 digit password 8 digit password PLC Home PLC Home Current status 4 digits Protect Close Current status 8 digits Protect Close Available retry counts 3 counts Pace cancel Available retry counts 3 counts Force Cancel m digit number m digit number 4 digits Hex ieo 4 digits Hex _ Hep C 8 digits alphanumeric Match case 8 digits alphanumeric Match case m Operation Mode m Operation Mode Access Access Protect C Protect C Unprotect C Unprotect m 4 digits password 8 digits password Enter in hex fee Enter in alphanumeric Pee ACS Note The password setting can be specified when the PLC is being connected online When using the master memory cassette The program editing cannot be carried out with the master memory cassette Turn off the power supply and remove the master memory 13 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check if the ERROR LED is flashing Example If the ERROR LED is flashing check lt 13 2 1 If ERROR LED is flashing gt Procedure 2 Execute a total check function using the tool software to determine the location of the syntax error Using FPWIN GR Select Debug on the menu bar and select Totally check program Click on the Execute button in the
436. on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEW NET W2 MCU The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred gt Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 4 3 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Description NACK error Link system error WACK error Link system error Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format error Link unit hardware error Link system error 127 Link system error Link system error Link system error Link system error Transmission l Link system error impossible error Communication stop Link system error No destination error Link system error Other communication Link system error error 140 BCCerrr A transfer error occurred in the received data 141 Formaterror A command was received that does not fit the format 42 No support error A command was received that is not supported e fiene ie man a
437. on 2 5 Click Yes Set PLC Password Untitle1 If the current status is Password is not set this PLC Home Settings procedure has completed cai eee eee eee _ e All programs and security information were Available retry counts 3 counts digit number d el eted C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access C Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option IV Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 r r About the password data of the master memory cassette AFPX MRTC The data on the password setting can be transferred to the master memory cassette together with the programs from the FP X The password information stored in the master memory cassette will be automatically transferred to another control unit when it is installed and the control unit will be protected The procedure of the transfer to the master memory is as below 1 Turn off the power supply of the PLC and set the RUN PROG mode switch to the PROG mode Install the master memory cassette to transfer the program on the control unit 2 2 Turn on the power supply of the PLC and transfer the program to the master memory cassette using Internal memory gt Master memory in the programming tool La Reference For the information on the transmission to the master memory cassette lt 12 2 2 Master Memory Function gt Phone 800 894
438. on can be executed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 3 High speed Counter Function 10 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function e The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output e To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 HC1S To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1R e Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set the system register No 402 for the input of the main unit and the system registers No 400 to 401 for the pulse I O cassette 10 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode Unit input XO X1 to X7 fLAELALAE LAL PPL a AFPX PLS X100 X101 X200 X201 Bonus g msh n n SG Count Two phase input mode Increment input CW Unit input AFPX PLS ON XO x0 LJ LJ L OFF X2 A4 XG 200 AT x101 L ee X3 X5 X7 X201 Decrement input CCW Unit input AFPX PLS ON xO M100 ENPI OFF X2 X4 XG X200 xi x101 f f f L ini X3 X5 X7 x201 7 a Count n 1 n Decremental input mode Unit input X0 X1 to X7 FLELELELEL JUULIL o AFPX
439. on net Connection method With voltage input 0 to 10V Analog device short circuit the SEL and COM terminals DC input 0 mA to 20 mA Conversion characteristics graph 4 A D converted value t gt 5 10 15 20 mA lt Analog input range Table of A D converted values Input current mA A D converted value When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value 0 mA or less Negative value O o 4000 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net DC input 0 V to 10 V Conversion characteristics graph 4 A D converted value gt 0 T T T T t 2 4 6 8 10 V lt Analog input range gt Table of A D converted values Input voltage V A D converted value eS gt po O80 po HH 10 0 When exceeding the rated range Input voltage V Converted value OVorless Negativevalue OO 4000 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No ee Cassette mounting part 1 Slot 0 Slot 1 Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog input wiring close to AC wires power wires or load Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
440. on net Email info ctiautomation net 1 channel RS485 RS422 Type Product No AFPX COMS3 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with an isolated two wire RS485 four wire RS422 port LED indication Terminal layout G Gi LED indication a Name ___ Signal SD RD Notused RS485 RS422 direction COM3 RS485 Light on D AS4B5 R5485 dr rean Soop h line Data o Legeg S S R R line Data e Data Receive Data 5 S Transmission line ygn Cassette backside switch o S Transmission ine YSD me aS RS485 RS422 _ J oF SWi 3 RS485 422 changeover switch RD s RD ON for terminal unit For terminal unit SW1 4 1209 Change the switch at the back of the cassette set SW1 4 to ON a ae depending on the state of the communication po Ti communication 1 N communication Computer link pT Availabe General purpose serial communication a i i ES Available PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU i ee Available Note When using this cassette the data is always transmitted by the STOP bit2 regardless the setting of stop bit The data can be received by either STOP bit 1 or 2 regardless the setting of stop bit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C Combination Type Product No AFPX COM4 This communication cassette is a 1 cha
441. on of the expansion FPO adapter Note The ranges of the I O numbers which are actually used differ depending on the units Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit I O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Hundred s digit Carry the digit of hundreds place one by one since the second expansion unit E Number of Expansion Expansion Expansion yP peryogi ae 1 ae 2 3 FPO E8X E8X Input Input 8 points points x30 to X307 to X307 x320 10 X327 to X327 x340 to X347 to X347 cease Input 4 points X300 to X303 X320 to X323 X340 to X343 Output 4 points Y300 to Y303 Y320 to Y323 Y340 to Y343 FPO E8YT P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO FPO E8YR Expansion unit FPO E16X Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E16R Input 8 points X300 to X307 X320 to X327 X340 to X347 FPO E16T P Output 8 points Y300 to Y307 Y320 to Y327 Y340 to Y347 FPO E16YT P Output 16 points Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X340 to X34F FPO E32T P Output 16 points Y300 to Y30F Y320 to Y32F Y340 to Y34F Input 16 points WX30 WX32 WX34 CHO X300 to X30F X320 to X32F X3
442. ondensing AC power supply DC power supply Between input terminal and output 2300 V AC for 1 terminal min Between input terminals and power 500 V AC for 1 supply earth terminals 2300 V AC for 1 min N9 Between output terminals and min 2300 V AC for 1 power supply earth terminals min Between saa I O au power supply earth terminals 500 V AC for 1 Relay type Between cassette I O terminal and 500 VAC for 1 min input terminals min Xe Between cassette I O terminal and 2300 V AC for 1 2300 V AC for 1 output terminals min min Between communication cassette 500 V AC for 1 RS485 and power supply input Note2 nia output earth terminals Koles aa sae o iors Between power supply terminal 1500 vi AC for 1 voltage Note o 0 D lt and earth terminal min Between input terminal and output 500 V AC for 1 terminal min Between input terminals and power supply earth terminals Between output terminals and 2300 V oy for 1 ote Z AK power supply earth terminals min l Between cassette I O terminal and power supply earth terminals Sas VAG for Between cassette I O terminal and input output terminals Between communication cassette RS485 and power supply input output earth terminals Between power supply terminal 1500 V AC for 1 and earth terminal min Xe Between input terminal and output term
443. one bit in S is transferred to move PBTM Block move BKMV The data between S1 and S2 is P10 PBKMV D transferred to the area starting at D a La are transferred to the area starting at D Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory from F ROM of the F ROM specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the area starting at D Pa baal The data stored in the expansion memory Data write to ICWT IC card PICWT memory area starting at D instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on fo Feme WSO TSB Js JaJofaloja o transfer Data transfer instructions 16 bit data MV Ka D invert and PMV move 32 bit data DMV invert and PDMV S 1 S S gt D 1 D move the specified one bit in D The bit is specified by n Hexadecimal DGT The specified one digit in S is transferred digit 4 bit PDGT to the A one digit in D The digit is data move Sb lt n Two 16 bit MV2 data move PMV2 ET FAI GEER Block copy COPY D1 The data of S is transferred to the all area PCOPY between D1 and D2 Data read ICRD The data stored in the expansion memory from EEP ROM The data specified by S1 and S2 are D D Data write to PICWT The data specified b
444. onse see below This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear i ma T Same 4 gt Same m _ j Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Commands to be used Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD_ Reads the contents of a data area Write timer counter set value area Read contact area Write contact area Read timer counter elapsed value area O RK Reads the timer counter elapsed value Write timer counter elapsed value area Writes the timer counter elapsed value Register or Reset contacts monitored Registers the contact to be monitored Register or Reset data monitored Registers the data to be monitored M W R Monitors a registered contact or data using MD Monitoring start G and MC Preset contact area fill command Specifies the contents of a system register Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Write system register Read the status of PLC Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller AB Aborts communication M gt Reference lt MEWTOCOL Communication Procedure gt Remote control Rea
445. ool Port 6 2 1 Tool Port With the tool port the FP X offers two different communication modes as below Computer link e Computer link is used for communication with a computer connected to the PLC Instructions command messages are transmitted to the PLC and the PLC responds sends response messages based on the instructions received e A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEW TOCOL COM is used to exchange data between the computer and the PLC There are two different communication methods 1 1 and 1 N communication A 1 N network is called a C NET The maximum of 99 FP X units can be connected with one personal computer e The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer FP X Command message KE a f D en Response message General purpose serial communication e With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader e Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FP X while reading and writing of data from an external is handled through the data registers e It is available only in the RUN mode The computer link mode is automatically selected in the RPOG mode so that the tool etc can be connected Image checker FP X Data register DT
446. ors a registered contact or data using the Monitoring start code MC or MD Preset contact area fill command sC Embeds the area of a specified range in a 16 point on and off pattern Preset data area fill command SD Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register Hee l Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register Read the status of PLC RT Reads the specifications of the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the Remote control programmable controller Eom Aborts communication Read contact area Write contact area Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD BCD data OIN O OAA WON O 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 0000
447. ory ON RTC amp ROM Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 High speed Counter Pulse Output and PWM Output Functions For Tr Type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 1 Overview of Each Functions 9 1 1 Usable Units and Cassettes 1 The pulse input can be counted using the inputs X0 to X7 of the main unit Single phase 8 channels 2 phase 4 channels 2 The pulse output can be carried out using the output of the main unit C14 Tr type 3 ch C30 C60 Tr type 4 ch O ch ich High speed pulse 2 ch 3ch Medium speed pulse 3 The pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS cannot be used with the FP X Tr type control unit Restrictions on the pulse I O functions of each control unit C14 Tr C30 Tr C60 Tr type type type Input of main unit XO to X7 Output of main unit YO to Y7 A YO to Y5 O NA Input and output of Cassette mounting part 1 N A N A Pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Cassette mounting part 2 N A A Available N A Not available 9 1 2 Three Pulse I O Functions There are three pulse I O functions built into the FP X Tr type High speed counter function Control unit FP X Tr The high speed counter function counts external inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired Encoder output is
448. ory area being used Channel No aea Cts Snes vers an Note1 flag aei ea width No2 counting speed X100 DT90332 DT90334 one x102 R9118 DT90333 DT90335 X101 DT90336 DT90338 Singiephase 2 Single phase CH9 X102 Raida DT90337 DT90339 6 25 us channels 80 kHz 100 us Single phase 4 channels 50 kHz Incremental DT90340 DT90342 Decremental R911A DT90341 DT90343 DT90344 DT90346 R911B DT90345 DT90347 2 phase DT90332 DT90334 A i i DT90333 DT90335 lt prase DU 16 7 us channel 30 kHz eE pU 100 ps 2 phase 2 distinction DT90341 DT90343 Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC1S Target value match on F167 CH1R Target value match off Note1 The values in parentheses are for the reset input The reset input X102 can be set to either CH8 or CH9 The reset input X202 can be set to either CHA or CHB a Reference For information on minimum input pulse width lt 10 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt Note3 When using the AFPX PLS only Note4 CHA CHB can be used when 2 units of AFPX PLS are installed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Near home input Note3 High speed counter channel No DT90052 lt bit4 gt DT 90052 lt bit4 gt Inter polation Pulse output when using pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Input outpu
449. osite speed High speed CH _ Medium speed CH Available 10 Available Available Note Even if all channels are used for the interpolation function they can be used within the ranges above Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Restrictions on I O allocations e Various functions listed in the table of specifications cannot be allocated to one I O at the same time Allocations of input X and restrictions when using the high speed counter function When using the high speed counter it is necessary to set how to use the input by system registers C14 C30 C60 Tr type Pulse Medium speed Single phase input XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 x6 X 2 phaseinput X0 X1 X2 X3 xX4 x5 X6X7 Reset input BEONE E i e l e l e l o Note The X4 X5 X6 and X7 are also used for the home input of the pulse output Use them only for either one signal Allocations of output Y and restrictions when using the pulse output function When using the pulse output function it is necessary to set how to use the input output by system registers C14 Tr type Signal Ccw O SIGN YY RB Y5 Deviation counter clear output Y4 YS _ Home Dept M E Note The Y4 and Y5 of the medium speed pulse are also used for the deviation counter clear signal The X4 X5 and X6 of the home input are also used for the input of the high speed counter Use them only
450. ot executing A programming tool software can be used to write data Step ladder process 576 to 591 Step ladder process 592 to 607 DT90085 DT90097 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X A Available N A Not available sine te an Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step DT90107 752 to 767 ladder process When the process starts up pT90108 Step ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number 768 to 783 turns on DT90109 Step ladder process 784 to 799 Monitor using binary displa DT90110 Step ladder process g y alsplay 800 to 815 A A Step ladder process lt Example gt DT90111 816 to 831 15 11 7 3 0 Bit No Step ladder process DT90100 ket DT90112 832 to 847 15 11 7 3 0 Process No 1 Executing 0 Not executing DT90113 Step ladder process 848 to 863 DT90114 Step ladder process A programming tool software can be used to 864 to 879 write data Step ladder process OTROS 880 to 895 Step ladder process pieene 896 to 911 Step ladder process seas 912 to 927 Step ladder process eye 928 to 943 Step ladder process beens 944 to 959 Step ladder process ASSEN 960 to 975 Step ladder process DT90121 976 to 991 Step ladder process DT90122 992 to 999 higher byte is not used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiaut
451. ote2 If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 Setting with SYS instruction fa Reference lt FP series Programming Manual ARCT1F353 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Link area allocation e The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC PLC link are allocated in the link area of the CPU unit Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit System registers value 0 to 64 words 40 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 41 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link O Oto 128 words __ 42 Starting number for link relay transmission OO Oto63_ 43 Link relay transmission size 0 Oto64words 44 Starting number for link data register transmission 0 Oto127_ 45 Link data register transmission size 0O 0to128words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 16 1 to 16 PC PLC link 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half 50 Range of link relays used for PC PLC link O Oto 64 words 51 Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link__ O 0Oto128words _ 53 Link relay transmission size 0O Oto64words link 1 55 Link data register transmission
452. ows 2000 Windows XP to connect the FP X using the USB e The FP X connected to the USB is recognized by the PC as that is connected through the COM port e The COM port No of the COM port allocated for the USB is fixed unless you change the number e The baud rate when using the USB is 115200 bps e The USB port is allocated to the COM2 port and the functions of the communication cassette are restricted as below The USB port is available in the default setting It is the same when the system registers are es When USB port is not used When USB port is used l 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AEFI ONN D MaDe nae RS and CS control is not available l 3 wire 1 channel RS232C AFPX COM2 3 wire 2 channel RS232C bie ad channel cannot besed initialized AFPX COM3 No restrictions 1 channel RS485 RS422 1 channel RS485 1 channel R8485 AEFI GONA 1 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used Ethernet Ethernet AERA oe 1 channel RS232C RS232C cannot be used AFPX COM6 2 channel RS485 1 channel RS485 Note There is no USB port for the C14 control unit e When multiple FP X are connected to one PC with the USB it cannot communicates with them simultaneously The PC can communication with only the FP X that was connected first and other FP X cannot communicate Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 7 Communication Cassette Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
453. p battery C30 C60 32k steps No of 111 instruction 216 From 0 32 us step by basic instruction With E16 0 34 ms x No of units I O refresh base time With E30 0 47 ms x No of units With expansion FPO adapter 1 4 ms FPO expansion unit refresh time 1760 points XO to X109F External output Y 1760 points YO to Y109F 4096 points RO to R255F 192 points gt g 1024 points for initial setting Timer 1008 points TO to T1007 Counter 16 Timer points C1008 to C1023 Counter T C Timer can count up to in units of 1ms 10ms 100ms or 1s x 32767 Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 Link relay L 2048 points LO to L127F C14 12285 words DTO to DT12284 Dat ter DT lt l eb Special data register DT 374 words 384 words O e L O i Note9 D O D E Cc Q D Q O 256 words LDO to LD255 None 14 words I0 to ID Unlimited points Master control relay points MCR 256 points No of labels JP and LOOP 256 points No of step ladders 1000 stages No of subroutines 500 subroutines Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Relay type 4 Input 14 programs periodical interrupt 1 Inout 8 programs periodical interrupt 1 No of interrupt programs pee nee PSN p put o prog p p program program Available Sampling by commands Sampling at regular time intervals For one sampling 16 bits 3 wo
454. p clear FO MV H100 DT 90052 Pulse output diagram a X6 JOG ON FTP LL side side command OFF Motor _ _ n 300HzZ YO Pulse OHZ Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net JOG operation Minus direction While X7 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO Program Data table X7 Control code H1121 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Decremental counting CCW X7 Fi 72 PLSH_ DT 310 KO Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT310 is i The data table headed by DT310 is used used and pulses are output from CHO J Pulses are output fromCHOo X3 oe re E ee Ea HDF AH Fo mv H108 DT 90052 r r Overrun process Fo mv H100 DT90052 Pulse output diagram XT JOG Zm F side side command OFF Motor ee 300Hz Y1 Pulse OHZ ly Reference The pulse output control instruction FO is used for the pulse output stop lt 9 4 4 Pulse output control instruction FO F1 gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 9 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Control e Positioning is performed according to the specified data table R9010 Fi DMV H 1200 DT400 Contro
455. place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R9038 R9048 flag is off during the first scan after RUN 1 Incoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception Re opening Received data A R9038 R9048 ON OFF Execution condition R10 Reception Reception is Reception is possible not possible is possible Execution of F159 MTRN 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited When the terminator has been set to None the reception done flag does not turn on Check the number of received bytes to judge whether the reception has completed or not 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns off except the case when the terminator has been set to None the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 R9048 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 R9048 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception e The reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on when data reception from the
456. play with a decoder the data must be in BCD form In this case use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below e BCD arithmetic instructions F40 to F58 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions F20 to F38 as operation in the PLC takes place in binary Input from a digital switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 oo ea cc Digital switch jo ojo BCD Conversion using F81 BIN instruction 1 g a 2 P a a as Data input into the PLC BCD data o olo 1 1 JoJo 1 1 oJo 1 o o 1 o in the PLC GIN deta bibh hiho Converted to 1992 in decimal data Output to a 7 segment display with decoder Use the BIN to BCD conversion instruction F80 BIN Conversion J using F80 BCD instruction 7 segment display Dat di pic Bin data lLfofolsT4 1 JoJo oloo Data output from Data output from fofofola ao o o o olo sTo 1 9 9 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 3 Handling Index Registers 14 3 1 Index Registers e Like other registers index registers have 14 points 10 to ID for reading and writing 16 bit data e Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is also called index modification lt Example gt Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified
457. points YO to Y109F Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay Relay which turns on or off only within 7 Tote z z G relay 2048 points LO to L127F ae relay is a shared relay used for PLC This goes on when the timer reaches the Timer T specified time It corresponds to the timer 1024 points 10 to T1007 C1008 number Counter ote2 _ to 1023 ee This goes on when the counter C increments It corresponds to the counter number mena lay Set ye ee nator am Sr ia olele i AA cpt een Ra eeen cet te er rza words WLO oWL 27 Gode for apealing 6 ink relay points as 12285 words 32765 words Data register DTO to DTO to Data memory used in program Data is Note2 DT DT12284 DT32764 handled in 16 bit units one word This is a shared data memory which is used within the PLC link Data is handled LD in 16 bit units one word Timer Counter 1024 words Svoro SvI028 Data memory for storing a target value of set value area 1024 words SVO to SV1023 a timer and setting value of a counter Note SV Stores by timer counter number Timer Counter Data memory for storing the elapsed elapsed value 1024 words EVO to EV1023 value during operation of a timer counter area EV Stores by timer counter number Data memory for storing specific data Special data 374 words DT90000 to register DT DT90373 Various settings and error codes are stored Index register Register can be used a
458. ppropriate wires may cause the fault of the power supply of the PLC a Reference lt 5 7 Wiring of Terminal Block gt Isolation of power supply systems Isolate the wiring systems to the FP X output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker 4 Mechanical as apparatus Input Output devices Control unit Insulated DC power supply Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net ACS er Note Power supply of the FP X expansion units Be sure to supply power to the FP X expansion units and the control unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both Insulated DC power supply Control unit To avoid the influence of noises Use the power supply causing less noise The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the noise superimposed on the power wires however the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation transformer Also twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise Grounding Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm7 The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may
459. ps The system automatically calculates the number of acceleration decelaration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the oepration result is 0 pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found using the formula acceleration deceleration time ms x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental initial speed 300 Hz max speed 5 kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5 s CHO target value 1000 CH1 target value 50 CHO componet _300 1000_ _ 599 696 Hz initial speed 10002 50 CH1 componet __ 900x50 14 981 Hz initial speed 1 502 l CHO number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 x 299 626 147 8 gt 60 steps CH1 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 x 14 981 7 4 7 steps Note Precaution for the specification of composite speed initial speed If each component speed initial speed of CHO and CH1 which is calculated using the following formula is not 1 5 KHz or higher the path may not be linear f gt 1 5 Ax2 y2 E Ax AX CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is short Ay CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is long Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program of interpolation control Wiring example FP X Control
460. put Output AC power supply type only Specifications Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 4 A Overcurrent protection Available function Terminal screw M3 Note This is a function to protect overcurrent temporarily If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected it may lead to damages DC Power Supply Specifications Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC Inrush current 12 Aor less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life 20 000 hours at 55 C Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 2 3 Input and output specifications Input specifications Insulation method Rated input voltage Operating voltage range Rated input current 16 points common Input points per common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Min on voltage Min on current 19 2 V DC 3 mA Max off voltage Max off current 2 4 V DC 1 mA Input impedance Approx 5 6 kQ oeo e Operating mode indicator EN61131 2Applicable type Circuit diagram An Internal circuit COM R1 5 6 kQ R2 1 kQ Relay output specifications Insulation method Out
461. put X3 or A DT90340 Elapsed Lower words X3 X ae fie A 7 cassette A DT90341 Higher words HSC CHA Note2 The target value is set when A DTSda3e Marget ONKOS instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HCIR DT90343 Higher words Sen ae eras Counting area for input X4 of A DT90344 Elapsed Lower words inerpulse I O cassette A Note1 i A DT90345 Higher words HSC CHB Note2 The target value is set when A ee Target A olor instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R DT90347 Higher words Acai ane Note Writing in the elapsed value area is available by F1 DMV instruction only Writing in the target value area is available by F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R instructions only Note2 Available for the FP X Tr type only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP X Tr nar FP X A Available N A Not available ee area for the pulse I O EI DT90348 Elapsed Lower words p CHO YO Y1 DT90349 Higher words pa fame PLS CHO The target value is set when Note DT L A A 2V0 OWOr WOras instructions F171 SPDH A p F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are K AS executed Counting area for the pulse I O Note DT 2 El L A A Pee een ge CH1 Y2 Y3 pa awe value DT90353 area Higher words PLS CH1 The target value is set when Note DT90354 L A A Sven Worcs instructions F171 SPDH pa ane F172 PLSH F174 SPOH and F175 SPSH are A A executed
462. put input terminal 1 Not used input terminal 2 f TF aa sl Sls el ol el l Si Sl sl sll aa ame Q Q NC comjcom x11 x13 x15 x17 x19 X1B X1D X1F LN oom x3 xs x7 xe x8 o F com xo x2 x4 x6 xa xa xc XE _j ov v1 ys ys y7 yo ve yo 24v vol y2 v4 yel vel Ya yc nc Nne y1 13 15 iz Y19 Y1B Y1D nc y10 Y12 v14 viel vis vial yic NC EZIZ LJ L L Service power Output terminal 1 Notused Not used Output terminal 2 Not used supply for input output Left Power supply for YO to Y7 Left Power supply for Y10 to Y17 Right Power supply for Y8 to YD Right Power supply for Y18 to Y1D DS power supply terminal input Input t rminal 1 Mot used Input terminal 2 as ee A T LHO ia B x 2 ie om a CTENEIRIEJRIF XB XD DF NC com com x11 X13 X15 x17 X19 X1B X10 X1F Cae ET AFAFA NC viol viz vial vie vis vial vic NC E LCi L Not used utput terminal 1 Net used Not used Oulpul terminal 2 Net used Left Power supply for YO to Y7 Left Power supply for V10 to 17 Right Power supply for Y3 to YD Right Power supply for Y 18 to Y1D AFPX C60PD DZ power supply terminal input Input t rminal 1 Mot used Input termanal 2 1 oy i TT dddddad
463. put type Rated control capacity 8 A or less common Output points per common 1 point common 1 point common 3 points common 4 points common Response time offon Approx 10 ms P Approx 8 ms 20 million times or more Frequency of switching 180 times min Lifetime l 100 thousand times or more Frequency of switching at the rated Electrical a control capacity 20 times min LED display Note Resistance load Circuit diagram 5 E w g Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Transistor type NPN O y Oa lt Open collector 5 to 24 V DC 4 75 to 26 4 V DC 0 5 A 1 5A 6 points Common 0 3 V DC or less Response time a 1 ms or less External power supply YOtov7 ss FY8toYD _ ____ and terminals Current E16 45mAorless oZ o o o Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Circuit diagram terminal Outupt terminal External Q iat O Load h w power a Power supply _ supply of 24V DC 7 load 9 to 24V DC terminal Internal circuit Output circuit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Transistor type PNP a lt O Open collector 24 V DC 21 6 to 26 4 V DC 0 5 A 1 5A 6 points Common 0 5 V DC or less 1 ms or less 1 m
464. r and FPO V2 1 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net I Boo Ope a l P Description S ean rand A TE P314 data sine Soper len F315 Floating point type Pon ha a S gt D 1 D P315 data cosine PCOS operation Floating point type TAN TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D data tangent PTAN operation F317 Floating point type SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D P317 data arcsine operation F318 Floating point type ACOS COS S 1 S gt D 1 D P318 data arccosine PACOS operation F319 Floating point type ATAN TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D P319 data arctangent PATAN operation Floating point type N S 1 S gt D 1 D data natural logarithm N Floating point type EXP EXP S 1 S gt D 1 D data exponent PEXP data logarithm PLOG data power PPWR data square root PFSQR 16 bit integer datato FLT floating point type PFLT data conversion 32 bit integer data to DFLT floating point type PDFLT data conversion converted data is stored in D 1 D Floating point type INT Converts real number data data to 16 bit integer PINT specified by S 1 S to the 16 conversion the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the exceeding the floating point data and the S 1 S S gt Converts the 16 bit integer data with sign specified by S to real number data and the converted data is stor
465. r of 28 points per common 21 which are simulta af 40 20 55 Ambient temperature C Configuration DA2 A21 B A21 A21 DA2 DA2 DA2 A21 Up to 2 channels can be used for the current output 2 5 3 Relay Ry Type AFPX DA2 and AFPX A21 Voltage Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number _ Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14R AFPX C30R AFPX C60R AFPX C14RD AFPX C30RD AFPX C60RD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Number of 5 points per common g which are 5 simulta neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30R Number of iG points per common which are 44 simulta neously on 35 zi 45 45 Ambient temperature C C60R Number of 5s points per common which are simulta neously on 1 38 55 Ambient temperature C C14RD Number of points per common which are simulta alicia aie aca eel neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C C30RD Number of points per 16 common which are 11 simulta neously on 43 5055 Ambient temperature C C60RD Number of 35 points per common which are simulta neously on 50 55 Ambient temperature C Configuration
466. r setting switch All the switches of the expansion unit installed at the last position should be on TESASAA HHOOOS Terminator hoe9 ciate setting A ee A DIP switch l QIYOSOST_ 5 Install the expansion cover Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 2 2 How to Connect with FP X Expansion FPO Adapter 1 Remove the expansion cover There is no expansion cover for the expansion FPO adapter Note Although there is no terminator setting switch for the expansion FPO adapter the terminator setting has been done within the expansion FPO adapter Turn off the terminator setting switches of the other expansion units Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 3 Expansion Method of FPO Expansion Unit The FPO expansion unit expansion unit intelligent unit is expected by connecting to the right side of the FP X expansion FPO adapter Unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FPO expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit 1 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver 2 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautoma
467. race stops F157 Time addition CADD E The time after S2 1 S2 P157 PCADD elapses from the time of S1 2 1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D F158 Time CSUB The time that results from P158 subtraction PCSUB D subtracting S2 1 S2 from the mir time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D F159 Serial port MTRN S n D This is used to send data to an P159 communication PMTRN external device through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM port reception PMRCV D2 equipment via the COM port of the specified MCU BIN arithmetic instruction BIN arithmetic instruction O O o O O F160 Double word DSQR S D P160 32 bit data PDSQR v S D 7 xlalo loloeo square root High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e gt S O High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed MV S Performs high speed counter and counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls according Pulse output to the control code specified by 5 controls S The control code is stored in DT9052 Change and DMV Transfers S 1 S to high speed read of the Sou counter i Pulse output elapsed 7 eIAANA elapsed value value area of high speed DT9044 Transfers value in high speed counter and D counter and Pulse output elapsed Pulse output value area to D 1 D High speed HC1S n S Yn Turns output Yn on when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high set with speed counter reache
468. ram Home return operation using CH1 Plus direction When X3 turns on a pulse is output from CW output Y2 of the specified channel CH1 and the return to home begins When X6 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90352 and DT90353 are cleared to 0 0 V 24 V DC OES FP X Tr type Home return start Pulse output CW osa Home input JUUL Pulse output CCW Motor driver side Near home sensor Home sensor Program MS R911D R52 R50 pg ee en Hor m Pasitioning operation running R50 ee R50 R5 PEE EEE Hor ap Positioning operation start R51 Positioning data table FI DMV H1120 DT200 Control code H1120 Fi omv K200 oT202 Initial speed DT204 p Fi omv K100 DT204 przos_ Max speed asii Acceleration time 150 ms Lr DMV K 150 DT 209 J Deviation counter clear output Not used Fi omv Ko 0T 208 Control code 1120 Duty 144 2495 T AS Hz to 100 KHz Horre return twi F171 SPDH DT 200 Ki F Ranne T Pulse output instruction o Home return The data table headed by DT200 is used dsp Gata table output fre 7Y Hi is used and pulses are ou rom o R9110 R50 TO R52 eee Hor Hro MW H 1ii DT 90052 Near home deceleration start Fo MY H1100 DT 90052 Pulse output diagram Mear home sensor Home sensor x6 ON x5 ON x3
469. rd is 2 digits put 2 spaces and if it is 3 digits put one space Note If there are any units that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem e The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs e The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link e f a short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1T1 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms Note Enter one space after
470. rds C14 300 samples C30 C60 1000 samples All comments including I O comments explanatory notes interlinear comments can be stored Backup battery is not necessary 328 kbytes PLC link function Max 16 ants vas relay 1024 points link ceisler 128 wOIgS Data transmission and remote programming is not possible Sampling trace Single phase 8 chs High speed 4 chs medium speed 4 chs 2 phase 4 chs High speed 2 chs medium speed 2 chs With high speed single phase 1 ch 100 kHz 2 chs 80 kHz Single phase 8 chs or 2 phase 4 chs 3 chs 60 kHz Input of main 4 chs 50 kHz unit With single phase 8 chs 10 kHz each with 2 phase 4 chs 5 kHz each With high speed 2 phase 1 ch 35 kHz mgt SPEEN 2 chs 25 kHz counter Note3 Note4 With medium speed single phase 4 chs 10 kHz each With Medium speed 2 phase 2 chs 5 kHz each C14 Single phase 2 chs 2 phase 1 ch C30 C60 Single phase 4 chs 2 phase Pulse I O 2 chs when 2 cassettes are installed oe Pulse I O cassette cannot be installed sae a With single phse 2 chs 80 kHz each 7 i 2 phase 1 ch 30 kHz with single phase 4 chs 50 kHz each 2 phase 2 chs 25 kHz each Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net a a Transistor aia aR 5 am RE 2 chs mE speed 1 ch C30 C60 4 chs High speed 2 chs medium speed 2 chs Pulse output PWM output Note4 Pulse catch input
471. rea read and write as well as many other commands System register settings of FP series PLCs FPO side In the default settings the COM port is set not to be used For 1 1 general purpose serial communication the system registers should be set as shown below Communication format settings for FP series PLC FPO side No Name Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode for COM port Computer link Communication format for COM port Data length 8 bits Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist Note These settings should be the same as the settings of the connected FP X No 414 Baud rate setting for COM port 19200 bps Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Connection to FP series PLCs FPO lt Using AFPX COM1 gt 1 channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port side FP X side 5 pin terminal 3 pin fenninal RO Receive Data RD Tos carto Sena cS a lt Using AFPX COM2 gt 2channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port FPO COM port side FP X side 5 pin terminal 3 pin terminal FRI Receive Data RD R2__ Receive Data2 RD To other device lt Using AFPX COM4 gt Combination of 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C type Connection with FPO COM port To other device FP X side 5 pin term
472. red output Combined with a commercially available motor driver the function enables positioning control With the exclusive instruction you can perform trapezoidal control home return and JOG operation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net PWM output function Pulse I O cassette When you increase the pulse width By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output AAA function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio Heating increases When you decrease it 10 1 3 Performance of Pulse I O Function Heating decreases Number of Channel High speed counter Pulse output Built in Control unit m Dadees cn snnelarah None 2 phase 4 channels Max single phase 4 dii Being anon channels and 2 phase 2 Max 2 channels channels a Single phase 2 channels or Note1 5 When using C14 2 phase T channel 1 channel Note When one unit is added for C14 and 2 units are added for C30 and C60 Pulse I O cassette Counting range e K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary e The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there y Vax vabe Note When the linear interpolation ins
473. registers 6 to 13 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 3 Operation mode setting on error System registers 20 23 and 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 4 Time settings System registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 5 MEWNET W0 PC PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 55 and 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET WO0 PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 6 Input settings System registers 400 to 405 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 7 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication 8 Input time constant settings System registers 430 to 433 Changing the input signal width to be loaded enables to prevent the malfunctions caused by chattering or noises Phone 800 894 0412
474. remental counting Designate a value smaller than the current value g Key Point The FP X supports two operation modes for JOG operation one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging operation feed no target value specified Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table as long as execution condition is on Data table Pulse output diagram X3 JOG ON rt TC DT300 X DT301 Control code H1110 command OFF ee Frequency 300 Hz 300Hz Y100 Pulse OHZ Output stops when target value is reached A target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation As shown below this mode is selected in the control code and the target value an absolute value is specified in the data table Data table Pulse output diagram DT300 KO X3 JOG ON pT301 Control code H 11110 command OFF DT302 w ana L AT303 Frequency 300 Hz re ee Target value K 1000 Y100 Pulse A A Target value matching Pulse stopping Li Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program JOG operation Plus direction While X3 is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CW output Y100 of the specified channel CHO Program Data table X3 oF JALE My Hao Bta F1 DMV K 300 DT 302 Frequency speed 300 Hz
475. rent models Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 3 P13 ICWT Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built in ROM F ROM data area of the FP X control unit using the P13 ICWT instruction However note the followings for the use 1 Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times If writing continues for more than that the correct operation cannot be guaranteed 2 The power supply turns off when the P13 ICWT instruction is being executed If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed the hold type area may not be kept Also when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode the same event may occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 4 Analog Potentiometer 12 4 1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer The FP X is equipped with two analog potentiometers four for C60 only as a standard feature Turning the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 to DT90044 within a range of KO to K1000 Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the programming tool so this can be used for example with analog clocks to change the set value externally by turning the potentiometer BAUN PROG BEAR OTCLLLL
476. rite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode Rewrite procedure Operation of each instruction OT KP High level instructions MC MCE CALL SUB RET INT IRET Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is executed online the program will be rewritten Blocka Block b If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held When writing MC MCE instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction An interrupt program is an program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact r
477. rite of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC1S Target value match on F167 CH1R Target value match off Incremental DT90316 DIT90318 Medium speed Note1 These values are available only when the conditions of each item such as counting method or No of channels are executed These values are not available if executing the HSC match ON OFF instruction other pulse I O process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Pulse output function Pulse output when using CPU output Max Con Elapsed output trol value frequency Note2 flag area Channel No R911C DT90348 DT90350 1CH DT90349 DT90351 100kHz R911D DT90352 DT90354 2CH DT90353 DT90355 100kHz DT90356 DT90358 es DT90357 DT90359 DT90360 DT90362 heated DT90361 DT90363 DT90348 DT90350 Linear DT90353 DT90355 interpolation f DT90356 DT90358 l m DT90361 DT90363 Related instructions FO MV high speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F171 SPDH trapezoidal control home return F172 PLSH JOG operation F174 SPOH Data table control F175 SPSH Linear interpolation control Note1 For C14 Y4 or Y5 For C30 C60 Y8 or Y9 Note2 These values are available only when the conditions of each item such as output method or No of channels are executed These values are not a
478. roller input time constant setting 4 X18 to X1B Controller input time constant setting 4 X1C to X1F Note1 These settings are available for the FP X V2 0 or later None tant Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP X The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction WR900 FP X Address R9000 Self diagnostic error Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs flag The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 R9001 Application cassette Turns on when an error is detected in the I O type application R9002 I O error flag cassette Application cassette l l MRI R9003 abnormal error flag Turns on when an error is detected in the application cassette R9004 aaa free Turns on when an I O verification error occurs Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system register No 4 has been set not to inform the battery error Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Turns on when the battery has run out even if the system register No 4 has been set not to inform the battery error Once a battery error has been detected this is held even after recovery has been made It goes off if the power supply is turned off
479. rom 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps No 416 for COM1 port No 418 for COM2 port Starting address for data received No 417 for COM1 port No 419 for COM2 port Buffer capacity setting for data received To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 416 no 418 for COM2 port and the volume number of words using no 417 no 419 for COM2 port The receive buffer layout is shown below buffer The number of Starting area specified a in system register no received bytes 416 no 418 is stored here The number of words Received data gt specified in system storage area register no 417 no 419 The system register in parenthesesrefer to COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 4 2 Communication with External Devices Programming example of general purpose serial communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port F159 MTRN F144 TRNS instruction is not available with the FP X F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent and received via the specified COM port RO S n D es H FiS9MTRN DT100 K8 K1 _ f Serial data communication Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes are sent from the COM1 port K1 Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices
480. ror flag COM1 port reception done flag during Turns on when the terminator is received during general general purpose serial purpose serial communication communication COM1 port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication TOOL port reception done flag during general purpose communication TOOL port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication Note R9030 to R903F can be changed during 1 scan Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR904 FP a ee a ae Goes on when the general purpose serial R9040 TOOL port mode flag communication is used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used Goes on when the general purpose serial R9042 COM2 port mode flag communication is used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used R9043 Notused e O Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not for the COM1 port COM1 port SEND RECV Off None of the above mentione
481. rotect error the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Address error Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that error cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 0 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 17 174 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same i control error time as a command being processed External memory error No program error and No data error 167 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Ses Monit
482. rotect mode There are two types of passwords as below e 4 digit password 4 characters of 16 characters that are 0 to 9 and A to F can be used e 8 digit password A maximum of 8 English one byte characters case sensitive and symbols can be used 2 Upload protection Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FP X by setting that the program is not uploaded As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the programming tool will be unperformable it ensures higher security 3 Password protect function and upload protection for FP memory loader Those functions are available only when using the FP X V2 5 or later FP memory loader V2 0 or later and FPWIN GR V2 8 or later and when setting a 8 digit password a A Reference lt 11 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader gt The state of the security can be checked at two displays of the programming tool FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Security information or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following displays will be shown Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box Security information Untitlel Set PLO Password Untitlel FLE Home ome Settings j Current status Password is not set Close Upload Available Available
483. s Setting of FP2 ET LAN unit oe o value Setting value ran I oo o method ee aa Open method SY method Activeopena eee open Application in which connection is used General purpose communication Transparent Eo enn Source node Source node port No S No l Arbitrary Destination node IP address IP address of the destination FP X Destination node port No 9094 can be changed Reference For information of the setting method of FP2 ET LAN unit lt FP2 ET LAN Unit Manual gt lt FP2 ET LAN Unit Manual Additional Version gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of FP X 1 FP X System register setting No 412 Computer link mode 2 Setting of AFPX COM5 Setting value Communication protocol TCP Computer link Source port No 9094 Timeout JO UDP IP can be used for the communication method In that case change the communication method of the FP2 ET LAN unit to UDP IP Set the communication protocol of the AFP COM5 to UDP and set the send type to UNICAST Note For MEWTOCOL master function of the FP2 ET LAN unit MEWTOCOL COM is not available For communicating with the FP X by the computer link transmit the MEW TOCOL COM data format using the transparent communication on the FP2 ET LAN unit In this case an exclusive header is not required for the ET LAN unit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautoma
484. s Master Ends the master control program control relay end Master MC Starts the master control program control E m nH relay pan control area T The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there Auxiliary The program jumps to the label jump instruction specified by S and continues from there Label The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only Q Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Bee _ Oo i Ta aeiee eee Indicates me end of a main program gee e ogee fe ololofolo the trigger turns on E mrene feele Paa E
485. s Each Ts 5 11 43 16 43ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 32 64 x 4 407 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pcm 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation example 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 1 1 x 4 31 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms Note e In the description stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on e Comparing examples 2 and 3 t
486. s 24 V DC and the temperature is 25 C Max off voltage Max off current Circuit diagram XO to X3 From X4 xn Internal circuit Internal circuit COM X4 to X7 R1 5 1kKQ R2 3kQ From X8 R1 5 6kQ R2 1kQ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Reference lt 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 4 Output Specifications 2 4 1 Relay Ry Type Relay output specifications For C14R C30R C60R control units Description C14 C30 C60 Insulation method Relay insulation Output type 1a output Relay cannot be replaced Note 2A 250V AC 2A 30 VDC Rated trol it caida each 6 A or less common 8 A or less common Output points per common 1 point common 2 points common 3 points common 4 points common Response time opie Elis P Approx 8 ms 20 million times or more Frequency of switching 180 times min Lifetime 100 thousand times or more Frequency of switching at the rated control Electrical bees capacity 20 times min Surge absorber Operating mode indicator LED display Note1 Resistance load Circuit diagram Internal circuit Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Cl Reference lt 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiau
487. s 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM Fort Cancel Initialize Help No 410 for COM1 port No 411 for COM2 port unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on Y and select Computer Link No 413 for COM1 port No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit cise cievene cis 8 bits Parity aaan Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header 008 STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on Y and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Restrictions The COM port of the communication cassette supports all the commands of the MEWTOCOL COM There is no restriction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 3 2 1 1 Communication Computer link System register settings Settings for COM1 port AFP COM1 AFPX COM2 AFPX COM3 AFPX COM5 No CName Set Value No 410 Unit number COM1 port No 412 Communication mode COM
488. s an address of eee memory area and constants modifier Memory area Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net a area available for use C30 Master control MCR MC No of labels LBL No of step No of subroutines 500 subroutines SUB No of interrupt Ry type 14 input programs 1 periodical program programs Tr type 8 input programs 1 periodical program INT Decimal K 32 768 to K32 767 for 16 bit operation eens HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation constants H HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation Floating point type F Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R2480 WR248 to R255F WR255 data registers 55 words C14 DT12230 to DT12284 C30 C60 DT32710 to DT32764 Writing is available up to 10000 times Then the optional battery is used all area can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note3 The points for the
489. s an image processing device or a bar code reader e Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of an FP X program and the FP X data registers Image processing device Sending data using F159 MTRN s Data is sent by transferring the data to Data register DT a data register and then transmitting it FP X using the F159 MTRN instruction _ _ Ea me gt a Bar code reader WZ f ije A AN p g Se sd Receiving data wer A ITT Data is received by transferring the data NY a _ from the COM port to the data register ee CL ff Ba specified in the system register as the 7N receive buffer and then being stored Print there automatically LL Sending and receiving data with the external devices is carried out via the data register Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the FP and an external device Sending data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT When F159 MTRN is executed the data is output from the COM port Data Data register DT Data transmission using e The terminator specified in the system writing
490. s in the PROG mode R9094 R9095 Turns on when Unit No 6 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode R9096 Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode R9093 Turns on when Unit No 4 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode R9097 MEWNET WO Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode PC PLC link Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode R9098 1 operation mode relay Turns on when Unit No 5 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode R9099 Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode R909A Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode R909B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode er a or pA Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net WR910 FP X Address N
491. s noise The inherent noise resistance is sufficient for the noise superimposed on the power wires however the noise can be attenuated further by using the isolation transformer Also twist the power supply cables to minimize adverse effects from noise Grounding Ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e For grounding purposes use wiring with a minimum of 2 mm7 The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive ground for each device O CORRECT X INCORRECT Other device Inverter ete Other device Inverter etc Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 5 2 DC Power Supply Wiring of power supply Separate the wiring systems to the control unit and the I O devices Insulated DC power supply The wire should be 2mm AWG14 or larger and twisted Power supply terminal supplies 24 V DC Earth terminal Grounding Confirm that the power supply voltage is within the allowable range of the power supply Rated input voltage fu ower e votage amplitude range 24 VDC 20 4 to 28 8 VDC IES Note Using the power supply of the outlying voltage or using ina
492. s or less External power supply YOtov7 FYB toVD _ ____ and terminals Current E16 65mAorless o lt o Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Circuit diagram Output indicator LED AN H terminal i I Outpt terminal External a power 3 Load a power g SHR PF T supply S S 24V DC 2 J terminal c O 00o ol Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 2 4 Terminal layout AFPX E16R Input terminal Relations between the output terminals and COM terminals Yi c Y CTi Y2 to Y4 C2 Y5 to Y7 C3 Output terminal AFPX E16T AFPX E16P Input terminal Input terminal o Moo I W a o i OI OF Gy GF 0 ol ol o lol ol ol ol _ com com x1 x3 x5 x7 COM COM _ com coml x1 x3 x5 xz J COM COM ncj ya y3 ys yz Nc yol y2i yal yel Power supply for YO to YT Ld Not used Output terminal Not used Output terminal AFPX E16X AFPX E14YR Output terminal com COM x1 x3 x5 x7 COM COM X0 X4 X6 Relations between the output terminals and COM terminals Yi C YO Ci COM COM X9 XB gt XD XF Y2 to 4 C2 Y5 to Y7 C3 YE to YA C4 YB to YD C5 Input terminal Not
493. s range At this point make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type and that multiple types of cables are not being used e Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap A Example For the specifications range of the transmission cables lt 5 8 1 Selection of Transmission Cables gt 13 2 10 Expansion Unit does not Operate Procedure 1 Check if the terminal setting is specified for the expansion unit Check if the terminal setting is specified for multiple expansion units Procedure 2 Check if the expansion FPO adapter is installed at the last position When the expansion FPO adapter is installed at the last position the terminal setting for other expansion unit is not necessary Procedure 3 Check if the power supply has turned on and off in a short time such as momentary power failure There is a possibility that the expansion unit has not been recognized due to the occurrence of momentary power failure Turn off and on the power supply again Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 11 A Communication Error has Occurred through Ethernet Condition No communication with Ethernet port of Ethernet 1 channel type RS232C AFPX COM5 Procedure 1 Check if the LAN cable is securely connected to each unit or a PC When using a HUB for the connect
494. s the target channel value of S 1 S specification QO Available X Not available A Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 V2 3 or later and FP e 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for FP Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH Eoo O d Description lean peran p Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S High speed HC1R n S Yn counter output reset with channel specification Positioning S n Outputs a positioning pulse from control with the specified output YO or Y1 channel according to the contents of the specification data table beginning at S Pulse output with PLS S n Outputs a pulse from the channel specified output YO or Y1 WM specification according to the contents of the data table beginning at S PWM output with P S n Performs PWM output from the channel specified output YO or Y1 specification according to the contents of the data table beginning at S High speed counter Pulse output instru
495. se index register modifies the address of data register DTO If data in 10 is too large it will exceed the addressable range of the data register The last address of the data register is DT32764 so if the contents of I0 exceeds 32764 an operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of lO are a negative value 2 Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD e BIN data conversion lt Example gt When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO H F81 BIN DTO DT100 In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 1244 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result lt Example gt When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted RO H F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation error will occur 3 Check if the divisor of a division instruction is 0 lt Example gt RO H F32 DTO DT100 DT200 In this case if the content of DT100 is 0 an operation error will occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 14 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions using the leading edge detection operation DF leading edge differential instructions Count input for CT counter instructions Count input for F118 UDC up down coun
496. se catch rupt settings input Pulse ich XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 settings ee controterinput _ J in Not set l put as The pressed contact is set for the interrupt settings input XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Interrupt Leadingedge edge setting beading edg XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 for controller Trailing edge Cia Cini input The pressed contact is up and set to trailing edge Note1 If CHO CH2 CH4 and CH6 of the high speed counter is set to the two phase input individual input or incremental decremental control input the settings of CH1 CH3 CH and CH7 will be invalid Note2 Only CHO and CH2 are available for the reset input of the high speed counter X6 for CHO and X7 for CH2 can be allocated Note3 X4 to X7 can be used as the home input of the pulse output CHO to CH3 When using the home return function of the pulse output always set the home input In that case X4 to X7 cannot be set as the high speed counter Note4 When using the pulse output PWM output the controller output settings must be specified The output that has been set to the pulse output PWM output cannot be used as the normal output Noted If the same input has been set to the high speed pulse catch and interrupt input simultaneously the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch Interrupt input Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiaut
497. se input XO B phase input x4 Reset input X6 w ON and OFF output Yn p The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified as arbitrary output of the main unit or add on cassette Reference lt 9 2 1 Table of Specifications gt lt 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions gt 9 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction F0 e This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction e Counter software reset bitO e Counting operation enable disable bit1 e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F167 e Clear target value match interrupt Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO In case of CH1 X7 X7 HDF FO MV H 1 DT90052 H DF Fo Mv H 1001 DT90052 Fo MV HO DT90052 F0 MV H 1000 DT90052 In the above program the reset is performed in step 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset counting will not be performed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation n
498. se should be attached externally Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 6 Tool Port and USB Port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 1 Tool Port and USB Port QRKARLMARLQOQAQQW BE 2 ee JG O 2oganoso port C307 C60 O anoano o Tool port RS232C D poose JQ ZIS CROVSSOSOSE ae Tool port RS232C This port is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit PinNo Signalname __ Abbreviation Signal direction Signal Ground SGP Send Data Unit External device 3 Receive Data RD__ Unit External device 4 _ Notused re ee i a Unit gt External device The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory Baud rate 9600 bps Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity Stop bit length 1 bit USB connector i This is a connector to connect the programming tool Commercial USB cables AB type can be used The connector is the commercial B type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 2 Functions of T
499. settings counter are effective if the Hold type area starting number O to 1024 optional backu l 1008 p p setting for timer and counter battery is 7 Hold type area starting number 248 0 to 256 installed setting for internal relays e If no backup Hold type area starting number C14 12230 ae g C30 C60 0 to 32765 setting for data registers 39710 Hold or non hold setting for step Non hold Hold ladder process Non hold battery is used do not change the default settings Otherwise proper functioning of hold non hold values cannot be guaranteed Previous value is held for a Hold aoe Non hold leading edge detection instruction DF instruction with MC Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 0 link relays Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 1 link relays Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 0 link registers Hold type area starting number for PC PLC WO 1 link registers Disable or enable setting for Disabled duplicated output Operation setting when an I O a de Stop verification error occurs Operation setting when an l Stop operation error occurs 64 0 to 64 128 64 to 128 128 0 to 128 256 128 to 256 Disabled Enabled Stop Continuation of operation Stop Continuation of operation When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is not issued and the ERROR ALARM LED does not flash Action on error Alarm battery error Disabled Operating setti
500. simulta neously on 44 55 Ambient temperature C 2 5 7 Transistor Tr Type PNP Stand alone and With AFPX COM5 Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points simultaneous output on points AFPX C14P AFPX C60PD Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 45 55 Ambient temperature C C30P Number of 46 points per 44 common which are simulta neously on 48 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 32 points per common which are 18 simulta neously on a5 55 Ambient temperature C C14PD Number of points per common which are simulta 5 neously on 49 55 Ambient temperature C C30PD Number of 16 points per common which are simulta neously on 51 55 Ambient temperature C C60PD Number of 32 points per common which are 1 simulta neously on 43 55 Ambient temperature C Configuration Stand alone COM5 Number of points per common Which are simulta neously on 3 45 55 Ambient temperature C C30P Number of points per 14 common 12 which are simulta neously on 48 55 Ambient temperature C C60P Number
501. size 0O 0to128words _ 57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 16 1 to 16 PC PLC link Note The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC PLC link Link area configuration word word o For PC link 0 L for 1024 points 1st half For PC link 0 LD for 128 words ist half 127 128 For PC link 1 L for 1024 points 2nd half For PC link 1 LD for 128 words 2nd halt 200 For link relay For link register e Link areas consist of link relays and link registers and are divided into areas for PC PLC link 0 and PC PLC link 1 and used with those units e The link relay which can be used in an area for either PC PLC link O or PC PLC link 1 is maximum 1024 points 64 words and the link register is maximum 128 words Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 Reference For the information on FP2 MCU lt Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Example of allocation The areas for PC PLC link are divided into send areas and receive areas The link relays and link registers are sent
502. ssette ccesccseseseeseeeeeseneeeneeeneseneseneeees 10 51 1i SOCURITY FUNCIONS seii aa Oa 11 1 1I Type OF Sec rnty FUNCOM S sviiscidesraoiada tc co ace ieaie Ea 11 2 11 2 Password Protect FUNCHON wiccetececececesacavececetacetedesacecevsacucacadscasecacecactenenaaeaanceaestaceies 11 3 MAD Upload Protec OM eiacsecat cate dedarncndncs tucuexcwauuearcuedgietedutedad cdavedatedetdeutdeat dautegessmeaawecdues 11 7 11 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loadet cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeneeees 11 9 11 5 Table of Security Settings Cancel cccceseecsseeceseeceneeeneeseneeseneeseneeseneeseneesens 11 13 12 Other FUNCHONS diiisentscenatenesenshetennwstawsesweteusueastoundeatsteasevaikusadenabewadeeebeuals 12 1 12 1 Transfer Function between Memo ries c cccssccsecceeceeeseeenseneeeneseescnesenseeeeoaes 12 2 12 2 Function of Master Memory Cassette ccccsseecsseeceseeceneeceeseeeseseneesensesenneseaees 12 3 123 PLS IG W1 ANS UG ULO IN isisao roaa aaa aaa ae Eiana 12 8 12 4 ANAlOG Potentio metet ovis siscisicciccsciccecicinsievieissississisnecsciccccestusedentstuslsdustudashucesusesncenuseeesweshesseusees 12 9 129 Samping hae FUNC ONG ciscnncevecencaesercosoeecenccencadeuueds sucess EAA 12 10 12 6 Time Constant Processing di viissicnecwwsvewsversevecsevcwosveweevacuesecasusesscusaassasssesssvsusssesaxnstas 12 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Emai
503. steps Af 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz At 300 ms 60 steps 5 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration time For specifying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms 2 No of steps x 1000 Initial speed fO Hz Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 Control code lt H constant gt H OOOOOOUO0 B Number of acceleraton deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps E Duty on width O Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz E Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CVWCCV 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CVWWICCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Speed Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range O 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHZ approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 3 KHz
504. t 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set 3rd unit Unit no 3 is set Ath unit Unit no 4 is set A largest unit no of 4 is set for each Nth unit Unit no n is set A largest unit no of n is set for each Cad note e Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer e If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest unit number in system register no 47 in system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 e For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set for the largest unit number e f there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set default 16 or the largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive or the unit number settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PC PLC link the link transmission cycle will be longer gt ia Reference lt 7 5 5 PC PLC Link Response Time gt Setting PC PLC link switching flag PC PLC link switching flag can be set using system register no 46 If it is set to O default value the first half of the link relays and registers are used If it is set to 1 the second half of the link relays and registers are used First half WLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 is used Second half
505. t The values of DT50 and DT51 are written in DTO and 1 of PLC 8 spaces F71 HEXA DT50 K4 DT 160 J F112 WBSR DT151 DT164 F159 MTRN DT150 K27 K1 R20 a a S DF F95 ASC M X 01 WDD0000 DT 151 F95 ASC M 000001XXXXXX DT 15y F95 ASC M XX DT 163 F112 WBSR DT151 DT164 R9038 R21 t 0 R21 DT202 H2431 R22 H DF l J R21 I pF F159 MTRN DT150 KO K1 Shifted for 1 byte to execute the HEX ASCII conversion instruction F71 easily DT151 DT151 DT152 DT152 DT153 DT153 DT154 DT154 F112 instruction DT155 Shift to right for 2 DT155 digits DT156 DT156 _ DT157 DT157 DT 158 DT158 DT159 DT159 DT160 ASCII code is inserted DT160 DT161 for the value of DT50 DT161 DT162 ASCII code is inserted DT162 DT163 for the value of DT51 DT163 DT 164 DT 164 When K100 HO064 is in DT50 and K200 HOOC8 is in DT51 Normal response 01 WDOOSR BCC Abnormal response 01 OOUO0 R pr Error code Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 4 4 1 N Communication General purpose Serial Communication Overview The FP X and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data Data register DT Data transmission using F159 MTRN Data is received into recei
506. t 2 p eiae elele instruction i tl or A romali oper contan fatale folate serially 2 a ee Connects a Form B normally closed contact serially FP2SH FP10SH FPO FP e Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel Connects a Form B normally closed contact in parallel Leading YRICL Begins a logic operation only for one scan edge ee when the leading edge of the trigger is start detected Trailing Begins a logic operation only for one scan edge yp when the trailing edge of the trigger is start detected Leading l l Connects a Form A normally open contact XYRTCLPE edge te serially only for one scan when the leading AND edge of the trigger is detected Trailing wTCria tT Connects a Form A normally open contact edge ANY h oti serially only for one scan when the trailing AND edge of the trigger is detected Leading Connects a Form A normally open contact edge OR ORT ikd a in parallel only for one scan when the leading edge of the trigger is detected Trailing Connects a Form A normally open contact edge OR aN a tf ae in parallel only for one scan when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading Outputs the operated result to the specified edge out qe output only for one scan when leading edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing Outputs the operated result to the specified output only for one scan when trailing edge of the trigger is detected for pulse relay
507. t expansion FPO adapter using the expansion cable 2 Installs the add on cassette to the cassette mounting part of the FP X control unit 3 1 1 Expansion Using the Expansion Cable For the FP X the FP X expansion unit and the FPO expansion unit expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFPO is necessary can be used by using the exclusive expansion cable MQQOQLLLQQQLET QOOOOCEWOEOGE oE oH FF X E30 DOCQWOCQOCWQOWUE pew _ OQESSOSEOSEId Control unit Expansion unit Expansion unit Up to 8 units can be connected CARQQQ T WOOO SSEB PERRE Up to 7 Control unit expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion I O units can FPO unit 4 unit 3 be connected adapter Expansion unit 2 Note Only one expansion FPO adapter can be installed at the last position of the FP X expansion bus It should be installed at the right hand side of the AFPX E16 and E30 Up to seven FP X expansion I O units can be also installed between the control unit and the expansion FPO adapter However there are restrictions on E14 E16 ba S Reference lt 1 3 1 Restrictions on FP X Expansion Unit gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 2 FP X Expansion Unit 3 2 1 Parts and Functions FP X E16 exapansion I O unit DIN standard rail attachment QQOLQQQQQ _ PLEOEQS COgE DIN standard
508. t PLC Date and Time dialog box shown at the left Input the date and time and click on the OK button Setting and changing using program 1 The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calendar setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to HOOOO Do not always write H8000 Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on XO a a ae ae ae a a MR le aliens a E Fo mv H512 DT 90055 Inputs 12th hour 5th day oe D LL GD LL GD gt lt i lt i EN 4 Fo mv H8000 DT 90058 Set the time amm e m o eee ees ees es ma eZ Note No values have been set in the default settings so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values Example showing the clock calendar being used Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calendar function is used to output YO signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time R9010 Feo CMP DT90053 H830 f Data comparison instruction 1 The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour 1 _ minute data
509. t contact number used Devi counter clear output dence 3 CH1 Y200 Y201 Y202 X202 ue lt bit4 gt Linear oe ee ae i Y200 Y201 Max output frequency Using two chs Max 80 kHz Related instructions FO MV high speed counter control F171 SPDH trapezoidal control nome return F172 PLSH JOG operation F174 SPOH Data table control Pulse output function ation CHO Y100 Y101 Y102 X102 Indepen Note Note Using one ch Max 100 kHz F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F175 SPSH Linear interpolation control Control flag R911D Memory area used Elapsed value area DT90348 DT90349 DT90352 DT90353 DT90348 DT90349 DT90352 DT90353 DT90350 DT90351 DT90354 DT90355 DT90350 DT90351 DT90354 DT90355 Note2 wall Reference For DT90052 see lt 10 4 4 Pulse Output Control Instruction FO F1 gt Note3 When using the AFPX PLS only PWM output function PWM output when using pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS High Memory area speed used Control flag Output contact No used Output frequency counter duty channel When resolution 1000 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz 0 0 to 99 9 When resolution 100 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz 0 to 99 Y100 R911C Y200 R911D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F173 PWMH PWM output 888 7
510. t output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing and counting will not take place during control e The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Operation during operation For small sized PLCs FPO FP1 FP and FP X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of operation However as the R or Y is set reset again right before the peripheral service as the above procedure C the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value For medium sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction the value of the forced processing has a priority When rewritten by a high level instruction the result of the instruction has a priority Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 15 Specifications Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 15 1 Table of Specifications 15 1 1 General Specifications tem Description 0 to 55 C 40 to 70 C 10 to 95 RH at25 C non condensing Storage humidit 10 to 95 RH at25 C non c
511. t the frequency 1 which is Initial speed to 30 kHz or less However for the medium speed channels CH2 and CH3 of the Tr type it can be set to a maximum of K20000 Hz 2 Target value K 214 483648 to K214 48364 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range Indicated in the table below specification of control code Range of allowable Operation mode Output method target values Incremental counting Specifies a positive value Incremental Decremental counting Specifies a negative value le tal ti Specifies a value larger nerementa counting than the current value Absolute Specifies a value smaller Decremental counting than the current value Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation e The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table R11 LDF F1 DMV H1000 DTS00 F1 DMV K500 DT502 F1 DMV K5000 DT504 Fi DMV K300 DT506 F1 DMV K5000 DT508 F1 DMV K2000 DT510 F175 SPSH DT500 KO Aes Note Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis CH1 so that the composite speed is an initial speed of 500 Hz the maximum speed is 5000 Hz and the acceleration deceleration time is 300 ms The two axes are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the target posi
512. t up sequence e To ensure and ease the power supply sequence of the expansion FPO adapter supply the power for the expansion FPO adapter from the servicing power supply for the input of the FP X control unit e The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FPO expansion unit is turned on before the FP X system power supply e The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the FP X system and FPO expansion unit is turned off before the input output power supplies If the input output power supplies are turned off before the power to the expansion FPO adapter the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation When turning on Power supply for FPO Power supply for FP X Expansion FPO adapter Power supplies for I O devices When turning off Power supply for FP X Expansion FPO adapter Power supply for FPO Power supplies for I O devices Grounding In situations of excess noise Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 100Q e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an exclusive
513. tall the driver when the USB connection does not work well Confirming the status of the USB driver 1 Display Device manager Reference lt 6 3 7 Confirming COM Ports gt 2 If CP210X USB to UART Bridge Controller is indicated in Other devices or Unknown device the installation of the USB driver has been failed Device Manager File Action View Help m e a MATSUSHI 50P910 F Computer See Disk drives a Display adapters 4 DVDICD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives IDE ATALATAPT controllers Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Monitors BB Network adapters Gh Other devices Gi CP2101 USB to UART Bridge Controller 7 Ports COM amp LPT Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers Reinstallation of the USB driver Right click CP210X USB to UART Bridge Controller and select Delete to delete the driver Reinserting the USB cable displays the window for the installation of the USB driver Reinstall the USB driver Reference lt 6 3 6 Installation of USB Driver gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 10 Restrictions on USB Communication There are restrictions on the USB communication e A personal computer having the USB and with the OS supporting the USB Windows 98 Second Edition Windows Me Wind
514. tarted in the above procedure 1 or 2 on the time chart display of FPWIN GR The data will be indicated in the time chart Stop monitoring Stop with the A button stop by the Trigger Break in the menu or stop by the F156 instruction FPWIN GR Ea Read Trace data Sure Read Sample Trace Window Reading sample trace data Please wait for a while 15000 peers 11250 7500 3750 Sy ar Reference lt FPWIN GR Help gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 12 6 Time Constant Processing The input time constants for 32 points of the CPU input XO to X1F can be set by the system registers 430 to 437 If this setting is specified an operation like the equivalent circuit below will be performed By the setting the noises or chattering of input will be removed CXn Input signal of Xn contact Xn Image memory of input Xn Timer processing Setting value System S register setting value CXn ie Timer processing Setting value System 1 R register setting value r hare e The input signal of X contact is retrieved at the timing of the normal I O update e f the partial update instruction is executed for the input in the time constant processing the time constant processing will be invalid and the input status at the time will be read out and set e The time constant processing can be performe
515. ted Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net With Windows 2000 Windows Me After a PC recognized the USB driver the installation is started automatically You do not need to carry out operation for the installation particularly Note that the messages during the installation are not indicated With Windows 98 Second Edition 1 After the connection the PC recognizes the USB driver automatically As the following message is shown click Next Add New Hardware Wizard Next Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 Check only Specify a location and input the following folder name in Specify a location c Program Files Panasonic MEW Control FP X USB Uncheck the other boxes and then click Next Add Hew Hardware Wizard a C Program Files Panasonic MEW ControlyFP lt Back Neas Cancel 4 As the next message is shown click Next Add Hew Hardware Wizard Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 The next message is shown and the installation of the USB driver completes Click Finish Add New Hardware Wizard The installation of the USB driver has been completed It is not necessary to install the USB COM conversion driver with Windows 98Second Edition Phone 800 894
516. ted the elapsed value areas DT90348 and DT90349 are cleared to 0 O V 24 V DC FP X Tr type Home return start e CXKA Home input Pulse output CW BoS E Pulse output CCW JUUL Near home input Motor driver side side Motor 4 MAAA AAA AAAY X4 X5 Home sensor Near home sensor Program Ka R91 1C R42 R40 PTERA A EO SE DF p Positioning operation running J R40 ai R40 R41 e a a a HDF Positioning operation start J R41 FI DMV H1121 DT 200 Control code H1124 F1 DMV K200 DT 202 Initial speed 200 Hz FI DMV K 2000 DT 204 Max speed 2000 Fiz Acceleration time 150 ms Fi OM K 150 DT 206 Deviation counter clear output Fi DMV KO DT 208 Conrad code HIT 21 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to100 kHz Home retum COW F171 SPDH DT 200 KO f gt Pulse output instruction 1 Home return The data table headed by DT200 is used The data table headed by DT2ZO0 is used and pulses are output from CHO Pulses are output from CHU ee ee ee x5 DF H Fo MV H 110 DT 90052 Near home deceleration start o FO MV H 100 DT 90052 L J Pulse output diagram Near home sensor Home sensor x ON x5 ON x4 ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz 0 Hz 150 ms 150 ms Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample prog
517. ter instructions Shift input for SR shift register instructions Shift input for F119 LRSR left right shift register instructions NSTP next step instructions Differential execution type high level instruction P13 NOOR WD gt Leading edge detection method e An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on 1 Standard operation ON Trigger fC LL OFF instruction Geman piel Executed every scan 2 Leading edge detection operation Trigger fC Le ON OFF Operation of ON instruction OFF Executed only one time How to perform leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is not executed Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection e When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected The instruction is not executed Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page e When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the instruction may change depending on input t
518. ter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN If a rewrite during RUN is executed the operation as below will be performed Exercise caution 1 Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again lt Example gt Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag ICTL S1 S2 2 The high speed counter will continue to count Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166 F167 instruction is running 3 The pulse output PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed The operation after the completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction Instruction Operation after the completion of number rewriting during RUN Th i f iti F171 SPDH Pulse output Trapezoidal control hio before rewriting F171 SPDH Pulse output Home position return The operation before rewriting continues F172 PLSH Pulse output JOG operation F173 PWMH PWM output l p F174 SPOH Pulse output Selectable data table The operation before rewriting control operation continues F175 SPSH Pulse output Linear interpolation The operation before rewriting continues 4 The fixed time sampling trace will not be stopped Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rew
519. the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program g Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Header STX Terminator ETX Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received a B pS STA D _ E _EP A F yla _SM_ H IER from extemal Cannot be device stored when Reception code is reception deleted by F159 done flag is on MTRN r a ON Reception done i i flag R9038 or OFF R9048 ON Reception done flag is turned off by exe F159 MTRN cuting F159 MTRN instruction ae execution Receive buffer D H E i E ja C G _ Number of lt 0 gt lt i gt lt 0 gt et gt reception bytes l METTE Number of bytes Number of bytes Number of bytes Write pointer received is cleared received is cleared received is cleared when the header is when F159 MTRN when the header is received fi v is exec
520. the communication cassette and master memory cassette Note2 Digital conversion values are KO to 4000 As the resolution is 12 bits upper 4 bits are always 0 Note3 The pulse I O cassette cannot be used with the Tr type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 5 Installation and Wiring Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 1 Installation Be thoroughly familiar with the following contents before using the units to eliminate the causes which occur the failure or malfunction of each unit 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or
521. the linear interpolation function perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one shown below X axis CHO CW direction P1 0 0 P2 10000 0 P3 0 10000 P4 10000 10000 Y axis CH1 CW direction Relay allocation R20 From P1 to P2 start R911D__ Pulse output flag CH1 R21 From P2to P3 stat R22 From P3 to P4 stat R23 From P4 to P1 stat R2F_ Positioning done Data register allocation DTO to DT1 Conrdcod Control code when executing linear interpolation absolute DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz User setting DT4 to DTS Target speed 2000 Hz area for DTG Acceleration de ams linear celeration time interpolation DT8 to DT9 Target position Specify the target position of X axis when moving X axis from P1 P2 gt P3 gt P4 gt P1 Target position Specify the target position of Y axis when moving A from P1 gt P2 gt P3 gt P4 gt P1 Work area DT12 to DT23 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction storage area execution are stored Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Program R9010 0 c row Hoo Do Js Fo mv K200 p2 FOMV D2 D4 FOMV KO ors R9I1C RID RF R20 xi 22 LY DF R911D R20 R20 31 LY oF Fi omv K10000 DTS Fi DMY KO gt poTio j F175 SPSH DTO KO 4 R9L1C R20 R2F R2I 52 DF IS R911
522. the programs to the FP X master memory cassette when the uploading disabling function is specified The protection for programs can be selected from 3 security methods e 4 digit password e 8 digit password e Uploading disabling A full range of communication functions Using the Tool port RS232C provided as a standard feature on the main unit communication can be carried out with a display panel or computer Additionally communication cassettes with RS232C RS485 and Ethernet interfaces are available as an option Installing a 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette in the FP X makes it possible to connect two devices with RS232C port A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1 N communication up to 99 units and PC PLC link function up to 16 units Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FP X When using the 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Display panel Two devices with RS232C port can be connected Device with RS232C port The Tool port can be used to connect a display panel or other device Device with RS232C port 1 N communication possible with up to 99 stations units When using the 1 channel RS485 RS422 type communication cassette When using the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C in combination Computer xe mM i Communication is possible with up to 99 units E FP X FP gt FP2 FP2SH FP X 1 s 1 Po ia T 7 a ia ies N pr i a 4 a E
523. the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Master i i Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave _ 1a w a a a a aa a Iaa 1 gt J Se X S X SB amp ay 4 ae E r Ed po K gt wr E gt eo 2 SHa HTT H Er i os a all LL HF i WAA NYE I HY aU Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 3 Communication Cassettes Po Name Specifications I O No Product No bee 5 wire type peered 4 channel RS232C AFPX COM1 an 3 wire type allel 2 channel RS232C AFPX COM2 FPA 1 channel ae RS485 RS422 isolated EPCs e 1 channel FP X communication Ree PoE AFPX COM4 cassette SOWIE type 1 channel RS232C FP X e Ethernet communication e 3 wire type AFPX COM5 cassette 1 channel RS232C FP X e 2 channel RS485 communication Sorate AFPX COM6 ee non isolated between channels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 channel RS232C Type Product No AFPX COM1 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a non isolated RS232C port RS CS control is possible o88Se RD Receive Data FP X lt External device COM o Eeg oj sao nosso se SignalGrouns Note1 RS
524. ticular take care when connecting a number of switches in series If the input of PLC does not turn off because of ee leakage current from the two wire type sensor Two wire Bleeder p E os type sensor aiie T iiti photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use L com of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Sensor s leakage current mA R Bleeder resistor k9 er The formula is based on an input impedance of The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the 9 6kQ The input impedance varies depending on COM terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 V the input terminal number The input impedance is 5 6 KQ x ee S24 Therefore 5 6 R 13 44 rs 24 kg 5 61 2 4 The wattage W of the resistor is Power supply voltage R In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the W value of W Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch IE If the input of PLC does not turn off because of equipped eder rp x the leakage current from the LED equipped limit limit switch venier switch the use of a bleeder resistor is 3 C recommended as shown below Power supply for input r Internal resistor of limit switch k62 R Bleeder resistor k 2 The off voltage of input is
525. timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting O Q Cc O prar oO ho S u O O Constant Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 16 Dimensions Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 16 1 Dimensions 16 1 1 Control Unit MAFPX C14 lta slerererel _lkagoeoeo ees OPOOISO Wi When installing Add on cassette Application cassette Communication cassette Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Application cassette Communication cassette AFPX COMS 18 6 8 6 Note AFPX COM5 is 5 mm taller than other communication cassettes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net When installing cables __ 60 a 16 1 2 Expansion Unit MAFPX E16 E14 K PIS SS A 90 mm 16 1 3 Expansion FPO Adapter MAFPX EFPO SLS L 2 M4or2 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
526. tion When the program runs the data table and positioning path are as shown below The linear interpolation function can be used in the combination of chO and ch1 or ch2 and ch3 Fositioning data table Control code H 1000 Cui Composite speed initial spe 500 Hz T503 DTE04 Composite speed DT505 Max sp eed 9000 Hz DT506 Acceleration DT507 Deceleration speed 920 ms DT508 Target value DT509 X axis CHO DT510 Target Sue DT511 Y axis CH1 2000 pulses 4 DT512 X axis CHO component speed ar CH DT514 X axis cee component speed DT515 Max spee DT516 Y axis CH1 Tica speed DT517 Initial speed DT518 Y axis CH1 component speed DT519 Max spee DT520 X axis CHO frequency range Y axis CH1 frequency range X axis Fa number of DT522 acceleration A ell raal steps Y axis aul number o acceleration Ideoeleration steps stored here Positioning path Setting area Designated with user program 5000 X axis CHO Tr S417 1 Control code lt H constant gt HOOOOOoOoOoO Operation 0 Fixed result storage area E Duty on width 0 Duty 1 2 50 Parameters for 4 Duty 1 4 25 each axis component 0 Fixed calculated due to instruction Operation mode and output method execution are O0 Incremental CWCCW 0 Incremental pulse and direction forward offireverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on
527. tion net Email info ctiautomation net Connection with GV series via Ethernet Overview Connect the FP X to the GV series via Ethernet Transmission is performed by sending a response from the FP X to the command issued by the GV The operation with a programmable display can be performed only by specifying communication settings for each unit without any program for communication Example of connection Unit No 2 7h IP address 192 168 1 12 yf Listen port No 9094 EA Unit No 3 Te IP address 192 168 1 13 f Listen port No 9094 Command HUB Response Unit No 1 IP address 192 168 1 100 walala alela ee Unit No 4 3 IP address 192 168 1 14 Listen port No 9094 Setting of GV Use the GV Programmable Operator Terminal CVWIN to specify the Ethernet setting for the GV Select FP series Ethernet TCP IP in the dialog box of Select PLC type when creating a new file or select it from PLC Type Setting under System Setting in the menu bar Select PLC Type Panasonic Electric Wor Panasonic Electric Works FP Series RS2399C RSA22 oer IESIM 15422 FP series Ethernet TCP IP FP series Ethernet UDP IP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC OMRON Yokogawa Electric Allen Bradley TOSHIBA MACHINE Siemens LG MARTA KI C Display Multi link2 PLC Display All PLC Cancel Select Unit Setting under System Setting in the
528. tion net Email info ctiautomation net 5 4 How to Install Add on Cassette The add on cassette is fitted with the control unit using the provided screws Note The add on cassette must be secured with the control unit using the screws in the actual use for preventing the affect of vibrations The backup battery option should be before installing the add on cassette The installation must be carried out when the power supply is off If the power supply is on it may cause faults Recommended screw Size and other conditions Quantity Tapping screw Material SW pan head P tight 2 6 16 voes casseite pping galvanization trivalent chromate black P 5 4 1 Installing Communication Cassette ACS Note The communication cassette can be installed only in the cassette mounting part 1 of the control unit Installation on the control unit Connect the connector on the back of the communication cassette and the connector of the cassette mounting part of the control unit and secure the two positions bottom left and top right with the screws It is no problem if the ribs remain AFPX COM5 has no rib The screw s tightening torque should be 0 3 to 0 5 N m Screw securely eS SS Installation on the application cassette Remove the cover of the application cassette that was secured previously Connect the connector on the back of the communication cassette and the connector at the front of the application
529. tion net Email info ctiautomation net Restriction on using the Add on cassette Application cassettes that the version of the FP X control unit is specified FP X Application cassette Version of control unit FP X Analog output cassette AFPX DA2 FP X Analog I O cassette AFPX A21 FP X Thermocouple cassette AFPX TC2 Vel i FP X RTD cassette AFPX RTD2 Application cassettes that have restrictions when more than one units are used simultaneously Current output range Quantity Control unit 1E APRICA OOSA Da ea o T AFPX DA2 AFPX A21 ee A e CAEPX A21 AFPXCOMS Eaht 3 P87 BT ie AFPX A21 AFPX DA2 AFPX COM5 Peach 1 xr AFPX DA2 unit AFPX COM5 1unit E a vie AFPX A21 2units AFPX COM5 unit Note1 Up to 2 channels can be used for the current output range When using two units it is possible to use the 2 ch current output range and 2 ch voltage output range Note2 The AFPX DA2 and AFPX A21 both cannot be used with the AFP COM5 Ethernet Voltage output range When using with the output current of 1 mA or below Quantity Control unit used FP X Application cassette AFPX DA2 AFPX A21 AFPX DA2 AFPX A21 fEacht O O AFPX DA2 AFPX COMS _ Eah1 O O O AFPX A21 AFPX COM5 sf Eacht O O O AFPX A21 AFPX DA2 AFPX COM5 Eacht O O AFPX DA2 1unit AFPX COM5 1unit ae ee a ec ee AFPX A21 2units AFPX COM5 unit a Se Note In the voltage output range whe
530. tion of the program is processed as if RO are on This section of the program is processed as if RO are off This section of the program is processed as If RO are on Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net The output is determined by the final operation results e f the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer functions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the final results of the operation lt Example gt Output to the same output relay YO with OT KP SET and RST instructions x0 YO YO ON X1 YO a S a iaa YO ON X2 YO n A a aa YO OFF When XO to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update e f you need to output a result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 14 2 Handling BCD Data 14 2 1 BCD Data BCD is an acronym for binary coded decimal and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number lt Example gt Expressing a decimal number in BCD Decimal number 6 ral 5 Each digit is converted to a binary BCD 0110 0100 0101 Binary coded decimal 14 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC e When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7 segment dis
531. to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 FP FP X DT90010 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement he uni Check the contents of special data register verify error FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function Intelligent unit error A Available Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Opera tion status System watching dog timer error Slave station connecting Saas time error for MEWNET F system Operation error Description and steps to take Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the
532. tomation net Number of points per common which are simulta neously on 37 40 51 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 46 points per 49 55 Ambient temperature C Number of 32 points per common which ar 4g simulta 12 neously on 11 42 55 Ambient temperature C C14TD No restriction C30TD Number of 16 neously on 49 52 55 Ambient temperature C C60TD Number of 32 points per common which are 18 simulta neously on 11 Ambient temperature C Configuration Number of points per DA2 common A21 which are simulta A21 A21 neously on DA2 DA2 DA2 A21 C30T Number of points per 14 common Which are o simulta neously on Upto 2 channels can be used for the current output 49 55 Ambient temperature C Number of points per 28 common which are simulta 14 neously on 4 4042 55 Ambient temperature C C14TD No restriction C30TD Number of points per 14 common 12 which are simulta L neously on 49 52 55 Ambient temperature C C60TD Number of points per 28 common which are 46 simulta neously on 10 42 55 Ambient temperature C 2 5 6 Transistor Tr Type NPN With AFPX DA2 and A21 Voltage Output Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Product number Limitations on number of _ Lim
533. tomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 4 2 Transistor Tr Type NPN Output specifications C30 C60 nsulation method Output type Rated load voltage Allowable load voltage 4 75 to 26 4 V DC range Max load current Max inrush current Input points per 6 points Common 8 points Common 6 points Common common Off state leakage 1 uA or less current On state voltage drop 0 3 V DC or less 2 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more 20 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or more 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 8 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more 30 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or more 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC YOto Y5 Y7 Y8toYD Y10toY17 Y18 to Y1D 40 mA C14 External power supply or less and terminals Current C30 60 mA 35 mA or less or less C60 60 mA 35 mA 45 mA 35 mA or less or less or less or less Surge absorber Operating mode l indicator apay OFF gt ON Response time at 25 C ON OFF Circuit diagram NPN output XO to X3 From X4 Output indicator LED Output indicator LED AA terminal M terminal Q iil al I l Output terminal Output terminal 4 External power a _ External power S i o Load T supply 5 S ee Load h suppl
534. total check dialog box Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 13 2 7 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS485 Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been correctly connected Procedure 2 Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range At this point make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type and that multiple types of cables are not being used e Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap Example For the specifications range of the transmission cables lt 5 8 1 Selection of Transmission Cables gt 13 2 8 A Communication Error has Occurred through RS232C Condition No communication with 1 channel type RS232C cassette AFPX COM1 2 channel type RS232C cassette AFPX COM2 1 channel RS485 1 channel RS232C cassette AFPX COM4 Ethernet 1 channel RS232C cassette AFPX COM5 2 channel type RS485 cassette AFPX COM6 Procedure 1 Check if the receive data terminal of a connected device is connected to the SD and the send data terminal is connected to the RD Check if the SG is connected Procedure 2 1 Check if the CS signal is on 2 When the CS of the communication
535. truction F175 is used the value for the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 Coded 24 bit binary Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 10 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function High speed counter by the input of the main unit Memory area being used Performance specifications y g Maximum Channel No Control Elapsed Target Minimum input t counting flag value area value area pulse width speed oso SB e gt e mene orso praon DT90312 DT90314 OCE a BE Decremental DT90320 DT90322 se a prenoss DT90324 DT90326 e o e DT90328 DT90330 xr Rot DT90329 DT90331 DT90300 DT90302 X2 DT90308 DT90310 2 phase input X3 DT90309 DT90311 100 us 5 kHz l X4 DT90316 DT90318 X6 DT90324 DT90326 Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC1S Target value match on F167 CH1R Target value match off Note1 Reference For information on minimum input pulse width lt 10 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt Note2 When using the high speed counter of the main unit only Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net High speed counter when using pulse I O cassette AFPX PLS Mem
536. tting to disable the download to the FP X older than V2 5 has not been made Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 4 Version Check List Version check list State of target PLC to be written PLC Password 4digits 8 digits 8 digits moane e norma res roms Pa FP X f PAN Coe ney a l e x Menon adigtoraaigt password faer O O O we Download prohibition to old ver oe anew ta la Download protection to old ver and V2 50 i m e Download permission only for or later ai B Note1 models with same password Homee er wane ee TOAG Download protection to old ver Upload protection or later Note Note Note Note2 8 digit password V2 40 Download protection to old ver and Download permission only for V2 50 x x amp models with same password or later Note5 Note and Upload protection Download possible Download possible only for models with same password Xx Download impossible No target model Note1 Program downloading is not possible for FP memory loader Ver 1 Note2 Upload protection cannot be set for FP memory loader Ver 1 Note3 When downloading programs with 8 digit password FP memory loader Ver 1 will not enter protection state after downloading finishes To enter protection state turn off the power and then turn it on again Note4 The state that the setting has been made not to disa
537. type and Y8 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type lt When using CH2 gt FP X Tr type Home input pe Near home K6 input x100 Driver CW output Y4 Y5 CCW output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input lt When using CH1 gt FP X Tr type Home input Near home XS input x200 i Driver CW output y2 Y3 CCW output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note If the deviation counter clear output function is performed when the home return is done Y5 is used for the C14 Tr type and Y9 is used for the C30 C60 Tr type lt When using CH3 gt C30 C60 Tr type only FP X Tr type Home input 7 Near home input x200 oN Driver CW output Y6 Y7 CCW output Input that is not used for other applications is specified for the near home input Note The deviation counter clear output function is not available for the CH2 and CH3 Reference lt 9 2 1 Table of Specifications gt lt 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Single pulse input driver pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input
538. uble word S2 D the double word data table between data 32 bit the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 F275 Total and S1 The total value and the mean value of P275 mean values S2 D the word data with sign from the area word data 16 selected with S1 to S2 are bit obtained and stored in the D F276 Total and DMEAN S1 The total value and the mean value of P276 mean values PDMEAN S2 D the double word data with sign from i double word the area selected with S1 to S2 data 32 bit are obtained and stored in the D F277 Sort word SORT S1 The word data with sign from the P277 data 16 bit PSORT S2 area specified by S1 to S2 are S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F278 Sort double DSORT S1 The double word data with sign from P278 word data 32 PDSORT S2 the area specified by S1 to S2 are bit S3 sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first F282 Scaling of SCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the 16 bit data input value X by performing scaling e for the given data table F283 Scaling of DSCAL S1 The output value Y is found for the P283 32 bit data PDSCAL S2 D input value X by performing scaling 10 x for the given
539. ucted between a computer and a PLC using Ethernet by the computer link e Remote programming and monitoring is possible via LAN line by using a programming tool such as FPWIN GR Outline of operation e Establish connection between a computer and the FP X e In that case the connected computer is called Client and the connected FP X is called Server After connection establishment communication via TCP IP is conducted Up to 3 connections can be established at the specified source port Computer FP Client Server ty p aE b gas al I 5 a Connection establishment Riese E e 1 g 1 Du Sake ad A ae ed ee eee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting of communication environment for Computer link Ethernet The following two settings for the FP X and communication cassette AFPX COM5 should be set Communication environment of FP X Communication environment of Communication cassette AFPX COM5 Setting communication environment of FP X The programming tool FPWIN GR is used to set the baud rate or communication format of the COM1 port Select Option PLC Configuration in the menu bar and click COM1 Port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Contiguration Untitlel HoldMon hold 1 Mo t10 Unito x Mo 413 Communication Format No412 Comm Mode Char Bit 8 Bits Computer Link Parity Odd
540. ue should be read based on the content If the processing is not completed successfully an error code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked 1 2 0 L If the read command was used the data that was read is stored here C 0 1 R C R lf normal Command name lf error occurs Error code Response code If normal ASCII code H24 If error occurs ASCII code H21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator end code There is always a Cp ASCII code HOD at the end of the message alll Note When reading e If no response is returned the communication format may not be correct or the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC e If the response contains an instead of a the command was not processed successfully The response will contain a communication error code Check the meaning of the error code e Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding resp
541. ue will change to K8000 within 70 seconds Practice in the ladder program a process for avoiding a risk would be resulting from a broken wire and exchange the thermocouple Note2 From the Power on to the converted data Ready the digital value will be K8001 Create a ladder program not to use the data obtained during that period Terminal layout CHO CHI CHO Thermocouple input Ea ri Es Thermocouple input CH1 Thermocouple input Thermocouple input eee NC Used by the system NC NC Do not connect NC 1L D aa anythin Channel 0 y J NC Keep the space more than 100 mm between the input line and the power line high voltage line It is recommended to ground the unit using the shielded compensating wire Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Range setting switch Select the thermocouple type K or J with the switch at the back The CHO and CH1 will be the same range Switch backside Thermocouple type K Thermocouple type J K and J range Conversion characteristics graph E 3 lt Conversion value gt 50 1 500 1 C a Input value gt When exceeding the rated range Converted value 50 1 C or less K 501 500 1 C or more K 5001 or K 8000 When wire is broken K 8000 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation n
542. uipment as a slave unit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Positioning control supported through high speed counter and pulse output With the FP X Tr type a high speed counter function can be used by using the CPU I O With the FP X Ry type a high speed counter and pulse output functions can be used by using the pulse I O cassette The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100KHz enabling positioning control using a stepping motor or servo motor Note The pulse I O cassette cannot be used for the FP X Tr type Measurement using high speed counter supported Encoder Pulse input FP X 5 AUIL Encoder Pulse input FEEFEE JUUUL Increment input mode decrement input mode 2 phase input mode individual input mode and direction discrimination mode are supported Note Differs depending on combinations Positioning control based on pulse output supported Motor FP X Pulse output a E F T f a T A oe ai a 4 Pulse output Pulse direction and clockwise counter clockwise output are supported Heater control based on PWM output function supported The pulse output at any duty ratio can be picked up with special instruction WVhen you increase the pulse width Juul a Heating increases When you decrease it lt 7 sa LILI Analog potentiometer volume dial An analog potentiometer volume dia
543. umsasouncdl Special input Software filter settings 1 of CPU input Nagla Baudrate J600 bps Software filter settings 2 of CPU input e ER er ge a e ane a e A Software filter settings 3 of CPU input aaa E Software filter settings 4 of CPU input Tool Port COM Fort Cancel Read PLE Initialize Help ag a Reference lt MODBUS RTU Specifications gt It can be downloaded from our website http panasonic denko co jp ac e dl manual list plc jsp Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 6 2 MEWTOCOL Master Sample Program Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function IEF Note Available for the transistor type and relay type Ver 1 21 or later version only Sample program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 k Fo Mv H2 DT100 J FO MV H1001 DT10 O 7 Note 1 Fo MV HO WRO J F1DMV HO _ptTso Fi1DMV _ HFFFFFFFF DT60 R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 2 is the transmission condition of read command ji R9044 RO R1 Note 2 RO R2 Compares the write data DT50 and DT51
544. unication cassette e Application cassettes DC 8 point input type transistor 8 point NPN output type transistor 6 point PNP output type DC 4 point input transistor 3 point NPN output type analog 2 ch output type analog 2 ch input analog 1 ch output type thermocouple 2 ch type RTD 2 ch type analog 2 ch input type high speed counter input pulse output type master memory type with realtime clock 32k step program can be copied and stored e Communication cassettes 1 ch RS232C type 2 ch RS232C type 1 ch RS485 RS422 changeover type 1 ch RS232C 1 ch RS485 type Ethernet 1 ch RS232C type 2 ch RS485 type FPO expansion units can be connected as well as the exclusive expansion unit A maximum of 3 FPO expansion units can be connected using the expansion FPO adapter A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB communication port A personal computer can be directly connected with the USB cable excluding C14 The USB amp RS232C conversion adapter cable is not necessary A tool port RS232C is also equipped Commercial USB cables can be used ARS232C port ts also equipped Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net High dimensional security functions to deal with copying programs The uploading disabling function prohibits uploading reading programs in the PLC main unit and prevent illegal copying It also enables to transfer
545. unication cassette Setting Baud rate of COM Port 9600 bps v ltem Defat Communication mode E ESA Note1 Specify the same baud rate as the Destination IP Address i2 168 1 100 communication environment setting of the Destination Port No 9094 1025 32767 COM1 port of the FP X Source Port No 0 01025 32767 Timeout oc sec 0 No Timeout 0 1800 Retry Time 15 sec 0 No Retry 0 1800 Note If you want to transmit data when connection is not established the connection can be established from the AFPX COM5 and data can be transmitted Communication Mode Co mputer Link hd Server Setting Source Port No 1025 32767 Timeout sec 0 No Timeout 40 1800 In the TCP it takes some time for connection The connection timeout for the AFPX COM5 is the same as the response timeout value Set the timeout time for the SEND RECV instruction longer than the response timeout value to judge the connection timeout Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net MEWTOCOL master setting in UDP Communication Setting Communication protocol Client connection Baud rate COM1 15200 bps 9600 bps Note1 Protocol Mode juoP z Cancel Action Mode Option Settine Client Mode X Control unit Communication cassette Setting Baud rate of COMI 9600 bps hd Communication Mode Computer Link Computer link
546. unter clockwise output method Forward Reverse Control is carried out using two pulses a forward rotation pulse and a on 1 a E a reverse rotation pulse 200 Sew pase lyon tf LF LF LE LL 201 Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON Forward ee Reverse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and Y100 FIEL PLETAL FLELELELE another to specify the direction of Y200 aie rotation with on off signals In this e Y101 OFF ON mode forward rotation is carried out Y201 when the rotation direction signal is OFF incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse OFF Forward Reverse Control is carried out using one pulse output to specify the speed and 100 PPLE LALA fF FE FLA LF another to specify the direction of Y200 o rotation with on off signals In this Y101 ON OFF mode forward rotation is carried out direction Sign Y201 when the rotation direction signal is ON Incremental counting Decremental counting IEF Note The output signals are the numbers on the pulse I O cassette When executing the pulse output only pulses are output The output memory Y100 Y200 and Y201is not output Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email
547. uted F received Fi e The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on e Also When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e f there are two headers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer e The reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sending data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows i f k yf 7 Transmitted data_______ sT a _erm _____ sp fe Hd e ET ale k S T i WY On Gand Transmission Transmission ON Transmission done flag R9039 or OFF R9049 ri y Duplex transmission ON disabled while F159 MTRWN is bein F159 MTRN A Sa OFF instruction execution fter Send buffe a a a pb fe bo b Number of byt
548. utomation net 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 1 AC Power Supply C14 C30R C60 Rated voltage 100 to 240 V AC Voltage regulation range 85 to 264 V AC Inrush current 40 Aor less at 240 V AC 25 C 45 Aor less at 240 V AC 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms when using 100 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Leakage current 0 75 mA or less between input and protective earth terminals pierna eine SHREY Pale 20 000 hours at 55 C Guaranteed life Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Transformer insulation Terminal screw M3 2 2 2 Service Power Supply for Input Output AC Power Supply Type Only Specifications C14 C30 C60 Rated output voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Rated output current 0 15 A Overcurrent protection l l Available function Terminal screw M3 Note This is a function to protect overcurernt temporarily which protects the output short circuit If the short circuit is detected all the power supply for the PLC will be turned off If a current load that is out of the specifications is connected and the overloaded status continues it may lead to damages 2 2 3 DC Power Supply C14 C30 C60 Rated voltage 24 V DC Voltage regulation range 20 4 to 28 8 V DC nrush current 12 Aor less at 25 C Momentary power off time 10 ms Internal power supply part Guaranteed life Fuse Built in Cannot be replaced Insulation system Tr
549. utomation net Email info ctiautomation net
550. vailable if executing the HSC match ON OFF instruction other pulse I O process simultaneously or executing the interrupt program PWM output function PWM output when using CPU output IN Speca eutput Output frequenc counter contact used p ae y Related instructions channel No Control flag When resolution 1000 FO MV High speed counter 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz control 0 0 to 99 9 F1 DMV Read write of When resolution 100 elapsed value of high speed 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz counter 0 to 99 F173 PWMH PWM output When resolution 1000 FO MV High speed counter 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz control 0 0 to 99 9 F1 DMV Read write of When resolution 100 elapsed value of high speed 15 6 kHz only counter 0 to 99 F173 PWMH PWM output Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions Simplified chart Maximum counting speed of High speed counter The maximum counting speed of the high speed counter varies according to No of channels to be used or the simultaneous use of the pulse output function Use the chart below as a guide Max counting speed Frequency kHz Combination with pulse output function No pulse output Combination of high speed counter Single phase high Single phase medium speed channels speed channels 2 phase 2 phase medium high speed 20 Ea T S EH ee 5 i
551. value preset in S and stores the elapsed value in D F119 Left right shift LRSR D1 Shifts one bit to the left or right with register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as the register Data rotate instructions Rotates the n bits in data of D to P120 rotate PROR the right Rotates the n bits in data of D to P121 rotate PROL the left 16 bit data right Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry PRCR consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the right 16 bit data left fac al Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area rotate with carry PRCL consisting of D plus the carry flag flag R9009 data R9009 data to the left 32 bit data right DROR D Rotates the number of bits specified rotate PDROR by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right 32 bit data left DROL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate PDROL by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left 32 bit data right DRCR D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry lan al by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data 32 bit data left DRCL D n Rotates the number of bits specified rotate with carry PDRCL by n of the double words data 32 flag R9009 data bits specified by D 1 D to the left to
552. ve buffer Data is sent and received E yi E through the data registers Reference lt 7 2 1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port gt System register settings e In the default settings the COM1 port is set to computer link mode Settings for COM1 port No Name Set Value No 412 Selection of communication mode General purpose serial communication COM1 port No 413 Communication format for COM1port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1port 2400 to 115200 bps COM1 port for COM1 port Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices Note2 The terminal units of AFPX COM3 AFPX COM4 and AFPX COM6G are specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette Note3 The baud rates of 300 600 and 1200 bps can be specified by the SYS1 instruction However the setting value of the system register cannot be changed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 Communication Function 3 PC PLC Link 7 5 1 PC PLC Link Overview e The PLC link is an economic way of linking PLCs of the FP X FP2 and FP2 MCU using a twisted pair cable e Data is shared between the PLCs using link relays L and link registers LD e The statuses of the li
553. ve condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S 1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 2 or S1 1 1 S2 1 2 O Available Not available A Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FP 32k type Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 17 3 Table of High level Instructions FPO FP e FP2SH FP10SH The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level For the FPO FPOR FP2 FP X the P type high level instructions are not available ae bit data DMV ee D eis all S D 1 D move PDMV Bit data BIM The specified
554. ved E Gai mounting part 1 Cassette WARS A part 2 State thatthe expansion State that the expansion cover cover was removed and battery cover was removed A HE Emme S0 AE mE ao oase gpi Jag OCE a baeaeceodedan a JO aie k del RINO E88 OS SS SSE ERRER EEEE Z aj E Cassette mounting part 1 i pa connector part 2 Eae ap Sa o al State that the expansion Cassette mounting part 2 iaaa siia State that the expansion cover was removed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error LED and operation status Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is E being executed RUN It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Lights when in the PROG Mode and indicates that operation has stopped G Lights when in the PROG Mode during forced input output It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic ERROR function ERROR ALARM Lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated ALARM Input output indicator LEDs Indicates the on off status of the input and output RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation
555. vol v2 va ve ve va J ve no a Service power Output terminal Not used supply for input output Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX C30TD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal _ jcom x1 x3 x5 x7 x9_ uel Ivi ye vs y vo vs YD en Power suppi tor voto w7 Nc vol v2 va ve ve va ve nc Rion Powersuppi torve to vo Lal L Not used Output terminal Not used AFPX C30PD DC power supply terminal input Input terminal Moo mn _ jcom x1 x3 xs x7 x9 COM Incl Tyr Tvs bys ly vo vB YD ten Power suppi torvo to v7 no vo v2 val ve ve va vc no Rian Power suppi torve tovo Ld LJ Not used Output terminal Not used AFPX C60T AC power supply terminal input Input terminal 1 Not used Input terminal 2 a TI o o E a NC COM COM X11 X13 X15 X17 X19 X1B X1D X1F NC Y1 13 Y15 Ld LJ Lou Jj L Service patel Output terminal 1 Not used Not used Output terminal 2 Not used toed 7 Left Power supply for YO to Y7 Left Power supply for Y10 to Y17 Right Power supply for Y8 to YD Right Power supply for Y18 to Y1D Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net AFPX C60P AC power supply l terminal in
556. w ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 8 Communication with FPWIN GR 1 Boot up the FPWIN GR 2 When the FPWIN GR activates the download select window will open Select Cancel here FPWIN GR Upload from PLC Cancel 3 Select Communication setting in Option menu 1E FPWIN GR File View Option Help Cl tar bel Communication Settings EPWIN GR Configuration FO Gomer Customize Private Configuration 4 Specify the communication setting as the table below Once the setting has been completed the communication with the USB becomes available Communication Setting Untitlel Network type C NET RS2320 7 COM port EE F Cancel Baud rate pE amt Initialize gt Data length J 7 bits fe bits Help Stop bit f 1 bit C 2 bits Parity f Non f Odd f Even Co Time out 5 Y S60 r Parameter for automatic setting W Baud rate W Data Length fw Parity COM port No allocated for the USB Baud rate Specify 115200 bps Communicates with 115200 bps when the USB is connected Data length Stop bit Party Odd o O Network type C NET RS232C Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 9 Reinstallation of USB Driver The USB driver must be installed again if the installation was carried out in wrong procedures or cancelled in the process Also reins
557. w ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 1 Expansion of Application Cassette Following two methods of expansion are available for the FP X 1 Add on the FP X expansion unit or FPO expansion unit expansion FPO adapter with the expansion cable 2 Add on the add on cassette in the cassette mounting part of the FP X control unit For the FP X the add on cassette application cassette and communication cassette can be installed on the FP X control unit The number of the expansion units that can be installed varies depending on the types of the control unit C14 Control unit fe EOS EALER ENTENEN EA oE ot Parnaronie POREO REPO RET a AEO i PIE SESGO a OOO Two application cassettes can be installed Pee ee i E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 2 Application Cassettes po Nme Specifications I O No Product No FP X analog input cassette FP X analog output cassette FP X analog I O cassette FP X thermocouple cassette FP X RTD cassette FP X input cassette 2 channel analog input
558. ware filter settings 4 of CPU input ir cent pea zi COM1 Port COM Port Cancel i LI Initialize Help No 410 unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 No 412 Communication mode Select the tool port operation mode Click on Y and select Computer Link No 413 Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit 8 bits Parity a na Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator Cannot be specified Header Cannot be specified To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the tool port enter the settings for the various items The terminator and the header cannot be changed No 415 Baud rate setting The default setting for the baud rate is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the tool port Click on Rak and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting communication parameters in the general purpose serial communication mode By default the tool port is set to Computer link System register settings should be entered for the following items The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration
559. word Input a password to be set Click Settings Input the password for confirmation again and click OK The setting has completed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password Bet ELO Poseword z Untitlel As the dialog box is shown select as below Current status 8 digits Protect Close KE Available retry counts 3 counts Force Caneel D g it num b er digit number Help Select 4 digits or 8 digits C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Brereton Nave Operation Mode C Protect Select Access C Unprotect 8 digits password ee reer 4 digits or 8 digits password Setting for FP memory loader option Input a password to be set IV Allow the download to older than Version 2 5 z Click Settings The setting has completed IN PLC became enabled to write read a le Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting Po eseription Program Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained os l All programs are deleted Erases all programs and security information to a Force cancel
560. work is called a C NET The maximum of 99 FP X units can be connected with one personal computer e The PLC answers automatically to the commands received from the computer so no program is necessary on the PLC side in order to carry out communication Computer FP X Command message p a Response message eee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 2 USB Port Setting Setting communication parameters in the computer link mode Setting for Baud rate and communication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the tool port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM2 Port 3 Key Point The default setting is Internal USB for the port selection so that the setting is not necessary unless the default setting has not been changed Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Configuration Untrtlel Hald Nor hold 1 Hold on hold 2 Motil UnitNo 1 No414 Communication Format Action on Error Time No412 Comm Mode Char Bit E Bits a ine Parity Odd Pulse 10 cassette settings HSC PLS Modem Enabled a Stop Bit Controller input settings HSC f Interrupt pulse catch settings Port selection Intemal USB Interrupt edge settings Time constant setting 1 of CPU input Time constant setting 2 of CPU input No4
561. ws 1 N is preset in S The reception done flag R9038 R9048 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to 0 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in S 1 of the table e During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns off e If system register 413 or 414 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data e The terminator end code specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data DTidi OTe DTi DTi 4 Transmission data Ale Ic IDE FIG H Cr ON OFF R9039 R049 Execution condition ON RO 1 OFF i F 159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions e Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number e If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 or 414 to Terminator None Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator RO Ho Ji gt F159 MTRN DT100 K 8 K 1 E g 3 Key Point e Do not include the terminator end c
562. x 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Sample program Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direction When XO turns on the pulse is output from CW output Y100 of the specified channel CHO Note In that case the memory Y100 does not turn on off according to the pulse output and also the monitoring is not possible O V 24 V DC Pulse output CW PLORO Pulse output CCW FP X Py aaa Start input Y101 Motor driver side 10000 pulses Program XO R911C R12 R10 e ee DF Positioning operation running J R10 E R10 R11 a a a a DF w Positioning operation start _ R11 Positioning data table _F1 Dmv H 1100 0T 100 Conrolcode H1100 F1 DMV K500 DT 102 Initial speed 500 Hz F1 DMV K 5000 DT 104 a tacts Acceleration time 300 ms F1 DMV K300 DT106 Target value 10000 pulses Movement t F1 Dmv K10000 DT108 kamaa Fi Dmv KO DT 110 Conrolcode HI 400 uU 25 48 Hz to100 kHz Incremental CW and CCW F171 SPDH DT 100 KO Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT100is used and pulses are output from CHO L Pulses are output from CHO R911C R10 TO R12 PO ee ee DF Positioning done pulse 1 second R12 _ _ gt TMX 0 K10 0 1 s type timer Pulse output diagram
563. xadecimal 12 3 9 A B F e Slot No Slot No is the number indicating the installing position of the cassette which is used to generate programs by the add on cassette Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 2 Allocation of FP X Control Unit The I O allocation of FP X control unit is fixed I O numbers Type of control unit Number of allocation I O number Input 8 points XO to X7 FP X C14 control unit aetna Output 6 points YO to Y5 Input 16 points XO to XF FP X uni C30 control unit Output 14 points YO to YD XO to XF Input 32 points X10 to X1F FP X C60 control unit er ne YO to YD e i a Y10 to Y1D 4 3 FPO Expansion Unit Allocation The FP X expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP X control unit I O numbers when installed as the first expansion unit Type of expansion unit Number of allocation 1 O number l Input 8 points X300 to X307 FP X E16 expansion I O unit Output 8 points A T FP X E30 expansion I O unit DEE UE DOU X 0U tO A UE Output 14 points Y300 to Y30D FP X E16X expansion input unit Input 16 points X300 to X30F FP X E14YR expansion output unit Output 14 points Y300 to Y30D Note E16 cannot be connected on the right side of E16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 4 Allocation of FPO Expansion Unit 4 4 1 VO Allocat
564. xceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Unchanged J Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged ea Value preceding the input of 4001 0 V to 10 V output Conversion characteristics graph lt 4 Output signal range gt 1000 2000 3000 4000 K lt Digital input value Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Table of D A converted values Digital input value Output voltage V Ooo ee Y OO O po 2400 po 8200 8 po G00 10 0 When exceeding the rated range Digital input value Analog output value Negative value Unchanged g Value preceding the input of a negative value Unchanged pee mG Value preceding the input of 4001 Each channel data is allocated as I O data as shown below Installed slot No i ten alas aa Cassette mounting part1 Cassette mounting part 2 p Slot 0 Slot 1 WY10 wy20 wy11 WY21 IES ner Note e Use double core twisted pair shielded wires It is recommended to ground them However depending on the conditions of the external noise it may be better not to ground the shielding e Do not have the analog output wiring close to AC wires power wires or load DA part Internal block diagram A voltage amplifier and a current amplifier is connected in parallel to one DA converter IC Do not connect an analog device to the voltage output terminal and
565. ximum of 3 units of the FPO expansion units expansion I O unit intelligent unit can be used using the expansion FPO adapter All FPO expansion unit can be used DC input unit Transistor output unit Relay output unit Analog I O unit Thermocouple unit Network unit Expansion FPO expansion adapter FPO up to 3 units adapter cS er a The expansion FPO adapter does not function by itself Always connect the FPO expansion unit to it Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 3 2 Parts and Functions FP X expansion FPO adapter AFPX EFP0O J ry y y riy ph yY y 5 t rrr 7 J gt yy y E HH I bed bet bel gt HT Wh muUUUD UUUUA SHH Hoe ee Es r Orom ji E fow CH L i shelele SE H Hi he AFPX EFP F Su DIN standard m rail attachment HH When the power of 24 V DC is supplied and the communication starts with the control unit the LED lights When the communication cannot be carried out it goes out When the communication starts with the control unit the LED lights When the communication cannot be carried out it goes out When the FPO expansion unit is not connected it flashes ERROR Red When an error occurs on the connection with the FPO expansion unit it flashes FP X expansion bus connector Connects the FP X control unit or FP X expansion unit
566. xist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Baud rate setting 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of 2048 0 to 32764 general serial data communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note1 The communication format in a PC PLC link is fixed at the following settings the data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps Note2 The USB port for C30 and C60 can be selected by the system register setting The USB port has been selected for the COM2 port of C30 and C60 as default setting The USB port is 115 2 kbps despite of the baud rate setting No 415 The setting for No 412 must be changed to communication cassette for using the COM2 port of the communication cassette The COM2 port of the USB port and the communication cassette cannot be used at the same time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Default Description value p Controller input time constant setting 1 X0 to X3 Controller input time constant setting 1 X4 to X7 Controller input time Cont constant setting 2 ller X8 to XB inp Controller input time ime constant setting 2 XC to XF Controller input time s t constant setting 3 tings X10 to X13 Note1 Controller input time constant setting 3 X14 to X17 Cont
567. y time Seale be ees ll eee ree lL Pee ee 100ms Oms 1000ms 1000ms 2000ms 1000ms 2000ms z 7 Cursor information 4 e Online Offline u s Setting s Scale Monitor la Fun Pro y lt gt le gt Ready NUM h 1 Sampling at regular time intervals 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to Trace Set the sampling rate time Sampling Configurations Mode eens Cancel Sampling Times f 000 Times 100 1000 75 Help Sampling Rate T Every SMFL instruction i ng msec 10 30000 Delay Times i ag Times 1 999 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 Start monitoring Start with the Piil button 2 Sampling by instruction 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to Trace Set the sampling rate time to 0 Mode TRACE E Cancel Sampling Times fi 000 Times 100 1000 Hel Help m Sampling Rate prrseeessesesessesesesesasessseseesseesessssssseseesansy Delay Times 100 Times 1 999 3 Read data by trigger 1 Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been s
568. y S1 and S2 are F ROM of the IC card specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the area starting at D F14 Program read PGRD The program specified using S is P14 from IC PPGRD transferred into the CPU from IC memory memory card card and executes it Available gt Not available Not available partially The data specified by S1 and S2 are A This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected Ee bit data awe D Ee ae Reading of GETS The head word No of the specified slot is head word PGETS read var No of the specified slot D Two 32 bit DMV2 data move PDMV2 S2 D S2 1 S2 gt D 3 D 2 2 D of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 Data write to PICWT EEP ROM 2 D transferred to the EEP ROM starting at D D transferred to the F ROM starting at D Data read ICRD from IC card PICRD S2 D D transferred to the IC card expansion 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later and FP e D o D i D ic ele le Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net FP2SH FP10SH P15 exchange PXCH P16 hende PDXCH o a LD D1 F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D P17 byte in 16 bit PSWAP are exchanged 3 data
569. y S 2 24V DC 24V DC Sifu ol vp mp Power supply 5 O y l Power supply E ZAOH Ha TA of load dea S FAJ she FA 37 ol oad VOC ei a 5to 24 Q Sto 24 VD v 5 ji terminal g 5 terminal c O a eo a O a Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points R Reference lt 2 5 Limitations on Number of Simultaneous Input Output On Points gt Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 4 3 Transistor Tr Type PNP Output specifications tem ton Oo O C14 Allowable load voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC range Input points per common 2 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more OFF gt ON 20 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to YT Load current at 15 mA or more Response 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 time 8 us or less YO to Y3 Load current at 15 mA or more ONOFF 30 us or less C14 Y4 to Y5 C30 C60 Y4 to Y7 Load current at 15 mA or more 1 ms or less C14 None C30 C60 from Y8 Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC YOto Y5 Y7 Y8toYD Y10 to Y17 Y18 to Y1D wie C14 External power supply or less or less or less or less or less or less or less Circuit diagram PNP output YO to Y3 from Y4 l Output indicator LED Output indicator LED l l AA 4 terminal i M a terminal il 1 o gt l dL i I E

Panasonic FP-X Programmable Controller User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents